Contents
- Foreword
- Translator's Note
- Preface to the First Edition
- Preface to the Twelfth Edition
- -
- The Autobiography of a Forest Monk
- Parents' Life Story
- An Auspicious 'Dream' and A True
Perception of my Youth
- -
- 1. Oppressive Times and Its Effect on
People
- 2. Meeting Venerable Ajahn Singh
Khantayaagamo
- 3. Leaving Home for a Second Time
(Following after Ven. Ajahn Singh)
- 4. Receiving the Going Forth as a
Novice (Further Studies)
- 5. A Novice Becomes Government
Millionaire
- 6. Ordination at Wat Sutat-narahm
- 7. First Taste of Yearning
- 8. A Group of Tudong Monks Leaves
Ubon
- 9. Meeting the Venerable Ajahn Mun
for the First Time
- 10. Second Rains Retreat, 1924 (at
Nong Laht)
- 11. Third Rains Retreat, 1925 (at
Nah Chang Nam)
- 12. Fourth Rains Retreat, 1926 (in a
Cemetery North of Ahgaht Amnoy District)
- 13. Fifth Rains Retreat, 1927 (Again
at Nah Chang Nam Village)
- 14. Sixth Rains Retreat, 1928 (at
Phra Nah Phak Hork Cave)
- 15. Rains Retreat, 1929, at Nah Sai
Village
- 16. Eighth Rains Retreat, 1930 (with
Ajahn Maha Pin at Phra Kreur Village)
- 17. Ninth Rains Retreat, 1931 (in
the District of Phon)
- 18. Tenth Rains Retreat in Korat,
1932
- 19. Eleventh Rains Retreat, 1932 (at
Wat Araññavasee in Tah Bor)
- 20. Twelfth Rains Retreat, 1934 (at
Pah Mi-ang Maer Pung; A New Way of Meditation Practice)
- 21. Thirteenth Rains Retreat, 1935
(at a Moo-ser Village (Bahn Poo Phayah))
- 22. Fourteenth Rains Retreat, 1936
(The Same Location with Three Monks)
- 23. Fifteenth Rains Retreat, 1937 (Bahn
Pong in Maer Dtaeng District)
- 24. Sixteenth Rains Retreat, 1938
(in Nong Doo Village, Pah Sahng District, Lampoon
Province)
- 25. Seventeenth to Twenty-fifth
Rains Retreats, 1939-47 (in Wat Araññavaasee, Tah Bor,
Nongkhai)
- 26. Twenty-sixth and Twenty-seventh
Rains Retreat, 1948-1949 (Khao Noi, Tah Chalaep,
Chantaburi Province)
- 27. Twenty-eighth Rains Retreat,
1950 (Koke Kloi, Phang-nga Province)
- 28. Twenty-ninth to Forty-first
Rains Retreat, 1951-63 (in Phuket)
- 29. Forty Second Rains Retreat, 1964
(Tam Khahm Cave, Phannah Nikom District, Sakhon Nakorn
Province)
- 30. Forty-third to Fiftieth Rains
Retreat, 1965-72 (at Hin Mark Peng)
- 31. Fifty-first and Fifty-second
Rains Retreat, 1973-74 (Establishing Wang Nam Mork as a
Monks' Dwelling Place)
- 32. Fifty-third Rains Retreat, 1975
(Building Wat Lumpini)
- 33. Fifty-fourth Rains Retreat,
1976-77 (Spreading the Dhamma Abroad)
- 34. Fifty-fifth and Fifty-sixth
Rains Retreat, 1977-1978 (This Conditioned Body is the
Va.tacakra)
- 35. Fifty-seventh Rains Retreat up
to the Present, 1979-1991
- 36. Summary
- Translator's Epilogue
- Venerable Ajahn Thate's Funeral
- Appendix A: Siila (Precepts)
- Appendix B: The Dhamm' Characters as
Written by Venerable Ajahn Fan Aacaaro
- Appendix C: The Buddhist Order of
Monks in Thailand
- Appendix D: More Building Projects
- Glossary
-
-
Steps Along the Path
- The Meaning of Anattaa
|
Foreword
Since the time of the Buddha, more than two
thousand five hundred years ago, monks have retreated into the
depths of the forests, mountains and caves, seeking physical
isolation to aid them in the development of meditation and
realization of Dhamma, the truth of the Buddha's
Teaching. Whether in solitude or in small groups, such monks
live a life of simplicity, austerity and determined effort and
have included some of the greatest meditation masters since
the Buddha himself. Far from cities and towns, willing to put
up with the rigours and hardships of living in the wild for
the opportunity to learn from nature, and uninterested in
worldly fame or recognition, these forest monks often remain
unknown, their life stories lost among the jungle thickets and
mountain tops.
This book is the autobiography of one such
monk. Venerable Ajahn Thate recorded his own life story — it
was first published for his seventy-second birthday
celebration — so that it might be of benefit to those monks,
nuns, laymen and laywomen following him. He recounts his life
from his boyhood encounter with forest monks to his final
status as one of the great masters of the modern era.
Venerable Ajahn Thate passed away in 1994 aged ninety-two.
In his Autobiography, the author also takes
the opportunity to record his gratitude to all those people —
whether monks or lay — who had helped him over those years.
Much of this is directed towards the ordinary rural villagers
of the Northeast of Thailand who are Ven. Ajahn Thate's own
stock. Although it is the poorest and most underdeveloped
region, the people there are particularly devout Buddhists and
it is from them that most of the Thai meditation masters have
arisen. In later years, this Northeast-based Forest
Kammatthana (Tudong) Tradition started to attract the
interest of sophisticated city folk and he also describes and
acknowledges this trend.
This book is not intended only a
description of Ven. Ajahn Thate's experiences but is a
narrative of a personal spiritual quest and contains advice
and reflections on Buddhist meditation and practice. It also,
incidentally, offers a unique, grassroots perspective on rural
life spanning a period of unprecedented change in Thai
culture. However, Ven. Ajahn Thate did not just stay in his
native region, for he wandered through the forests to all
corners of Thailand and even across its borders. He gives us
therefore also glimpses of Laos and the Shan States, and notes
that would be interesting even to the anthropologist. The
descriptions of his journeys to Singapore, Indonesia and
Australia are mainly for his Thai readers but even so they
give a new reflection on 'developed countries'.
Lay disciples have sometimes written
biographies of deceased meditation masters not knowing all the
influential events in their teachers' lives. Some biographies
have been idealized out of respect for the teacher. Ven. Ajahn
Thate, however, writes with straightforward frankness,
honestly relating the events that affected him most deeply and
were instrumental in shaping his life. Ven. Ajahn Thate lived
into his nineties and in the later years of his long life he
was considered the most senior disciple of the 'fathers' of
the contemporary forest tradition of Northeast Thailand, Ven.
Ajahn Bhuuridatta and Ven. Ajahn Sao Kantasiilo. During his
early years of practice he had enjoyed a privileged intimacy
with these great teachers.
In writing his autobiography, Ven. Ajahn
Thate assumes a familiarity with the Thai forest tradition and
its ways of practice, so the following brief explanation of
the lifestyle and its purpose may be helpful.
In former times, the monasteries in the
villages and towns of Thailand were usually the principal
centers of learning. The village monastery provided a
spiritual center for the village, where rites and ceremonies
could be performed and where local boys could become monks,
learn to read and perhaps start to study the Buddhist
scriptures. (Traditionally, all the boys in a family were
expected to become novices or monks for at least one
three-month Rains Retreat period.) In the more isolated rural
areas, however, knowledge of the Vinaya (the monks'
training rules laid down by the Buddha) was often only
rudimentary and therefore standards were not very strict.
Young monks who were interested in furthering their Buddhist
studies could transfer to a monastery in a local market town,
provincial center or even Bangkok. The programme there,
however, would more usually be dedicated to scholastic study
than strict observance of the monk's rules or meditation.
The revival of the forest tradition in
Thailand during the last century was a grassroots movement to
return to the lifestyle and training that was practiced in the
time of the Buddha. Some monks abandoned the busy village and
town monasteries for the peace and quiet of the forest. They
followed the Vinaya Rule more strictly, emphasizing the
importance of every detail. Such monks lived without money,
living frugally on whatever was offered and patiently enduring
when necessities were scarce. They integrated the extra
austere practices (tudong) recommended by the Buddha into
their lifestyle. For example, eating only one meal a day from
their alms bowl, wearing robes made from discarded cloth, and
living in the forest or in cemeteries — often using a krot
(a 'tent-umbrella' with mosquito net) for shelter. These
forest monks would often wander barefoot through the sparsely
settled regions — Thailand's previously small population was
scattered over quite a large country — seeking places
conducive to meditation.
The very heart of the forest tradition is
the development of meditation. By cultivating deep states of
tranquillity and systematically investigating the body and
mind, insight can arise into the true nature of existence. The
forest masters were noted for their creativity in overcoming
the problems, hindrances and defilements of the mind, and for
their daring determination to realize Nibbana,
enlightenment, the fulfillment of the spiritual path taught by
the Buddha.
The reader is asked to remember that this
work was written by a Thai for a Thai audience, with no
thought of its being translated into English. It depicts and
represents the lifestyle, social values and gender roles of a
rural Asian culture at the beginning of this century. The
experience of ultimate reality must necessarily be expressed
through the conventional modes of a particular time and place.
Furthermore, the author often wrote specifically for young
monks, giving advice and warnings. Nonetheless, the timeless
truths of Ven. Ajahn Thate's wisdom shine forth, bound neither
by era nor culture.
Nearly all the tropical forest Ven. Ajahn
Thate walked through and described had been destroyed during
his lifetime. In an attempt to slow this destruction and save
such forest as remains, forest monks have often been in the
forefront of raising social awareness of environmental issues.
In many areas the only patches of forest left are those
protected behind forest monastery walls.
This book also includes two other examples
of Ven. Ajahn Thate's Dhamma teachings, for those who want a
practical guide on the path to serenity and insight: Steps
Along the Path and The Meaning of Anatta, both
translated by Thanissaro Bhikkhu. (Other English translations
available are: Only the World Ends (translated by
Jayasaro Bhikkhu) and Buddho (translated by Thanissaro
Bhikkhu.)
Ven. Ajahn Thate dedicated his life to the
Buddha, Dhamma and Sangha, and from great compassion he taught
and trained his followers in the practices leading to Nibbana.
It is our sincere wish that the readers of his autobiography
find it to be a source of inspiration and that they experience
the deep peace, joy and wisdom that are the fruits of the
Buddha's path.
Translators
Translator's Note
Due to this memoir's uniqueness and
importance, I have aimed for an accurate translation even at
the cost of losing some of the original's spirit and
inspiration. However, in some places with a wholly Thai
context, material has been condensed and this is shown by
ellipses (...).
All (parentheses) are from the original,
[brackets] and footnotes have been added by the translators.
The author had brought the book up to date with additions and
the translation has kept to that structure, the section
numbering therefore comes from the original. ???
Please see the Glossary for an explanation
of many words and terms. (Note that there is a separate
glossary for Steps Along The Path.)
??? Transliteration of Thai names and terms
into the meager twenty-six letters of the English alphabet
must always involve a compromise between consistency and
readability. Pali names and terms are problematic because of
type and diacritical restrictions in this electronic format.
We have at least tried to show some long Pali vowels by
following the convention of doubling up the English vowel,
e.g., "Paatimokkha". The 'n tilde' is shown by an "ny". The
glossary has extra indications where a 'period' indicates that
there is a dot under\over the following letter, e.g., "Kamma.t.thaana".
???
Dates in the original are always given
according to the (Thai) Buddhist Era (B.E.). We have converted
them to the Common Era which began 543 years later; e.g., B.E.
2539 is C.E. 1996.
Titles and honorifics are important in Thai
social interaction. I have tried to follow this convention,
remaining faithful to the original, and hope that it does not
prove too unwieldy.
Many people have helped in the realization
of this completely new translation. (Mr. Siri Buddhasukh
produced an early translation in 1978, which he entitled My
Life.) This more thorough translation originated through
the energy of Upasika Tan Bee Chun. Ven. Bhikkhu Ñaanadhammo
put a great deal of work into assisting with the translation
and then Jane B. and Steve G. in Cornwall, England, Barry (now
Bhikkhu Santidhammo) in Australia, Khun V. and Khunying
Suripan in Thailand, all helped to complete the task.
We ask forgiveness from the venerable
author and our readers for any inadequacies or mistakes in the
actual translation. Any translation must inevitably fall short
of the original and in the end it rests with you, the reader,
to complete the translation within yourself. Whether monk, nun
or lay person, from East or West, may this 'life of Dhamma'
inspire you to enrich your own life through the practice of
Dhamma.
A. Bhikkhu
September 1996
Preface to the First Edition
Most biographies are written by someone
else, or when the person in question is already dead. There is
the tendency to follow conventional writing sensibilities by
eulogising the subject, in a way similar to what one hears at
the funeral rites. Though one might know that the person had
also committed some dark deeds, etiquette and decorum dictate
what can be recorded. Good manners are exhibited in four ways:
1. A person is bad in many ways. When
asked about him or her one should not reply or only say a
little.
2. A person is good in few ways. When
asked about him or her one describes them all.
3. One's own bad traits are few. When
asked about them one describes them all.
4. Though one's good traits are many, if
nobody asks, one says nothing, and when asked, one says
little.
I am someone who goes directly for the
truth, and therefore I don't want anyone to write this sort of
biography after I am dead. I know about myself so it is better
that I do the job. After my death they can then write as they
like about me. If they dislike me, this will influence what
they relate, perhaps they will inflate the trifling cause of
their displeasure beyond the truth. On the other hand, if they
love me, they will magnify my good points out of all
proportion.
In truth, I first wrote this
Autobiography only for myself, to show my appreciation of
a life wearing the saffron robe. There was no thought of
publication because I would have felt rather ashamed at the
idea, for an autobiography is self-promoting. Even when people
asked to have it printed for me, I still wasn't happy with the
idea.
When lay devotees arranged my sixth cycle
[seventy-second] birthday celebrations on the twenty-sixth of
April 1974, they also asked to print and to distribute my
Autobiography at that time. I realized that if I didn't agree
it would get written after I was dead anyway. I therefore
quickly finished off the Autobiography that I had been writing
so that it was ready for the celebration...
May readers forgive me if my
Autobiography sometimes seems too self-congratulatory, and
therefore offends against good taste. But if one doesn't write
about what really happened what else can one include?
Phra Desarangsee
(Ven. Ajahn Thate)
Wat Hin Mark Peng
31 March 1974
Preface to the Twelfth Edition
... Although I have brought this Autobiography up-to-date,
please understand that the essential core has not been changed
because the real subject of the book is still here...
Phra Rajanirodharangsee
(Ven. Ajahn Thate)
26 April 1991
The Autobiography of a Forest Monk
My first name is Thate and I had the family
name of Ree-o rahng. I was born at about nine o'clock, on a
Saturday morning, 26 April 1902 (B.E. 2445). It was the fourth
day of the waning moon1
in the year of the tiger. My birth place was the village of
Nah Seedah, in the subdistrict of Glahng Yai, Bahn Peur
District, Udorn-thani Province.
My father's name was Usah, and my mother's
Krang. They were ordinary rice-farmers and both had grown up
as fatherless orphans. After migrating from different regions
they had met and married at the village of Nah Seedah. My
father originally came from Darn Sai in Loei Province, while
my mother was from Muang-fahng, (now a subdistrict) in the
district of Lup-laer, Uttaradit Province. They established
themselves in Nah Seedah Village and continued living there,
producing ten children in all:
Mr. Kumdee Ree-o rahng (now deceased)
Mrs. Ahn Prahp-phahn (now deceased)
Kaen (boy) (died as a child)
Krai (girl) (died as a child)
Mrs. Naen Chiang-tong (now deceased)
Mr. Plian Ree-o rahng (now deceased)
Mrs. Noo-an Glah Kaeng (now deceased)
Ven. Phra Gate Khantiko (now deceased)
Ven. Phra Thate Desarangsee2
(myself)
Mrs. Thoop Dee-man (now deceased)
When I was nine, I went with all my friends
to the village monastery for schooling, studying central Thai
and the indigenous and traditional Dhamm' and Korm3
alphabets and scripts. There were many monks and novices at
the local village monastery of Nah See-dah, and my eldest
brother — who had ordained as a monk — was our teacher. He
taught following the Mullabot Bapakit, the old
fashioned reading primer and I studied there for three years.
However, I was not very good at my lessons for I preferred to
play rather than study.
In those days, the establishment of
government schools had not yet spread throughout the country
side. So while my eldest brother was a monk he had taken the
opportunity to go out and travel and gain some wider
experience. He also had a good retentive memory and was able
to learn central Thai4
quickly and on returning could teach us. There were many of us
studying under him — monks and novices as well as children.
The numbers became so large that some people on seeing the
situation, asked him whether it had already become an official
school. We not only studied Thai script but also learned some
religious chanting and how to read the texts written in the
Dhamm' and Korm scripts. These lessons lasted for
three years and then I had to leave the monastery because my
elder brother withdrew from the monkhood. Most of my
classmates also left because no one could take over the job of
teaching.
Although I had left the monastery, my life
continued to be involved mainly with the monks and novices.
When my brother left the monkhood, no monk remained to take on
the responsibilities of abbot. Occasionally, visiting monks
would pass through and it was my job to act as liaison between
these monks and the villagers. I regularly offered my
services: in the morning, I went to present them with their
food; in the evening, it was the fetching and filtering of
their water; and then gathering flowers for the monks to use
in their devotional offerings [puuja]. It was my job
quickly to inform the village about how many monks had come
and make sure that there was enough food to go round.
I conscientiously and unfailing took on
these duties for a full six years. My parents gave me their
full support and encouragement, and urged me on in my services
to the monks. My undertaking of these duties caused my parents
to show me even more love and affection. Nevertheless,
whenever I was slow or tardy they would always make sure that
I was put right. It was not just my parents who considered
that I was successfully serving the monks, for all the
villagers seemed to have a special affection and warmth for
me. This was evident whenever business affecting the monks or
the monastery came up, for then they would always seek me out.
About this time, I began thinking with
increasing interest about good and evil, about virtuous and
base deeds. Whenever any doubts or questions came up, I would
always make sure to ask my father. Consequently, he started to
take more interest in me. At night, when he was free, he liked
to explain about things — about the ways of the world and
about Dhamma. I can still remember some of his instructions.
He taught me: "Having been born a son, don't be the son of
a family cremated in the same cemetery". This means that a
son should go and seek experience and knowledge away from his
home village. One has to die, but one shouldn't lie down and
die in one's birth place. This advice really appealed to me
because my character already inclined in this direction.
I asked him: "If two people go and make
merit through good deeds and generosity, and one is ordained
as a monk while the other isn't, which one of them would gain
the greater merit?". He replied that, "if a monk does this
much merit," and he exhibited his thumb, "he will gain this
much result" — lifting up two fistfuls in emphasis. "Whereas,"
he continued, "the non-ordained person might make this
much — two fistful's — merit, but he would only receive one
thumb's worth."
Although I probably didn't then fully
understand his explanation, I still felt completely satisfied
after hearing and seeing it through. This might have been
because my character already naturally inclined towards the
monastic life. I still remembered an occasion from my early
days in the monastery, when I went with my elder brother to
visit another monastery. There was a novice there whose
demeanour and behavior were exemplary. He made such a strong
impression on me, he was so inspiring and admirable, that I
felt a special sympathy towards him. I found myself following
his every movement, whether he was walking or sitting or going
about his various duties. The more I gazed after him the
stronger my faith and feeling grew. On returning to our
monastery, I couldn't get his image out of my mind. I could
think of only one thing: 'Oh, when can I ordain and become a
novice like him?'. This was my continual preoccupation.
Parents' Life Story
At this point, there is something that I
feel must relate. It concerns the life story of my parents.
This is something very special for me because I recall their
love and kindness towards me with such immense gratitude.
Particularly so concerning the time they spent teaching me
about various things — especially about morality and religious
values. It really seems as if they had a special love and
concern for me. They also used to tell me about their younger
days in quite some detail, so much so that listening to their
trials and tribulations aroused sadness and a feeling of great
pity and compassion for them both.
As I have mentioned before, both my father
and mother were refugees and fatherless orphans. My father
originally lived in the highlands of Darn Sai District, in
Loei Province. He migrated from there to escape the privations
of its hand-to-mouth existence and came down to the more
fertile lowlands. People had told him that the region around
the town of Nongkhai was fertile and abundant in rice and
food. This was in stark contrast to his home region where,
even though their occupation was the growing of rice, they
never seemed able to produce enough rice to eat. The
countryside there was mostly mountainous with little land
available for normal paddy fields so planting supplementary
fields up on the mountain slopes was necessary. This called
for the cultivation of large areas to produce sufficient rice.
My father told me that because his father
was already dead, the responsibility for supporting his four
brothers and sisters together with his mother had fallen on
him. Their fields had extended as far as the eye could see.
When they paused in their work to have a meal, they would not
bother putting up any shelter but would eat out under the open
sky. This was done because my father was concerned that his
younger brothers and sisters after eating their fill would
become lazy and want to rest rather than getting on with the
work. Despite all such effort, in years of inadequate rainfall
there would not be enough to eat. Some families had no rice at
all and so were reduced to consuming ma-gor5
fruits as a substitute. This might have had to keep people
going for as long as a month at a time.
He trekked down to the lowlands with his
four younger brothers and sisters and their mother. There was
sister Boonmah, brothers Gunhah and Chiang-In, and sister
Dtaeng-orn. The party expanded when many relatives and other
people also elected to go. Their migration involved crossing
several high mountain ranges — the Poo Fah and Poo Luang, for
instance — and dense jungle tracts. People owning elephants or
pack animals could more easily convey their belongings and so
had an advantage over those who were forced to carry
everything on their shoulders. Their own strength had to serve
as their vehicle.
It took more than a week to reach the
village of Nah Ngiew. On arrival, they established a temporary
camp on the edge of a large lake, Nong Pla or Fish Lake, in
Nong Dtao. Later, they moved on and made a permanent
settlement in the village of Nah Ngiew, which is still there
to this day.
My mother's side of the family was of the
Lao Puan tribe. They had been forced out of Laos by the Thai
army in the reign of King Rama III and were released in the
region of Uttaradit. They later settled down in (the modern
subdistrict of) Muang Fahng, Lup Laer District, Uttaradit
Province. My mother told me that her mother had related the
events of the migration down from the town of Chiang Kwahng to
her. My grandmother was still too young to walk so the adults
put her in a woven bamboo basket that they then suspended from
one end of a bamboo carrying pole, the other end being
balanced with their belongings. In this way they blazed a
trail — penetrating dense jungles, fording streams and
traversing mountain ranges until they reached Muang Fahng.
When my grandmother grew up, she married and had two children
and these were my mother and her younger brother.
Afterwards, her husband died and my
grandmother was left alone with two children. At that time the
surrounding regions had become infested with bandits and
thieves, and the authorities seemed powerless and unable to
deal with them. Under such conditions even ordinarily honest
people were corrupted and became criminals. An example of such
a person was the man Chiang Tong who had been a member of
their migrant group. He joined the bandits and was constantly
leaving home and going out to cause mischief. In the end, he
had to flee from the threat of arrest by hiding out around
Glahng Yai in Bahn Peur District. While there, he witnessed
the good-naturedness of the local inhabitants and saw their
peaceful ways with their abundant and prosperous life. He
decided to go back to Muang Fahng and report, and try to
persuade his relatives and friends to move on to Glahng Yai.
My mother told me that scores of people
decided to join the party that was to journey on. They
traveled on foot down through Phetchaboon, continuing to Loei
Province and stopping to rest at the monastery in Hooay Port
Village. It was there that people came down with smallpox and
many died. The inhabitants of Hooay Port Village showed such
good will and kindness in their help towards the needy at this
time, that several of the party decided to stay on and settle
down right there.
Those remaining in Chiang Tong's group
struggled on down and eventually arrived at Glahng Yai
Village. My grandmother with her younger brother and her two
children — this was my mother and her younger brother, my
uncle — had to remain dependent on older and senior friends in
the group. When the time arrives for us to experience
suffering, then odd things can occur. It happened that my
grandmother's younger brother met a group of traveling Burmese
traders and abruptly decided to go off with them. There had
never been any argument or disagreement between them
throughout the long journey, he simply left and was never
heard from again.
On arrival at Glahng Yai Village, a group
separated from the main party and moved on to settle in the
village of Nah Bong Poo Pet, in the district of Pon-pisai. One
of my mother's uncles on her father's side went away with this
group, leaving my grandmother and her two fatherless children
to depend on her elder companions.
Afterwards, when my mother had grown up she
met my father and fell in love. They were married and settled
down to live together in the village of Nah Seedah and
produced ten children — as has been mentioned earlier.
My grandmother eventually married again,
this time to the same Chiang Tong who had been their leader on
the journey. They lived out their later years together until
misfortune struck: a tree branch fell on my grandmother's head
and fatally injured her. Chiang Tong was a person guilty of
many wrong doings and kammic retribution soon caught up with
him. After my grandmother's death, he again married a woman of
the same migrant party, but this time his new wife committed
suicide by hanging herself. He realized that he had much evil
kamma and so decided to enter a monastery.
Chiang Tong wore white robes and kept the
Eight Precepts6
of a Buddhist devotee and lived into old age, reaching almost
a hundred years. Yet he didn't stay in the monastery,
preferring to live with his grandchildren in their house in
the village. However, when he chanted his daily devotions to
the Lord Buddha, Dhamma and Sangha, his grandchildren would
become annoyed at the disturbance and would scold him. He was
very old and had nowhere else to go, and he was also becoming
senile, forgetting things such as whether he had eaten or not.
His grandchildren became more frustrated and cursed and abused
him, and not a day passed without them saying they wished he
were dead. He returned the abuse and cursed them in endless
ways, saying he hoped they turned out like him.
It was a pitiful state of affairs. Those
people who have done evil will find that the consequences are
liable to catch up with them before they die. Living amongst
base people — those who are unprincipled and lacking in virtue
and morality — tends to pass on such evil so that it corrupts
most of the people involved.
This suffering of ours has no limits. We
let go of one thing and grasp hold of something else. It goes
on and on and on in this way, throughout our life. This is why
the wise person becomes weary and tired of the suffering
inherent in this world and seeks for a way to go beyond it.
After her mother passed away, my mother was
able to find support from her husband and children, for their
livelihood was now enough to get by on. Although they might
only have as little as six baht7
to their name, they were not too concerned. Food and rice were
abundant and money wasn't so necessary in those days. Rice
farming alone produced enough food to last through the whole
year, while the cultivation of too large an area meant there
would be nowhere — no space left in the granary — to store the
extra grain. Even farming a modest area still produced a large
surplus of paddy rice.
After a time their third son died. My
father had had a particular love for this son and he became so
distraught with the loss that he almost went out of his mind.
The child had been so loveable and intelligent; so well-spoken
and articulate; so easy to teach. He had been obedient, had
loved his parents and always listened to their instructions.
Although there remained six children, besides his wife, it
seemed to my father as if he had lost everything. He could see
only as far as that lone dead child, while his despair
enveloped everything else in darkness. With time, the dark
clouds of sorrow gradually dissipated and the light of Dhamma
— as found in the Buddhist teachings — began to illuminate his
heart, allowing him dimly to see the way out. He thought that
if he could distance himself from all concerns — by becoming a
monk — it might somewhat assuage his grief. One consideration
was that he could share the merit gained from such ordination
with his dead son and that would certainly enable the son to
take rebirth in a happy realm (Sugati). My father
consequently took leave of his wife and children to be
ordained, and stayed a monk for two Rains Retreats.
This going forth as a monk into the
Buddha's religion does not automatically end any of the
distress that a person might be feeling. Such suffering arises
dependent on internal defilements and we have been
accumulating these worldly defilements from the time of our
birth. This is something that has been going on for
innumerable lives and births so don't even try to disclose and
count all those defilements. Someone lacking in wisdom can't
possibly unearth those layers of defilements — laid down and
accumulated already beyond counting — and spread them out to
see. For that reason, they can't bring about their final
elimination. (However, ordination is still helpful in that it
at least enables one to begin to see something of the way to
go.)
As the clouds of his sorrow gradually
lifted, my father realized that he missed his six innocent
children and his abandoned wife. They were fatherless, without
friends or relatives and this moved him to leave the monkhood
and become a householder again.8
This was good fortune for those of us who still had to take
birth. My young sister and I were subsequently born into my
parent's home, born to people who had founded their lives in
goodness, (that is, they were filled with the refinement and
grace of morality and virtue). I am proud to say that this
birth place compares favorably with any other in this world,
because from birth onwards I was always in contact with virtue
and Dhamma. I was able to grow up and mature in the cool shade
of the yellow robe of Buddhism, right until today.
The thing that I rejoice in most is that
although I didn't support my parents in the normal lay manner,
I could still sustain and foster their goodwill and
kindheartedness. This was achieved by my following the holy
life as a monk and by being able to help train their hearts in
stages right up to the last days of their lives. Both my
parents seemed well pleased with how I had turned out and were
not disappointed in having brought me up. This was because I
had fulfilled a son's filial obligations. That is to say, I
had given them teachings and instruction concerning the
practice of morality and virtue, which enabled what they
already knew to develop progressively higher and higher. I am
especially happy that I was able to help my father with advice
and suggestions about his meditation practice, right until his
last day. He was delighted and more than willing to receive my
training methods and to put them into practice, until he was
able clearly to see the results in his own heart. Eventually,
he was able to exclaim that throughout all his seventy-five
years he had never known such peace and happiness.
It gives me enormous joy to have taught my
mother right through to her final day. When she was breathing
her last, I was present caring for her, helping her to
remember Dhamma. She was consciously aware and willingly took
my counsel to heart, so that in her last moments her face
became bright and radiant. There is a stanza of the Lord
Buddha — if I remember it correctly — where he outlined how a
son of good family, intent on repaying the kindness and virtue
of his father and mother should act:
'If he were to administer to their every
need in the best possible way, to a degree difficult to find
in the world; even if he were to provide them with the
treasure of a World Ruling Monarch (Cakravartin).
as an offering — all this would still fall short. It still
could not be considered full recompense for the kindness and
excellence of one's parents. This is because all those things
can only offer pleasure and happiness during their lifetime.
Once they have died, there is no way they can take such things
with them. However, if the son of good family instructs his
mother and father, who are deficient in morality and virtue,
to establish themselves in these wholesome and fine qualities;
or if they are already established therein, he encourages and
supports their further development, then that son can be
considered one who has truly repaid his debt'.
The wealth of the Noble Treasure is
priceless and can go with the individual wherever he or she
may go. Therefore, saying that I have managed to practice
following all the Lord Buddha's instructions is not incorrect.
It is the complete fulfillment of one's obligations, even
though a proper and formal contract may never have been made.
An Auspicious 'Dream' and A True
Perception of my Youth
About this time in my life — perhaps it was
because I was entering my teens or for another reason, I don't
know — my father showed an extra special interest in me. After
the evening meal, around seven o'clock, he was liable to bring
up some topic and illustrate it with examples. He regularly
taught me in this way, no matter whether it was concerned with
spiritual or worldly matters.
Sometimes he would question me or ask my
opinion. For example, he would enquire: "Do you like girls?
And when you marry, what sort of girl will you marry?".
This is how it proceeded. I can still remember my answer:
"I like girls with a fair and light complexion, without
blemish, courteous and well mannered in thought, speech and
behavior. Her family background wouldn't pose any problem.
However, if she came from a good, respectable family, all the
better".
While asleep one night, I had a visionary
dream:
There I was with a large group of
friends, setting out from the house to go and play in the
fields. This was typical boyish behavior for us in those days.
Just then, two forest monks9
appeared, walking towards us with alms bowl and 'krot' over
their shoulders. On seeing me, one of the monks rushed at me
and I was so afraid that I fled for my life. Yet all my
friends just stood there unconcerned, as if nothing untoward
was taking place. The circumstances were such that I had to
take the final resort, by seeking refuge at home with my
parents. Yet it wasn't to be, for when I ran into the house
yelling to mother and father for help, both remained impassive
and unconcerned as if nothing unusual was going on. Meanwhile,
the forest monk hadn't stopped chasing after me and was close
on my heels. I ran into the bedroom and dived under the
mosquito net. The monk burst in after me and yanked up the
mosquito net. Then, using a whip, he lashed at me with all his
strength. I was terrified and so startled that it woke me up.
When I came to my senses, I found I was
still trembling and was soaked in perspiration from head to
toe. My heart throbbed violently and where I had been whipped
still stung. I really thought that it had all actually
happened and even gingerly felt with my hand to check. It was
so vivid that it seemed real. I then pulled myself together
and mindfully went over what had happened. After careful
consideration the mind eventually calmed down and my fear went
away.
This episode gradually faded from my memory
and was forgotten for a long time. It was only when I was out
wandering in the jungle as a forest novice-monk with my
meditation teacher that it all came back to me. That visionary
dream from the distant past did truly seem to point out future
events and to have been correct in every respect.
About this time another incident happened
to me — but this was no dream or vision. I had been unable to
get to sleep until late at night for I was taken up with
recalling and reflecting on the great kindness and goodness of
my parents. I allowed my thoughts to wander and pondered about
them, seeing how they had raised and nurtured us ten children
with great sacrifice and grinding toil until we reached
maturity. Soon, their children would be grown up and married
and have families of their own. They would all then disperse,
going their separate ways. I reached that thought and felt
compelled to consider what my parent's situation would then be
like. Who was going to provide for and take care of my mother
and father? I was considering all this according to the
sensibility of a child, without real thought for the future.
This made me feel very sad and despondent, grieving for the
future destitute condition of my parents. It moved me so much
that I began to sob and the tears soaked my pillow. I was in
this state for a long time and the more I thought about them,
the greater my despondency. I made the decision that when I
was grown up I would not get married like everyone else. When
everyone else left home I would take over the responsibility
of caring for mother and father all by myself, and do it to
the best of my ability. My heart was gladdened and contented
after arriving at this resolution and as it was already very
late into the night I fell asleep.
All dhammas exist here, within each
of us and the one that knows Dhamma is the heart or mind.
Whether it knows much or little, whether it knows in a course
or more refined way, depends on one's present competence,
one's aptitude and maturity (boon-paramii) and the
training each person has received.
The resolution that I made then came from
gratitude and appreciation of the goodness and virtue of my
parents.
Another night a similar thing happened. I
lay there reflecting on the condition of the ordinary village
farmer and their routine working year:
The annual cycle begins during the months
of March and April when forest needs to be cleared for new
fields. The area is burned off, the remaining stumps and roots
dug out and fences erected. When the monsoon rains arrive, the
various crops have to be prepared and planted out, according
to whatever is planned. Those families with few or
insufficient members would have to decide how to divide their
time between the various tasks.
There is the general plowing to do, and the
sowing and preparation of the nursery-rice seedlings. This
entails working and laboring continuously until the rice
seedlings are ready for transplanting.10
There is then the replanting of each young rice plant into the
plowed and ready fields. Of course, I am speaking here of a
year with good and timely rain. A dry year means wasted time
and effort with deprivation and loss.
It is mainly the housewife's task to have
previously organized adequate supplies. This would include,
for example, rice, chili-peppers, salt, pickled fish,11
and tobacco. Then when everyone gets down to work in the
fields there is no need to be concerned about finding
provisions. Normally, with favorable rainfall they will
complete the rice planting by August or it might extend into
September. With that done everyone turns to gathering food
reserves to be put away ready for harvest time. Besides this,
there is fishing gear to be repaired and readied for use in
the coming dry season.
As the monks come to the end of their Rains
Retreat, the villagers will usually begin harvesting the paddy
rice. However, prior to this, they must first harvest any hill
rice.12
Throughout the harvesting season there is still the added
labor of picking the other crops and vegetables as they ripen
in their fields. There may be chili-peppers, cotton and beans.
In those days when the paddy crop was abundant the harvesting
might not be completely finished much before late January.
Then came the job of transporting the threshed rice to the
storage granaries that might go on into February.
Even when harvesting was taking place
during the day, at night the bamboo strips13
to bind the rice sheaves had to be fashioned. With the harvest
over, there would then be firewood to find for boiling up the
sugar cane to obtain the syrup.
About the boiling up of the sugar cane:
The daily process began in the early
afternoon with entry into the sugar cane plantation.
Sufficient cane had to be cut ready for the next morning's
boiling. The cut cane was carried out of the fields and carted
off — if one owned a cart14
— and stacked at the boiling shed. Getting up at first light
one had to go and press the juice out of the cane and this
would go on late into the morning. Inadequate help would bring
delay so that someone would have to go off and prepare the
meal. With the sugar cane all pressed, everyone could come
together for a communal meal. After that, they would all
separate and go about their respective duties leaving one
person to watch over the cauldron of boiling sugar cane juice.
Some farmers had so much sugar cane that they didn't finish
processing it until March. By then it was time to start
clearing the forest to make fields once more.
Well then. What was it on that night that
led me to go over all this in such detail? All the different
phases of the adult's working year. What was I after? It
saddened me so, feeling for and sympathizing with the sort of
life we are born into, deficient in opportunity or free time.
After our birth there seems only to be actions and deeds to be
done. Individual distinctions only appear because of disparate
duties and difference in rank or status. The future leads on
into a continuing doing, unless, that is, one is asleep or
dead.
This way of thinking went directly against
my juvenile views and perception of reality. I was intoxicated
with the idea that 'this world is so much fun'. Remember, in
those days children didn't have to go to school nor did they
have any responsibilities to worry about. After having eaten
there was only playing around and looking for fun with my
friends. If sometimes we had to go and take the cattle or
buffalos out to graze, we could also turn that into fun.
On that night, I clearly perceived all the
suffering involved in being born into this world as a human
being. I saw it for myself, right there in my own heart,
previously never having given it any consideration at all.
This time, however, my perception was only about seeing the
suffering inherent in the struggle to fill one's stomach, with
seeing that each day offered no free time, no break in the
process. I could not see what I had to do to surmount and go
beyond such suffering. That lack of understanding shows that
it cannot be considered the Noble Truth of Suffering15
for it is only concerned with the ordinary, mundane truth of
suffering.
1. Oppressive Times and Its Effect on
People
It was during this period, that our part of
the country became infested with brigands and cattle rustlers.
These gangsters took over the whole region and even
ten-year-old children and women engaged in the thieving. The
authorities were impotent and so the villagers had to look
after themselves. Each household kept a whole pack of guard
dogs and at night everyone had to take it in turns to stand
guard. Whenever cattle were stolen, the owner would have to go
and pay an absurdly overpriced ransom for their return.
The stouthearted would go out after the
thieves and hunt them down like wild animals. There would then
be some peace and respite. The authorities seemed to approve
and even actively encourage such retaliation.
I was still only small but I also had some
big ideas about being famous. I did not want to become
renowned as thief or robber but rather as the hero who
conquered them, so I set my mind on one thing: 'What can I
do to make myself invulnerable16
to all weapons?'. I could then go out and crush these
hordes of brigands, wiping them all out.
At this time I was also helping to look
after a very talkative and boastful monk — excuse me, but that
is the description he deserves. His place of origin was the
village of Muang Kai which is where the district of
Varnorn-nivart borders on Bueng Kahn District. He shrewdly
must have guessed my innermost thoughts because before long he
was suggesting: "After the Rains Retreat, why don't you come
back with me to my home village. I have there every sort of
thing. If you want charms, arcane herbs, the whole range of
accessories that give invulnerability, I have them all."
I was delighted with this. So as soon as
the Rains Retreat ended, three older youths — my elder brother
and two of his friends — with myself as a much younger fourth
accompanied this monk back to his home village. We discovered
on reaching our destination that the monk had really duped us
into escorting him back home. None of the villagers in that
area had any respect for him, because he had already ordained
and disrobed numerous times. The last news I heard of him was
that he had disrobed yet again, had got married and that both
husband and wife were smoking opium. The two bigger youths who
had gone with us still pleaded with him to learn about and
obtain the various special things.17
But he was always evasive and beat around the bush and looked
for excuses to extricate himself. We discovered the truth when
we spoke to the other monks in that monastery, for really he
didn't have anything remarkable or rare, his only
accomplishment being that of bragging and talking big.
Our group stayed with him for about ten
days before taking leave to return home with our hopes all
unrealized. Every day while we had been staying with him, he
had urged us to go out to find eels for him to eat.18
He really loved eels, although he didn't like any other type
of fish.
It took us three days to walk home. I felt
particularly humiliated and ashamed. On leaving home I had
resolved to seek out and learn the occult knowledge of
'invulnerability' so that by my return I would be secure
against any weapon belonging to anyone. When I reached home,
my friends found every possible opportunity to make fun of me
and this made me feel even more humiliated. However the
experience did have its positive side for I became
disillusioned with the whole thing and lost my foolish
credulity in charms and magical powers. From that day forward,
right up to the present, whenever anyone comes in and talks of
their wondrous properties my mind remains wholly indifferent.
When I later became a novice, my friends had tried to persuade
me to go and study about such things. They were even willing
to pay the customary 'teacher's fee' and sponsor the whole
venture but I would not change my mind.
I consider myself particularly fortunate on
this account: I had been born into a family of good moral
conduct and virtuous behavior; I had been taught and prepared
through living in a monastery with monks — who could be truly
regarded as good monks. Whenever external conditions and
surroundings coerced and pressured my mind, forcing it to turn
towards what was low and base, it seemed that things never
turned out as my base desires would have it. If they had, who
knows what might have happened to me. Perhaps one can say that
my good kamma and past merit guided and
protected me.
That long journey was the first time in my
life that I had gone away from home. We were all staying at
Muang Kai Village when the news first came through about the
outbreak of World War I. It was all anyone ever spoke about
when they came to visit the monastery.19
I became so homesick that I cried every day. Some days I
couldn't get to sleep until late into the night because of my
constant pining for my parents.
When I arrived home again, I resumed my
practice of serving the monks in the monastery as I had always
done. However, I didn't always sleep at the monastery and had
the duty of bursar or steward (Veyyavaccakorn) to the
monks, being the intermediary and liaison between them and the
villagers. This worked out very well. All the villagers seemed
increasingly to appreciate my efforts because I had become
adept and competent. Another consideration in their growing
interest in me might have been that I was also entering
adolescence. They would give me jobs to do and simultaneously
tease me.
I had been going regularly to the monastery
throughout an extended period of about six years and had
become closely acquainted with the monks and novices. However,
on no occasion did any of the monks teach me about keeping the
Five or Eight Precepts. Strange as it may seem, this is quite
understandable because the Sangha or Community of monks
of that time was seriously deficient in learning.
2. Meeting Venerable Ajahn Singh
Khantayaagamo
In 1916, Ven. Ajahn Singh Khantayaagamo
(the future Phra Ñaa.navisit'samiddhiviiraacaarn) and
Ven. Ajahn Kham — disciples of the Venerable Meditation Master
Ajahn Mun Bhuuridatta Thera20
— were out walking tudong.21
They were the first forest monks to reach the village of Nah
Seedah. Although there were monks resident in the local
monastery, they still came and asked to stay with us. It
almost seemed to me as if they had aimed specifically at
coming to see my father and me. We attended on them with deep
reverence and faith because we saw that their way of practice
was different from other groups of meditation monks. (My
father had previously attended on Ajahn Seetut.)
In particular, the visiting monks taught me
about their various obligations and duties. For example, I
learned the 'do's and don'ts' in offering22
things to a monk and about meditation using the mantra- word
'Buddho' as an object of preliminary recitation. My
mind was able to converge in samadhi23
to the point where I lost all desire to speak with anyone.
This was where I first experienced the flavor of meditation's
peace and stillness. It's something I've never forgotten.
Later, when I was a novice studying with many others, I would
slip out — unknown to anyone — into the cool and quiet of the
night to meditate alone.
The venerable monks stayed with us for a
little more than two months. At first they were also intending
to spend the Rains Retreat but a previous malarial infection
flared up again. Therefore, just before the start of the Rains
Retreat, they left to stay at an abandoned monastery in the
village of Nah Bong, Nahm Mong Subdistrict in the district of
Tah Bor and I was able to go with them.
The monks were ill with malaria throughout
the three months of the Rains Retreat. In spite of his
illness, Ven. Ajahn Singh would still kindly use some of his
free time to teach me reading and writing, with occasional
training in religious matters. Towards the end of the Rains
Retreat something came up in his mind — I don't know quite
what — for he said that after the Retreat he would have to
return to his home village and asked if I would go with him.
"The journey will be long and tough," he added. My answer was
an immediate, "Venerable Sir, I will go with you".
A few days before the end of the Rains
Retreat, I asked his permission to go home to take leave of my
parents. Both of the monks seemed pleased with the idea that I
would be going with them and they quickly organized some
flowers, incense and candles for me to go and offer to my
parents. This is the traditional way of asking forgiveness and
blessing. (They gave me excellent teaching about this custom.
In fact even the first time I had fled from home, I had
followed this practice.)
On the evening of that night, after seeking
forgiveness and a blessing from my parents, I continued around
and asked the same of all the family elders and the older
people in the village. Whomever I went to see would weep with
sorrow, as if I were going off to my death. I became a bit
sentimental and could not hold back my own tears. At daybreak,
my mother and aunt set out with me to where the Venerable
Ajahn was staying and we all spent the night there. It was
Pavarana, the last day of the Rains Retreat, and early the
following morning, after the meal, the Venerable Ajahn led us
off on our journey. Once again, my aunt and the villagers
gathered there and shed some tears together.
3. Leaving Home for a Second Time
Following after Ven. Ajahn Singh
It was perhaps unprecedented for a boy of
that region and my age to venture away from home on such a
long journey. It also meant being cut off from my relatives
and friends who would have offered comfort and warmth. Not
only that, it seems that I may well have been the first boy to
venture off — without any worries or regrets — following after
forest meditation monks. We set off walking from Tah Bor
wading through water and mud, steadily pressing on through the
forest and passing across the rice fields.24
Whenever one of the monks became feverish with malaria, he
would climb up to rest in a field shelter25
or else under a tree that was shady and dry, out of the mud.
At day break the venerable monks would still make the effort
to go out on alms round and they were able to feed me too.
We walked for three days before reaching
the provincial town of Udorn-thani, staying at Wat26
Majjhima-vat for ten nights before setting off again on our
journey. We took the road to Khon Kaen Province and passed
through the present provinces of Mahasarakam, Roi-et and Yaso-torn.
This journey of ours — the two of us with the Venerable Ajahn
— took just over a month before reaching Nong Korn Village of
Hua Dtaphan Subdistrict, in the district of Amnart Charoen.
This was the village where the Venerable Ajahn's mother lived.
He stayed there for about three months so that he could teach
and help her in spiritual matters.
4. Receiving the Going Forth as a Novice
Further Studies
While staying in Nong Korn Village, Ven.
Ajahn Singh sent me to ask for novice ordination27
with the Venerable Upajjhaaya Loo-ee from the monastery in
Keng Yai Village who would act as my Preceptor. I was
about to enter my eighteenth year.
At this time, I was becoming somewhat more
proficient in my reading and had been going through the
Trai-lokavithan.28
This book describes the future degeneration and destruction of
the world of the satthantara kappa time. Reading this
moved me to deep sadness and my eyes were filled with tears
for many a day. At meal times I had no appetite because my
heart was lost in thoughts of the approaching degeneration and
the calamity awaiting human beings and all creatures. It was
as if all this would be unfolding before my eyes within just a
few days.
Venerable Ajahn Singh took me to stay at
Wat Sutat-narahm in Ubon town. It was a monastery where he
himself had once lived. I now entered the monastery school at
Wat See-tong to continue with my Thai Language studies. Having
settled me there and with the Rains Retreat being over, Ven.
Ajahn Singh turned back to his forest wandering. He returned
by way of Sakhon Nakorn Province because a group of monks led
by the Venerable Ajahn Mun was wandering in that region. The
night before Ven. Ajahn Singh set out, he called a meeting of
the monks and novices and informed us of his intentions. On
hearing this news, I felt such an enormous reluctance to be
parted from him that I began to sob — right there in the
middle of that large gathering. Feeling self-conscious and
embarrassed in front of my friends, I beat a hasty retreat and
hurried outside to reestablish some mindfulness and try to
compose myself. I remembered the occasion in the time of the
Lord Buddha, when the Venerable Ananda wept on learning that
the Lord Buddha was soon finally to pass away. By reflecting
on this, it somewhat assuaged my own heart's grief and I could
go back into the meeting. The Venerable Ajahn had meanwhile
been teaching on various themes.
At the same time as learning Thai, I had to
allocate time for memorizing Pali chanting and studying the
General Dhamma Studies Course.29
I was very conscious that in spite of being so much older than
the other students keeping up with them would be difficult. I
was going through the third grade of the course but couldn't
sit the final examination because the Ecclesiastical Head Monk
of that Region (Chao Kana Monton) had made a rule that
one had to be more than twenty years old. It therefore wasn't
until my third year there that I could take the examination
and was able to pass it that same year.
My memorizing of the Pali texts continued
and I was learning by heart the Paatimokkha Rule.30
I applied myself to this because of my regard and admiration
for the monastic discipline. My Thai language studies only
extended to the completion of the primary education course
(because government schools then only taught the three
elementary grades).
On leaving the Thai language school I
turned my full attention to studying Pali. However, in that
year of my studies it so happened that Ven. Mahaa Pin
Paññaabalo — who was the younger brother of Ven. Ajahn Singh —
came back from Bangkok. He initiated a course in Nak Dhamm'
Toh, Grade Two, which was the first of its kind in that
administrative region of the Northeast. I therefore also
enrolled for that course but I was never able to finish it,
nor indeed the Pali, because Ven. Ajahn Singh returned to
spend the Rains Retreat at Wat Sutat-narahm. After the Rains
Retreat — and before I could take my examinations — he led Ven.
Ajahn Mahaa Pin and me off on tudong.
5. A Novice Becomes Government Millionaire
It was the novice Thate who became the
millionaire. Here, I am talking about the time when the
government thought up the idea of creating one new
'millionaire' every year in Thailand. They thus brought out an
annual lottery with a first prize of fifty or sixty thousand
baht. In those days, this was considered a fortune large
enough for a Thai millionaire. It was all done so that we
Thais would not feel humiliated before other richer countries.
One night it so happened that Novice Thate
was unable to sleep because he had just won first prize in the
lottery. It was time to set about finding the site to build
himself a grand and extensive three story mansion. This
residence would be furnished to the most modern designs and be
in the center of the commercial district. The employees and
assistants would have to fill the shelves with every
imaginable kind of merchandise. He would be at ease in body
and mind without a worry in the world and spend his time
lounging on a sofa, making eyes at the attractive young women
who would come in to shop. Whoever chanced a glance in his
direction and smiled, would receive a happy smile back.
Throughout his life of eighteen to nineteen years, he had
never known greater happiness.
He had indeed attained the rank of
millionaire — just as the government had wished. Yet then,
within the blink of an eye, with all the things still fresh
and new, aniccaa or impermanence intrudes. Ah,
impermanence! All abruptly breaks down and disappears
from his heart and that's something he regrets so much.
Novice Thate comes to his senses and he
realizes that it is already late into the night: 'It should
already be time for sleep — Hey, what is this? Not only has
the lottery yet to take place but I haven't even bought a
ticket! How come I've already become a millionaire? I must be
going crazy!'. That night he felt an unspeakable degree of
mortification and shame. If any knowledgeable persons were to
know about these fantasies what would they say? He finally
fell asleep and awoke at dawn with guilty feelings from the
night before and never told anyone about this occurrence.
Anyone can become this sort of
'millionaire' — not just Novice Thate. I described him as a
millionaire only in the sense that in his mind's eye he could
imagine possession of an abundance of property and wealth.
Still, at least he was content with the amount that his
imagination produced. This is much better than those people
already possessing material wealth who fantasize about getting
even more. They are forever dissatisfied with what they
already have and thereby are always discontented and troubled.
Of what benefit is all that wealth to such people? Wealthy or
poor, the real question lies with whether one is happy or not.
It is certainly not the case that the more one
possesses the better it is. The Lord Buddha thus taught that
contentment with what one actually has is a resource and
wealth of great value.
I went forth as a monk through my faith in
the Lord Buddha's Teaching — the Dhamma and the Vinaya
Discipline. Then I sincerely followed the way of practice,
clearly seeing the truth that he had indicated.
The Lord Buddha once pointed out a money
bag to Venerable Ananda and explained that it was something
poisonous. He added that it was not only poisonous to monks
and nuns who involve themselves with it, but also to lay
people who do not know how to handle it correctly. For lay
people however it is a necessity, something that has to be
used, for their condition and way of life is quite different
from that of a monk or nun. Taking this further, anyone in
possession of great wealth but unable to deal with it properly
is in the same position as someone holding a firebrand. The
fire will inevitably burn down from the ignited end to scorch
the hand that grasps it.
I was a novice for five years before
becoming a monk and having spent such a long time in a
monastery gave me a considerable advantage over the other
newly ordained monks. I was on old hand, so to speak, and knew
very well how the monastery worked. It gave me a head start
over those who were given bhikkhu ordination with me. For
instance, I already knew the chanting and could recite the
Patimokkha.
6. Ordination at Wat Sutat-narahm
On the 16th of May 1923,31
at 11.48 ???A.M., I went forth as a monk in the ordination
boundary32
of Wat Sutat'. I was approaching twenty-two years of age. My
Preceptor33
was the Venerable Phra Maharat with Venerable Maha Pin
Paññaabalo acting as the Announcing Ajahn.34
This was the year that my teacher, the
Venerable Ajahn Singh Khantayaagamo, led a party of six — four
monks and two novices — to spend the Rains Retreat at Wat
Sutat'. It was the first time that a community of forest
meditation monks stayed the Rains Retreat in the provincial
town of Ubon.
Venerable Ajahn Singh came back to spend
the Rains Retreat in Ubon because he learned that his younger
brother, Venerable Maha Pin, had arrived back there from
Bangkok. Ven. Ajahn Singh's plan was to take his brother out
wandering for meditation in the jungle. Before Ven. Maha Pin
had gone to Bangkok, he had promised Ven. Ajahn Mun that he
would first go and study and then come back to take up the way
of practice. Ven. Ajahn Singh had been delighted to hear that
his younger brother had returned and thus came to spend the
Rains Retreat at Wat Sutat-narahm.
Following the end of the Rains Retreat and
the Ka.thina season,35
Ven. Ajahn Singh led a large group of us walking on tudong.
Those of us new to tudong, apart from Ven. Maha Pin and
myself, were Ven. Kam Phoo-ay, Ven. Torn and two novices.
There were twelve of us all together.
(Ven. Mahaa Pin Paññaabalo had completed
his fifth grade Pali studies. He can therefore be considered
the first scholastic monk of Mahaa grade36
in Thailand at that time, to go off on tudong. Most of
the academic monks considered the going off on tudong a
disgraceful thing to do.37
It was due to Ven. Ajahn Singh being our leader that I was
allowed to go along on tudong because without my
presence my Preceptor was obliged to recite the Patimokkha
Rule himself.)
7. First Taste of Yearning
I had been living at Wat Sutat' in Ubon,
separated from family and close friends, for a full six years.
While I was living there various people left their sons and
grandsons under my care. Four boys lived with me as my
'disciples',38
of whom two were ordained as novices. They had been with me
ever since my own novice days, right through to my ordination
as a monk. We had developed a father-son relationship and so
when it came time to separate, they all began to weep thinking
how much they were going to miss me. I too was almost unable
to hold back my tears. However, being their teacher it would
have looked bad if I cried in front of them so I gritted my
teeth and suppressed my sorrow, not letting my true feelings
show. Even so, I found my voice hoarse with emotion.
At the time those feelings hadn't seemed
too overpowering but later, after we had left, they seeped in
and made me feel dull and listless for a remarkably long time.
Whether I was walking, standing, sitting or lying down, even
while talking or eating, my heart was preoccupied in gloom and
sadness, longing for my 'disciples'. How will they manage?
What will they eat? Will they have enough to eat or have to go
without? Who will teach them? Or perhaps someone would come
along to bully and boss them about. This was the first time in
my life that I had ever experienced such depression.
I therefore had to think through and
reflect on my situation: 'These boys are neither my
children nor my grandchildren; they aren't blood relatives;
they only came to rely and depend on me. I guided and
instructed them to the best of my ability. Why is it that I
miss and pine about them so much?' At this point, I
pondered what it must be like for people with a wife and
children of their own. There! If these 'disciples' had been my
own sons, my own flesh and blood, how much greater would have
been my grief. I now perceived the drawback and danger in such
longing and yearning and this realization permeated right
through to my heart. This understanding has never been lost.
Human beings are really no different from
young monkeys that cannot live alone, separated from their
mother. This caused me to become overwhelming fearful of
sentimental attachment. Such yearning and longing lead to
suffering both when one is united and when separated. What can
we do to gain freedom?
8. A Group of Tudong Monks Leaves Ubon
Our party of twelve — eight monks and four
novices — with Ven. Ajahn Singh leading, made our way out of
Ubon town during November.39
We walked steadily on, never staying anywhere along the way
for more than a single night until we arrived at the village
of Hua Dtaphan. We rested there for quite some time before
moving on to stay at Hua Ngoo Village where we readied our
requisites40
before continuing our wanderings through the forest.
Our walking on tudong this time did
not offer much solitude and seclusion because of the large
number in our party. Nevertheless, it did give a fair taste of
the experience of walking and wandering through forests and
jungle. For instance, one night we arranged our resting places
with krot umbrellas and mosquito nets in place. After
we had chanted our evening puja,41
a storm broke on us with gale force winds and pouring rain. To
lie down or even to sit became impossible as the area started
to flood. We quickly gathered up our gear and fled, thinking
to ask for shelter in the nearby village monastery. Besides
everything else, we couldn't find the right path into the
village,42
which meant we had to circle back and forth close to the
village perimeter for many hours.
When we eventually reached the village
monastery, we found that it was already occupied by sleeping
lay people. These were the six traveling salesmen who had been
walking with us for part of the journey. When they had
previously spotted the mass of dark storm clouds building up
on the horizon, they had announced that they were going to
stay in the village rather than sleeping out. They now helped
to arrange whatever sleeping places could be found for us.
With the sleeping places arranged, we hurried back to escort
the Ven. Ajahn in, with those seven or eight of our companions
who had remained outside with him. Reaching the monastery and
sorting out our things, we could then lie down and try to get
some sleep. The hut43
though was absolutely soaked through and there were no mats or
pillows available because it was an abandoned monastery. Yet
our exhaustion enabled us to gain some brief sleep, even if
everything was wet through. At daybreak, we went out on alms
round to the village and received nothing more than plain
cooked rice and a banana each.
After the meal we continued our journey.
The Ven. Ajahn led us straight through dense jungles towards
the provincial towns of Roi-et and Kalasin. We passed through
Dong Ling and emerged in the district of Sahassakan, near
Koomphavapee District of Udorn-thani Province. However, we
didn't actually enter the main town but stayed to the west in
the village of Chiang Pin. We went there to await the arrival
from Bangkok of the Ecclesiastical Head [Monk] of that Region
or Chao Kana Monton.
The Chao Kana Monton instructed our party
to come and wait upon him in Udorn at this time with the aim
of bringing Ven. Maha Pin to take up residence in Udorn. This
was because Udorn town didn't yet have any monks of the
Dhammayut' Community.44
However, things didn't turn out that way. When the Chao
Kana Monton arrived from Bangkok, it was learned that
Phraya Rachanukoon (later to receive the title Phraya
Mukhamontri) had requested Ven. Mahaa Joom Bandhulo (later to
become Ven. Phra Dhammachedi) to accompany him to Udorn, so
that he could take up residence at Wat Bodhisomphorn there.
We all went to pay our respects to the
Chao Kana Monton as soon as he arrived and found that
there had been another change of plans. He now wanted to send
Ven. Maha Pin to stay in the province of Sakhon Nakorn and to
have me stay with Ven. Maha Joom in Udorn. His reasons being
that there weren't any suitable monks in Udorn. Also, he
thought that as I was a local and already had some academic
training, I should stay and help see to the administrative
business of the monks.
I instead requested that he allow me to go
off to practice meditation to honor his authority and dignity.
For meditation monks were few and far between, whereas
scholastic and administrative monks were numerous and wouldn't
be difficult to find. He gave his permission and recommended
that I should stay and assist Ven. Maha Pin.
9. Meeting the Venerable Ajahn Mun for the
First Time
After these matters had all been settled,
Ven. Ajahn Singh led our group off to pay respects to
Venerable Ajahn Mun who was staying at Kor Village, in the
district of Bahn Peur. Venerable Ajahn Sao45
also happened to be there at that time. So it came about that
I was able to meet both Venerable Ajahns and pay my respects
to them for the first time in my life. That evening Ven. Ajahn
Mun wholeheartedly bestowed on us a Dhamma talk to mark the
occasion of seeing us for the first time. This was especially
so when he saw Ven. Maha Pin. It was Ven. Maha Pin who had
previously committed himself — after listening to Dhamma talks
by Ven. Ajahn Mun and Ven. Ajahn Singh while in Ubon — to
return and practice after studying academically in Bangkok. As
for me, Ven. Ajahn Mun probably only knew as much about me as
Ven. Ajahn Singh had passed on to him.
That night, after the Dhamma talk was over,
Ven. Ajahn Mun spoke more informally with us about Dhamma. He
concluded the discussion by forecasting something about the
various abilities and qualities of Ven. Maha Pin and myself.
This made me feel extremely uncomfortable and abashed, for I
was right there in the midst of the monks and was not only
newly ordained but I couldn't see in myself anything special
enough to interest the Ven. Ajahn Mun.
In fact, I had begun to feel very
self-conscious from the moment we entered the monastery area
in the early part of the evening — although I don't know how
the others felt about it. I had looked over the place and
noted the way the monks lived, similarly with the novices and
right through to the lay people in the monastery. How could
they all be so well mannered and orderly? Each seemed to be
going about their personal duties and routine tasks. Then came
the predictions about Ven. Maha Pin, and when he moved on to
me it doubled my embarrassment. Venerable Maha Pin himself
probably didn't feel much at all, apart from some
introspective checking of his abilities with what Ven. Ajahn
Mun had predicted.
The next morning after the meal, Ven. Ajahn
Singh led our party off again on the trail to the village of
Nah Seedah. We stayed there for four nights before retracing
our steps back to spend another night with Ven. Ajahn Mun.
Then we walked back to Udorn and carried on to Sakhon Nakorn,
in line with what we had agreed with the Chao Kana Monton.
However, subsequent events didn't work out as the Chao Kana
Monton had planned because Ven. Maha Pin became ill and
couldn't take up the duties entrusted to him. Therefore, for
that year's Rains Retreat, the Ven. Ajahn Singh took our group
of monks off to stay at the forest monastery of Nong Laht
Village. This action made the Chao Kana Monton highly
displeased with us, so we had to send Ven. Boon, who had
completed the General Dhamma Studies Course, to stay in Sakhon
Nakorn.
10. Second Rains Retreat, 1924
at Nong Laht
Before entering the Rains Retreat, I found
an excellent Dhamma companion in a monk by the name of
Venerable Glom, from Loei Province. We had twice gone up to
the cave Tam Puang, on Poo Lek mountain, to develop meditation
together. The first time we went up for four nights and the
second time for six nights. The village headman named Orn-see
— (later he became the Subdistrict Official Khun Prajak, and
then he ordained and continued as a monk until his death) —
arranged for someone to climb up to offer us food on a regular
basis. I will always remember his kindness and goodwill. Ven.
Ajahn Mun had remarked that this particular village headman
was intelligent and astute about everything — from his
quick-witted speech, to his work and social involvements in
the community. He always seemed able to keep abreast of
affairs. When it came to monks, his talents were remarkable
for he was immediately and competently able to arrange
whatever a monk might need, with nothing more than the barest
hint by the monk.
The two of us were thus supplied with all
four suitable things supportive of meditation practice46
and so were able to push strongly forward. The more we
meditated, the more we felt grateful to the headman and the
villagers for all their goodwill. Our daily meal consisted of
one ball of glutinous rice about the size of a bael-fruit47
with some dried chili powder. This was enough to sustain us in
our meditation practice without any harmful effects. Reducing
food intake while increasing meditation exertion brings
lightness to the body, clarity to the mindfulness and makes
samadhi less difficult. I meditated with great diligence
and my mindfulness improved and became more firmly
established. While living in the cave, I trained my
mindfulness to give it a constancy throughout the day and
night. I refused to allow any lapse when my mind might
heedlessly wander away following after external objects.
Mindfulness became steadily and exclusively established in the
body and mind. I even made sure that however my mind had been
established before going to sleep, it would return to the same
state on awakening. Although sometimes there was still a bit
of absentmindedness during the meal.
Increasing my exertion also raised my
appreciation for the villagers' goodwill — it seemed to follow
like the shadow its subject. I was very much aware that being
a monk my existence rested in the hands of the villagers and I
therefore continued my meditation practice to repay my debt to
them. I became certain that my meditation efforts during this
time completely fulfilled the obligations of my indebtedness.
As the Rains Retreat approached, we went
down to stay with Ven. Ajahn Singh in the monastery of Nong
Lart Village. As I was still a newly ordained monk during this
Rains Retreat, I didn't have to take on any responsibilities.
Apart, that is, from attending to the needs of the senior monk48
and applying myself to the meditation practice. The Venerable
Ajahn gave us special consideration in this.
Throughout the Rains Retreat I further
developed my meditation practice following the scheme that I
had observed while out on the mountain. On top of that, I
added some yoga techniques as an experiment. By this I mean
progressively reducing my daily food intake from seventy small
lumps of sticky rice down to three mouthfuls. Then I gradually
increased again to thirty mouthfuls before cutting back down
to five mouthfuls. Each sequence of this would take some three
or four days and I continued like this throughout the Rains
Retreat. Although the longest period was when I ate only
fifteen mouthfuls of food a day and then it was only
vegetarian food. My build is naturally quite slim and so when
that became quite emaciated the villagers started to notice.
Everyone who saw me, asked what was wrong but I had the will
power and the spirit to carry on as normal with my duties and
meditation practice.
As soon as the Rains Retreat was over, I
resumed eating some meat and fish again. But Oh! How foul they
now smelled. We human beings consume their meat and make it
into our own flesh. It's just as if we snatch away and steal
something foul and then eat it. This is why the devas
and other heavenly beings won't come close to humans — it's
our offensive smell. Yet human beings themselves seem to find
no difficulty in embracing and admiring these corpses of ours.
After the Rains Retreat I went up onto the
mountain once more, but this time accompanied by Ven. Ajahn
Singh himself. We had stayed up there for nine days when he
became ill and asked me to go down and bring back the rest of
our party of monks. When we saw that taking care of him there
wouldn't be convenient, we all moved down to nurse him in the
forest area of Nong Boo-a. (This is now a village.)
Ven. Ajahn Mun sent a message at that time
requesting that I go and meet him in the district of Tah Bor.
I complied with those instructions and took my leave of Ven.
Ajahn Singh and, as it happened, met up with Ven. Ajahn Mun
and Ven. Ajahn Sao along the way. They had received an
invitation from Wat Bodhisomphorn, in the town of Udorn-thani.
It was at this time that 'Grandmother'49
Noi (who was the mother of Phraya Rajanukoon) came to
take part in the consecration ceremony for the laying down of
the boundary stones (siima) of Wat Bodhisomphorn. This
was her first meeting with Ven. Ajahn Mun. She had been able
to listen to one of his sermons and her faith in him began. I
was able to stay there with Ven. Ajahn Mun for many days
before we both set out for Tah Bor.
11. Third Rains Retreat, 1925
at Nah Chang Nam
During this Rains Retreat I resided near
the village of Nah Chang Nam and not far from Tah Bor where
Ven. Ajahn Mun was staying. Venerable Ajahn Oon and I
conscientiously made the effort to go regularly to see him and
listen to his Dhamma talks. This Rains Retreat I was again
without any responsibilities except continuing with my own
meditation practice. All other tasks, such as receiving any
guests, I had handed over to Ven. Ajahn Oon. Previously he had
been a teacher in the Mahaa-nikaya and a monk there for
nine years, having only recently transferred to the Dhammayut'
Nikaya.50
During this Rains Retreat a sad event
concerning Ven. Ajahn Tah took place. He was one of the more
senior monks and, I think I am right in saying, he was also
Ven. Ajahn Mun's very first disciple. I think he had been a
monk for about sixteen or seventeen years. Originally he had
gone to undertake studies in Bangkok but was unable to
complete them. He had heard of Ven. Ajahn Mun's good
reputation from the frequent extolling by Ven. Chao Khun
Phra Upali (Chan Siricando) and therefore left Bangkok to
follow Ven. Ajahn Mun.
This year, Ven. Ajahn Tah had gone with Ven.
Ajahn Khan to spend the Rains Retreat in the Pah Bing Cave in
Loei Province. While there he had become unbalanced51
and had fled in the middle of the Retreat to see Venerable
Ajahn Mun. Ven. Ajahn Tah said that he had committed the worst
possible breach of the Monastic Discipline52
and that his distress was so intense that it felt as if his
yellow robes were on fire. When a thorough inquiry into the
circumstances and events in question was made, there was
evidently no truth in the matter at all. It was just his own
exaggerated doubts and anxieties over some trivial incidents
that had thrown him into turmoil.
One of Ven. Ajahn Tah's tribulations
concerned what had occurred some time previously, when he had
gone to develop his meditation near the village of Pone Sawang.
His samadhi had become strong and this had brought great
brightness to the mind. Any Dhamma issue that he brought up
for investigation seemed to be totally cleared up and then the
heart would converge to one-pointedness. This made him believe
that: "I have come to the end of the Holy Life".53
He later announced this claim in the midst of the community of
monks. Afterwards, when that bright condition of mind faded,
he began to suspect that he was guilty of boasting about
obtaining supernormal states and had thus broken the
monk's discipline in the worst possible way.
Although people explained to him that there
was definitely no offence because he had made his claim
through mistaken assumptions and misinterpretations, he
wouldn't believe them. In fact, this guilt-ridden anxiety had
already caused him many years of distress but he had
previously endured it. However, with the arrival of this Rains
Retreat it had become unbearable and he thought the only way
left for him was to disrobe. Ven. Ajahn Mun was unable to cure
him and so had to let him go, sending him to stay with Ven.
Ajahn Sao. Unfortunately, the following year Ven. Ajahn Sao
could no longer restrain him and the final result was that he
did indeed disrobe. After that he completely vanished as if
into thin air and no one has heard news of him right up to the
present.
Witnessing all this really made my heart
sink and I felt downhearted and saddened. I reflected that if
such a senior, long-practiced monk could still become mentally
unstable, what about me? What could I do to avoid such
unbalance? These thoughts made me so apprehensive and fearful
for my own well-being that I revealed my anxieties to Ven.
Ajahn Mun. He told me: "That's right! You have to be careful
of yourself. Don't stay too far away from a competent and
knowledgeable teacher. When something comes up, then hurry to
confer and consult with him."
After the Rains Retreat had ended, Ven.
Ajahn Mun and his party set out to walk down towards Sakhon
Nakorn.
11.1 Returning Home to Assist my Mother,
Uncle and Brother
I had been thinking of my mother and so I
returned home in order to assist her. I think I was successful
in this respect, for I recommended that she observe the Eight
Precepts and dress in white. On this occasion, my aunt, uncle
and my elder brother were also all inspired with faith and
determined to keep the Eight Precepts and wear white. This was
especially so with my elder brother, for he left his wife and
a newly born son of only a few months to ordain as a monk. I
had them leave their village and follow the senior monks so
that they could become better acquainted with Dhamma
companions and receive training from many different meditation
teachers. I followed along later with my brother and uncle,
catching up with them at the village of Plah Lo, Phannah Nikom
District, where Ven. Ajahn Singh had spent the Rains Retreat.
He led our group on to establish a temporary base near the
village of Ahgaht Amnoy. Not long after our arrival there, Ven.
Ajahn Mun came to join us and he had me go on with him to set
up a base near the village of Sahm Pong.
Living in close association with such
senior monks was very good for me. It forces one to be mindful
and alert at all times. One day, the novice who regularly
attended on Ven. Ajahn Mun was absent so I took over his
duties (acariya-vat'). One of these included going to
sleep on the veranda of Ven. Ajahn Mun's hut. Venerable Ajahn
Mun was usually awake and starting to meditate at three
o'clock every morning. On waking he would immediately reach
for a box of matches to light a candle and they would make a
slight rattling noise. I felt obliged to be up before him each
morning so that I could be quick enough to go into his room
and attend to his needs. After sleeping there and doing this
for many nights, Ven. Ajahn Mun obviously began to think that
it was unusual because he asked me: "Venerable Thate, don't
you ever sleep?". I replied that I certainly did.
The climate54
in Sahm Pong did not seem to agree with my health and
constitution. Although I still had quite a good appetite I
seemed to lack energy and my body continually ached and was
stiff and sore all over. My meditation exertion, however,
never faltered. After the meal, I would go into the jungle to
find a secluded spot to develop calm in solitude throughout
the day. During the night time I would walk in meditation and
then go up to listen to Ven. Ajahn Mun's Dhamma talk that
lasted from eight until ten o'clock. If a large gathering of
monks was present, his Dhamma talk might not finish until
midnight or two o'clock in the morning. Ven. Ajahn Mun always
made sure that he kept up this way of teaching and training,
and it continually inspired his circle of dedicated disciples
to be zealous in their meditation practice.
After Venerable Ajahn Mun left that place,
Ven. Ajahn Sao took over for three years. I learned later that
many monks who stayed on there had died. One was Ven. Ajahn
Bhoo-mee who 'died' there only to recover.55
12. Fourth Rains Retreat, 1926
in a Cemetery North of Ahgaht Amnoy District
At the approach of the Rains Retreat, I
made my way back to the district of Ahgaht Amnoy and stayed
just north of the town in a cremation ground.56
Meanwhile, Ven. Ajahn Singh was spending the Rains Retreat to
the south of that same district town. My elder brother, my
uncle, mother and aunt, with a nun from Pon Sawang Village all
stayed together for the Rains Retreat. I was the sole monk
although there was a novice by the name of Chuen who was from
Tah Bor. My uncle died nearing the start of the Retreat, which
left just six of us.
During this time there was an outbreak of
smallpox among the townspeople. Almost all of them scattered
and fled into the surrounding fields and forests to escape the
infection. Even the resident monks of the local monastery
followed the same route as the lay people, leaving virtually
nobody behind who could offer alms for us to eat. This
occurred because the residents of Ahgaht Amnoy had never
experienced an epidemic of smallpox before.
It was a town of more than a thousand
households and only as few as five people had contracted
smallpox. However, those who became infected pretended to be
healthy to escape detection and by the time they were found
out the disease was already well advanced. The procedure for
anyone found with symptoms was to move them away into the
forest. They were quarantined there in a small bamboo hut
built for them, while food was sent out for them to eat.
It was indeed a happy chance that Ven.
Ajahn Singh had some knowledge of forest herbs. He was thereby
able to bring out some medicinal herbs to use in treating the
disease and could tell the townspeople not to cast their sick
away in the jungle. The result was that only a few people
actually died. When news reached the authorities they came and
inoculated everyone.
We were remarkably fortunate that the
townspeople retained their deep respect for meditation monks.
This meant that although the town had been completely
abandoned, they would still stealthily come back in at four or
five o'clock in the morning to prepare rice to put into the
monks' bowls. When we went on alms round, they would come out
to offer food and then rush off back into the forest.
I would like to take this opportunity to
express my sincere thanks and appreciation for the generosity
of the townspeople of Ahgaht Amnoy.
Such merit and goodwill go beyond life
itself for they form a true refuge for the suffering people of
this world and the next. When we suffer, if we can't rely on
our virtue and past good deeds, what can we depend upon.
The people of Ahgaht Amnoy were more afraid
of smallpox than the tigers of the surrounding jungle. Even
neighbours and relatives wouldn't speak to each other. I asked
them when they would start talking together again and they
told me it would still be quite some time, after the end of
the Rains Retreat, in January or February.
During this Rains Retreat I often went to
listen to Ven. Ajahn Singh's Dhamma talks. This meant that I
had to walk through Ahgaht Amnoy town and then on for a
farther three kilometres. (The town was deserted and not even
a lone dog was to be seen.) I received a Dhamma talk from Ven.
Ajahn Singh that really shook me up. Perhaps he was making a
show of it to unsettle me, or was it just that he didn't
understand my true character? It's difficult to say. He said
that I had an obstinate and unyielding sort of character; that
I was stubborn and unwilling to accept anyone else. While he
was saying this, I focussed my mind to check out how it was
within my heart.
I really did have the utmost respect and
reverence for Ven. Ajahn Singh and therefore was always ready
to receive his teachings and instructions. Yet why did he say
such things about me? Still, what he said about me — my not
easily acquiescing to others — was certainly true. I had
always been that sort of person, finding anything that seemed
illogical or unreasonable difficult to accept. My own opinions
were subjected to the same careful checking and if they didn't
measure up or lacked foundation I would be absolutely
intractable in not accepting them. That's how I was. (I will
be explaining more about this character trait later in the
book.)
I sat there listening to Venerable Ajahn
Singh's Dhamma talk and also examining the state of my own
mind. It caused an audacious boldness to spring up, like
pouring fuel on a fire to put it out. I seemed to glide on the
way back to the monastery, feeling so light because my mind
was fully engaged on that point. That night, I redoubled my
efforts in meditation thinking that:
"Here I am. I've been trying with my
meditation practice as far as this. And yet why is it that I
can't identify the defilements that must definitely be
present, right there in my heart, while another person can
turn around and know about them before me. This is really
humiliating. Ven. Ajahn Singh is a human being, born of mother
and father, nourished by mother's milk and weaned through
spoon feeding. Just like me and yet he can perceive the
defilements within me better than I can myself. Here, today,
if I can't fathom out my own defilements then I should die in
the attempt."
When I actually got down to my meditation
practice, nothing in particular seemed to happen. I did,
however, examine Ven. Ajahn Singh's assessments and the way he
had used them — as he was supposed to — in giving his Dhamma
talk and concluded: Even if I'm not as he seems to think I
am, I can but continue to purify myself, for in the end, no
one else can know better than I can myself. With that my
heart became tranquil and unperturbed.
My accelerated exertions brought upset to
the bodily 'humors',57
making me feel that I should lie down and rest. However, I
couldn't really get to sleep for as I started to doze off I
experienced what the country folk call a pee-um.
Everyone knows about this phenomenon58
so there is no need to describe it fully here. The important
question remained whether or not the pee or spirit of
the pee- um actually exists. That night I was able to
search out the truth in many ways.
At first, it felt as if some huge, looming
black form came forward and seated itself on my chest, so that
I couldn't breathe. My heart nearly gave out in the struggle
to regain consciousness. Some people assert that the spirits
of all the creatures that one killed59
reside in one's thumbs. Resting the hands on one's chest
during sleep therefore allows the spirits to come out and
suffocate one. So I now removed my hands from my chest and
stretched them down by my sides. Nevertheless, it came back
and suffocated me again: 'Hey, what's happening here? Could it
possibly be because I'm sleeping on my back?' I turned over
and lay on my side to see what would happen and the
suffocating sensation came on again. This time the suffocating
pressure was such that it felt as if I would smother and die.
I therefore turned to focus on the
condition of those about to die:
The first time, I directed mindfulness so
that it was keeping closely aware of the mind, following it to
know what happens at death. Mindfulness stayed with the heart
right up to the final moment when only the barest awareness
remained. A feeling was present that to release that faint
degree of awareness would be death.
At this point, the question became whether
it would be better for me to let go and allow death to take
place. I felt that my heart was currently quite pure and that
if I were to let go, I wouldn't lose because of it. Although
there also remained a delicate feeling that expressed the
thought that: 'rather than letting go and die, by remaining
alive, I could continue to be of benefit to other people. If
it were all to finish here with my death, then it could only
be to my own purely personal advantage. Also, people wouldn't
know the full circumstances and causes of this death. If
that's the case, it's certainly better not to let myself die.'
I therefore attempted to wiggle and move my hands and feet,
until I came around.
The second time it happened, I saw no
bodily form but rather an enormous dark mass that loomed over
me. I knew now for certain that it wasn't a ghost. The cause
seemed more connected with the 'elemental winds'
driving upwards. After trying to move my hands and feet, it
all cleared up.
When it happened for a third time, it
seemed less intense than before. It was more of a drowsy state
and I just determined to get up. For all my readers in this
situation, notice your state when you regain consciousness.
There should be a heavy-headed dullness and lassitude present.
At this point, if you don't take any medicine to balance these
'winds' before going back to sleep, it will happen
again. In my own case, I've always found that the best and
only cure is by smelling borneol crystals.60
12.1 A Formula for Sleeping or not
Sleeping
At this same period, I tried to uncover and
understand the condition that exists during the state of
sleep. As a rule, we are never aware of the actual moment of
falling asleep. It's only upon waking that we come to know
that we fell asleep.
Before we fall asleep there will be the
state of tiredness, weakness and drowsy dullness of body and
mind. The chains of thinking processes become shorter and
eventually all awareness of thought-objects is released and we
quickly enter what they call sleep.
When we bring in mindfulness to focus on
the current condition of that final moment before sleep, we
will find that there is only the barest awareness left. It's
almost impossible to fix on it, while no mental-objects are
left at all. Only the most delicate mindfulness remains
present to follow and watch the current condition of the mind
arising in that moment. It is like when the mind drops into
bhavanga.61
If, at this point, we don't wish to allow sleep to take over,
an effort has to be made to look out for a single mental or
emotional object. This can then be subjected and held to and
taken up for thought-processing. As a result, the mind will
brighten up and be refreshed, free from all fatigue and
drowsiness. It will also have the beneficial effect equal to
having slept for four or five hours.
On the other hand, if we wish to sleep,
this is achieved by letting go of that final remaining trace
of mindfulness and sleep will come with ease and comfort. This
way is especially good because one only sleeps for a very
short period, so there is no wasting of time. It won't last
for more than five or ten minutes. If you have actually
established and focussed mindfulness, as I have been
explaining, you can rest assured that you won't be asleep for
more than five minutes.
If, rather than going to sleep, you just
want to rest body and mind, go and find a suitably quiet and
peaceful place to rest in. It can either be somewhere
completely secluded or among other people. Lie down, stretch
out, relax and be comfortable without tensing any part of the
body. Then settle the mind on a single object in that
condition of letting go. Let it just remain alone in emptiness
for a while, and, on getting up, you will feel in all respects
as if you had been sleeping for four or five hours.
This word sleep. In truth, the mind
doesn't sleep. It is rather that the body rests, without
having to make any movements. Even those who enter the high
state of meditation called the attainment of cessation62
can't be said to have gone into a state of sleep. This is
really the state where the meditator supervises the heart with
mindfulness to fix it on one mental object.
That object steadily becomes ever more
refined — as does mindfulness and the heart — until all
feelings and thoughts completely cease due to the strength of
the meditator's skilled practice. Mindfulness no longer has
anything to do and so fades out completely. Although bodily
breathing continues, it has become so subtle and refined that
one can hardly say whether it exists or not. In fact, it does
exist but it no longer appears to move through the nose. One
can compare it to an external breeze that while present is not
enough to manifest in the stirring and fluttering of leaves.
No one could then assert that no wind/breath exists for if
there is no wind/breath there's no air and then all
living-breathing beings in this world would be dead.
The Lord Buddha called this 'entering the
attainment of cessation', for at this point the nervous
system of the six sense doors63
will not receive any contact. This, however, is different from
the state of sleep. When asleep, something may very well
impinge on the senses so that one immediately wakes up. The
attainment of cessation requires sufficient practice and
preparation of heart so that it becomes competent and skilled.
After attaining this state many wondrous things64
can occur. It's not possible to hurt the meditator who has
entered into this state — even if someone set him on fire it
would never touch him. On the other hand, after entering
Nibbana, the body can indeed disintegrate.
The meditator can withdraw from the
attainment of cessation through the power of a previously
made determination.65
When they reach the determined time, the breath will gently
start to become progressively coarser and coarser until all
the bodily functions have reverted to their previously normal
state.
Attainment of cessation is not
Nibbana but a state of absorption.66
This is because absorption lacks the right-view wisdom
(paññaa-sammaadi.t.thi) that can investigate the root
causes of the defilements, such as those of the Sense Sphere (Kaama-bhava)
and the Fine-material Sphere (Ruupa-bhava). This is
rather the domain of insight-knowledge (vipassanaa-ñaa.na)
and right-knowledge and realization of the Path (magga
ñaa.na-dassana). All the absorptions are only
instruments of encouragement and support, that smooth the Way
and enhance energy.
Thus, before the Lord Buddha's Final
Passing Away, (Parinibbana) he entered and progressed
up through the various levels of absorption. He then
returned to the Fourth Absorption, which forms the
foundation for insight, and entered Nibbana from there. That
was between the Sense Sphere and the Fine-material
Sphere for that forms the base for the supra-mundane
dhamma. (lokuttara dhamma).
The question might arise here: "So! Why is
this old monk going on about the attainment of cessation,
about Nibbana and states of absorption? Has he
reached and realized these states or not?" The doubter might
answer himself with: "Can't one say that this is really a
matter of boasting about attaining to supra-mundane states?".
In truth, anyone who attains to the
cessation of perception and feeling, or to Path, Fruit
and Nibbana, or to the absorption of the attainment of
cessation,67
does not make the assumption that, 'I have
reached, entered or reside in such a state'. There is
simply a proficiency with the necessary skillful means that
leads to and connects with them. Just when the meditator is
about to enter such a state, any remaining assumptions and
suppositions about 'I' will bring him up short. Otherwise, the
average sort of person everywhere, intelligent and
knowledgeable about the Teachings and the Discipline, they
could all go off together and attain to the Path and Fruit
and Nibbana, to the absorption of the attainment of
cessation. The whole town, the whole country would all be
doing the same!
At the moment of realizing such states
there is no hope of making up assumptions and formulations
about them. Only after transcending those conditions can one
recollect and systematically check back over their successive
stages and development. Once having worked it out one will
then be able to formulate and set out all aspects of these
states.
It's not always necessary for the person
who explains about these things to have actually reached those
levels. When the Teachings have been set down and their
essential meaning established, one has to explain about it to
the best of one's own understanding. Sometimes this will be
done correctly and sometimes it will be mistaken. If things
had not been worked out in this way, how could the Teachings
of the Lord Buddha have endured and continued down to the
present day?
People listen, yet even though they all may
be listening to the same theme, to the same points, many will
understand in quite different ways, from different angles.
Furthermore, those meditators who have attained to exactly the
same stage, via an identical technique, will still find that
their individual skill and ingenuity are quite different.
This is why the Dhamma that one sees by and for oneself is so
wondrous and amazing and why it's so difficult to achieve.
"So why do you come along finding fault and
only condemning me? It's simply not fair."
Please excuse this digression into the
nether realms.68
Now let us return to my autobiography.
With the end of the Rains Retreat, Ven.
Ajahn Singh led our party to the village of Sahm Pong. It was
the customary practice for us all to gather and pay our
respects to the Ven. Ajahn Mun. On our way there, I related to
Ven. Ajahn Singh all my recent experiences and thoughts about
the pee-um and sleep. He made no response at all,
remaining quite silent. When we arrived, however, he proceeded
to relate this matter to Ven. Ajahn Mun. At that moment, I was
sitting a little apart from them so I don't know what he said
about my experiences — I couldn't hear. I thought that
probably it was all considered inconsequential and beside the
point, not being connected with the practice of the Noble
Path. He therefore didn't pursue it any further, as he might
have done with other issues.
Almost one hundred monks and novices
gathered to pay their respects to the Venerable Elders and
Senior Ajahns, and it was considered quite an event for those
times. After it was over, Ven. Ajahn Mun had me, with one
other monk and a novice, accompany him to the village of Kah
Non Daeng. This was where the Ven. Ajahn Oon, Ven. Ajahn Goo
and Ven. Ajahn Fan had spent the Rains Retreat. We stayed
there for three days and Ven. Ajahn Mun related to the group
about my practice with sleeping and not-sleeping. Everyone
remained silent, without comment. This was particularly so
with Ven. Ajahn Oon who previously had discussed this very
topic with me, when I was still unable to do it.
During the time that Ven. Ajahn Mun resided
at the forest monastery of Sahm Pong, he would give daily
Dhamma talks. If anyone was feeling despondent or irresolute,
or someone had fallen ill, he directed his talk like this:
"So then, it isn't fear of death that
you have but a desire to die many times." (He meant by
this, that if you continue meditating with dauntless strength
and determination, the heart's purification will cut back the
fear of death.)
As soon as Ven. Ajahn Mun departed, no one
was left in the monastery to continue to give Dhamma talks.
The morale and strength of heart of his disciples thereby
drained away and no one was able to carry on living there. The
'air' at that monastery was particularly inhospitable and it
was plagued with malarial fever. Everyone with poor health or
weak constitution would be struck down with fever. The whole
resident community of monks eventually followed along behind
us. They said that it was so bad that they couldn't continue
to live there any longer and that the air of Sahm Pong
monastery was so heavy and oppressive that it made them feel
drowsy and lethargic all day long.
When this group of monks caught up with us
again, Ven. Ajahn Mun made an observation about our ranging
farther afield through secluded places, so that we could
spread the Dhamma even more widely. He continued by pointing
out that we had already traveled throughout much of the three
or four provinces of this region. These were Sakhon Nakorn,
Udorn-thani, Nongkhai and Loei. He queried us about which
provinces would be best to head for? The majority were for
going down towards Ubon Province. But Ven. Ajahn Mun himself
was not really satisfied with this suggestion because suitable
jungle, mountains and caves were hard to find in that region.
However, if there was a consensus for going there, then he
wouldn't object. Having come to this collective decision, we
made ready to set off, traveling in small groups.
It was necessary for me to accompany my
mother on her journey back home and so I was not able to go
with Ven. Ajahn Mun. It was on this trip that Ven. Ajahn Mun
and his party encountered major upheavals. There were both
good and bad results from this:
The good side was an increase in the number
of forest monasteries for Kammatthana forest monks, which up
to then had not existed at all. This was the occasion when
forest monks for the first time permanently settled Ubon
Province. From that time forward it has continued to spread
out until today there are monasteries with Dhammayut'
monks in virtually every district.
The negative side was the deterioration in
the quality of the monks' practice. In fact, the decline this
time...69
was unprecedented, until Ven. Ajahn Mun was finally obliged to
turn away from the community there and leave for Chiang Mai
Province.
13. Fifth Rains Retreat, 1927
Again at Nah Chang Nam Village
I returned to spend the Rains Retreat for a
second time at Nah Chang Nam Village. Meanwhile, my elder
brother went for the Rains to Nah Seedah Village with our
father. After the Retreat had ended, I took my brother and we
went to develop our meditation practice in the cave called
Phra Nah Phak Hork. Sometime after this, my brother went back
down to find Venerable Ajahn Sao who had spent the Rains
Retreat in Nakorn Panom Province. It was after this Rains
Retreat that my brother went forth as a monk at Wat Srii Thep.
14. Sixth Rains Retreat, 1928
at Phra Nah Phak Hork Cave
I brought my father to come and stay with
me in the Phra Nah Phak Hork Cave. It was the first time in
the eleven years since his ordination into white robes70
that he had come to spend the Rains Retreat with me.
Furthermore, I had never stayed for the Rains so close to my
home village as I did that year. I consider that it was an
especially fortunate year, for it gave me the opportunity to
support my father in the way of Dhamma practice. He developed
his meditation to the best of his ability and achieved
excellent results. So much so that he was forced to exclaim
that it was the first time since his birth that he had begun
to experience deeply the flavor of Dhamma. He could sit in
meditation for as long as three or four hours at a time. I was
delighted to have fulfilled my aspirations by being of aid and
assistance to him.
Yet when circumstances come together and
the time is ripe, untoward things can come upon us. That is to
say, my father fell ill. His children and grandchildren saw
only the hardship of his situation — when intense pain came
during the night time, who would look after him? For there
were only the two of us, father and son, staying up in the
cave. So the family came and carried him off down to the
village so that they could attend to him there. He refused,
however, to go back to stay in the village monastery where he
had been before. Instead, he had them set him up in his shack
in the middle of the rice fields. I often went down to
encourage his constant attention towards Dhamma.
That was the year when something quite
miraculous arose connected with my father. The rice seedlings
in the villagers' fields of that whole area were in very poor
condition, despite the moderately good rainfall. All the stems
had turned a reddish color with the startling exception of
those in the patch surrounding my father's shack. These were a
lush green and were so remarkable that the village people
began to say that 'Father White Robe' would not survive
the year.71
And this indeed proved to be the case.
On that particular day I had gone to
instruct my father. I had reminded him of Dhamma and offered
him strategies to use in his meditation and investigations,
until he seemed quite pleased and contented. He still seemed
quite strong and fit, so at the approach of night I made my
way back up to the Nah Phak Hork Cave. He passed away in the
middle of that night, possessed of mindfulness and a peaceful
state of mind right up to the final breath. At dawn they came
to get me and I arranged that his funeral and cremation rites
were properly completed that same day. He passed away in
August 1928, at the age of seventy-seven, having been ordained
a white robe devotee for eleven years.
I had been living by myself in the cave
before my father came to join me, and after his death I found
myself alone again. To have the opportunity for this sort of
solitude is rare and I determined in my heart to make the most
of it: 'In the same way as someone offers flowers in reverence
to the Buddha — may my life, may the flesh and blood of this
body, may the tasks and duties I undertake, may they all
become my offering and puuja to the Triple Gem.'
Thus resolved, I got down to intensifying
my meditation practice with strength and determination. I
established and set mindfulness within the heart, not allowing
any thoughts or imaginings to be directed outside. Everything
was to remain wholly within an inner calm and stillness, all
day and all night. The setting of mindfulness before sleep
should be the same on awakening.
Sometimes, it even happened that although I
was asleep and aware of the fact, I was unable to get up. It
took some effort on my part to move the body and by that come
back to waking consciousness again. My own understanding at
that time was that the stilled, one-pointed heart, didn't
allow thoughts to careen away externally and so would
definitely be able to transcend every bit of suffering. I
thought that wisdom's only function was to purge the
out-wanderings of the heart and return it to a state of
stillness.
I therefore did not try to use wisdom in an
examination of, for example, the body and sense impressions72
and so failed to come to an understanding about body and
heart. These are still interrelated and interdependent, and
whenever any material or mental object comes into contact in
whatever way there must inevitably be disturbance. This causes
the stilled and settled mind to be shaken up and agitated,
following the influence of the defilements.
I applied myself to walking meditation
until my feet were split and bloody. Then I came down with a
fever that persisted throughout the Rains Retreat, but I
wasn't going to slacken off my meditation efforts. I had once
read accounts of some Elder-monks in times gone by who had
walked in meditation until their feet had split and broken.
However, I had found this quite hard to believe. I had
supposed that the use here of this particular verb 'broken'
suggested that their feet had been pounding down and striking
against some hard object, which is what caused the abrasions.
Walking with circumspection along a smooth and level
meditation path — what was there to knock against?
Actually, the same Pali word is used to
render both 'broken' and 'worn through' or
'perforated'. A monk is described as sick (or feverishly
ill) through several causes: arising from kamma; from
season; from bile disorders; from clashing with external
things; and arising from striving in meditation. It was only
then that I realized that my meditation exertions performed
with a mind of such zealous energy were lacking in wisdom. Yet
there I was, living alone without a competent Dhamma companion
to give me advice. To be only bold and daring in one's
striving while the heart lags behind in wisdom is not so good.
This was what caused my fever.
When the Rains Retreat was over, I retraced
my steps and went to find my brother and the Ven. Ajahn Sao in
Nakorn Panom. I went because I had been separated from all my
Dhamma companions and meditation teachers for more than two
years. Ever since Ven. Ajahn Sao and Ven. Ajahn Mun and
company had left Tah Bor District, I had been the sole monk of
our group to remain in the area.
14.1 The Affair of Luang Dtah Mun
At that time, Luang Dtah Mun73
of Kor Village had come to spend the Rains Retreat at Nah
Seedah, the village where I was born. He was the sort of
character that liked to travel around disputing with less
knowledgeable monks. He would challenge them with his supposed
mastery of the religion and was ready to debate with anyone
and beat them hollow. "Even all those forest meditation
monks," he said, "when they see me coming they duck away. Just
look for yourself, none of them can cope and they have all
fled through their fear of me. The only one left now is this
'Mister Thate',74
but in a few days he'll be on his way too."
After continually hearing things like this,
nobody could be bothered to speak to him anymore. If they did
try, they couldn't get a word in edgeways for he always had to
be 'the only one to get it right.'
It was during that Rains Retreat that a
dispute arose between him and the monks in the monastery of
Glahng Yai Village. These monks surreptitiously approached me
with an invitation to come down from the cave to clear up and
settle the conflict. As soon as I arrived, he reversed his
position and dropped the quarrel. Yet he repeated this kind of
dispute and prevarication so often that all the local monks
were totally disgusted with him. Perhaps one can use the
Southern Thai phrase: 'he had gone crazy for fame and
celebrity'. They no longer bothered getting involved with
him, for any discussion was becoming clearly pointless.
Then came the final day of the Rains
Retreat, the Pavarana Day. This is a traditional time
for ceremonial offerings so they went and invited Luang Dtah
Mun to come and join in the sermon-giving. Likewise, they came
and invited me, although they didn't mention that to him. By
the time I got to the village there wasn't a person to be seen
for they were all already waiting for me at the village
monastery. This was unusual, for on a normal day when they
knew I was coming, all the villagers tended to come out and
wait, lining both sides of the road.75
Some people would even call out and make quite a commotion so
that I became reluctant to walk through Glahng Yai Village.
When Luang Dtah Mun's sermon was over, I
convened a meeting of all the gathered monks to discuss the
points he had brought up. He had said that chanting our praise
to the Buddha by starting with "Araha.m..."76
is wrong; that as we ourselves were not arahants we
couldn't pay reverence to them. He gave his logic and reasons
for this, and said that one must begin the recitation with
"Namo" and then continue with "Namo [tassa Bhagavato]
Arahato Sammaa Sambuddhassa". I pointed out to him that
this formula pays homage to Arahato in just the same
way, so perhaps Luang Dtah Mun — following his own logic — is
already an arahant and enlightened?
It was at this point that Luang Dtah Mun
exploded with anger and said, "If I wasn't an arahant,
I certainly wouldn't carry on being a monk like this and would
have disrobed and gone home to sleep with my wife... ". His
language continued with more crudities and was offensive to
everyone listening. I therefore came back and questioned what
gauge he used in his assumptions about his own arahantship.
He answered that 'to look at the earth' was the
measuring standard. I replied that anyone could perceive the
earth, even grazing cattle bent their heads and looked at the
earth from morn 'till night — that must make them all
arahants.
"This Luang Dtah has boasted of having
attained to supernormal states." As soon as I had said this he
was shocked and struck dumb, unable to say anything at all. I
went on to refer to many issues. I announced, for instance,
that if it was true that he had continually disputed with and
challenged the local monks and the forest meditation monks, he
should speak out now. But he absolutely refused to speak.
By this time, it was almost evening and the
monks were preparing for the Pavarana Ceremony. Luang
Dtah Mun went into the Uposatha Hall to join in the
ceremony but the monks refused to allow him to take part77
and he therefore had to return to Nah Seedah Village alone. On
that day most of the village had come to the monastery and
nobody had been left behind to watch over the houses. Even the
district headman, who had never previously set foot in a
monastery, came that day. After that he continued with regular
attendance for the rest of his life.
I didn't immediately return to the cave
that evening, but went to sleep at the village monastery in
Nah Seedah. Luang Dtah Mun came to see me, panting and gasping
for breath, almost unable to put words together. He was
sulking and felt so slighted that he was going to flee that
very night. He said he was too ashamed and embarrassed to face
people and had to leave. I requested him to think again and at
least stay until the morning, saying that I had no ill will
towards him and had only been speaking according to truth and
reason. But he couldn't sleep all night, and at the crack of
dawn went off to see the District Chief Monk and requested
permission to disrobe. Although it had been only one day, the
news of what had happened had already spread. The Chief Monk
already knew about it and therefore told him that permission
was not needed and for him just to go ahead and disrobe. He
then went to the village of Kor to ask permission from his
former Dhamma Studies teacher, but he too knew about the
situation and likewise told him that permission wasn't
necessary and to go ahead and take the robes off.78
Finally he did disrobe and quietly locked
himself away in his former wife's bedroom. It was many days
before he dared show his face again.
I've included these rather ancillary
episodes in this autobiography to make it more comprehensive.
14.2 Concerning Luang Dtee-a Tong In
After relating those more tangential
stories, I now want to get back to essential matters. Luang
Dtee-a Tong In was originally from Korat Province, of the
village of Koke Jor Hor. He moved to run a business in Tah Bor
where he became a prosperous and prominent merchant, well
known throughout the area. He and his wife were both pious
Buddhists and the people of Tah Bor came to know about the
keeping of the lay precepts through his influence. Luang Dtee-a
Tong In donated an orchard to establish a monastery and named
it 'Wat Ambavan' — the Mango Grove Monastery — which
incorporated both their names: his wife's being 'Am'
and his 'In'[dra]. Both eventually ordained as monk and
white-robed nun for four or five years. Later, he became ill
with some disease that caused his body to swell up and this
confined him to bed.
Each year, Luang Dtee-a Tong In's children
would gather to make merit and offer gifts to enhance his
recovery. It so happened that they invited me to participate
in the ceremony, even though I had never set eyes on him
before. At that time I had five Rains as a monk and he had
seven, making him senior to me by two years.
Luang Dtee-a Tong In told me that his
condition made him feel as if he were already dead. I replied,
"when the person's dead, that's good". He went on to say that
he was not concerned about anything, that he had set his heart
solely on the Four Paths, Four Fruits and One Nibbana [i.e.,
Enlightenment]. I told him that if such aspirations were still
present he certainly couldn't yet be dead, for deadmen didn't
have any desires. At this he was taken aback and responded by
asking, "If I'm not to have any aspirations, what would you
have me do?". I told him to meditate using "Buddho" as
his only object of attention. By this time, I noticed that
downstairs was already full of monks, so I quickly completed
my part of the ceremony and went down allowing the monks from
other monasteries to carry on with the proceedings.
(Normally, when he was feeling well, he was
very diligent with his daily devotions, doing much chanting
and reciting of Dhamma verses. It would take him a full seven
days to complete a round of his Pali recitations. When senior
meditation teachers came to visit, for example, Ven. Ajahn Mun
and Ven. Ajahn Sao, he would go out to see them and upon
coming away would urge his wife and children to make merit
with offerings of gifts and food placed into the alms bowl.
That was enough, he said, there was no need to go overboard.
Yet his daughter could progress with her meditation practice
very well.)
Early the following morning, someone came
to invite me to go and see Luang Dtee-a who had something that
he wanted to tell me. I said just to wait a few moments, for
as soon as I had eaten my meal I would be on my way. On
arriving there, he swiftly related to me his wonderful
experience:
"Ajahn, I really had a strange experience
last night. The roosters normally crow
'cock-a-doodle-doo...', but last night it wasn't like that
at all. Instead they said, 'your-mind-is-one-pointed'
'your-mind-is- one-pointed...".79
(When the heart has only one object and is
one-pointed, (Citt'ekaggataa or ekaggataarama.na)
sounds can manifest in such a way.)
"Ajahn," he added, "before, the gecko
lizards always cried, 'geck-o geck-o', but last night
they said 'you're-already-old' 'you're-already-old'."80
(This becomes a Dhamma sermon for when any sound impinges with
a similar phonetic sound it can immediately become a teaching
instrument.) I reassured him that that was correct and that he
should now be determined to further develop his meditation by
making the heart well established and steady throughout the
day and night. He should not allow any distractedness or
carelessness to arise and he would then be ready and prepared
for death.
Some days later a lay man came to request
that I immediately go and see Luang Dtee-a, for he was about
to disrobe. I was shocked. What on earth could this be about?
Why ever would he want to disrobe, just as he was becoming
proficient in meditation? I told the layman to ask him to wait
and not to disrobe right away, that as soon as my meal was
finished I would go and see him. His hut had two sets of
balustrades and so when I arrived there I opened the outer
gate and entered, while one of the boys helping to nurse him
opened the next gate for me. His hearing my approach proved
enough to dispel all his misgivings, "as if they were plucked
away".
Luang Dtee-a explained to me what had
happened. He said: "I related to my daughter all my various
meditation experiences, just as I had told them to you. Then
it hit me — Oh no! — I am guilty of the worst sort of offence
by boasting of super-normal attainments to her. I became so
anxious and distressed by this that I thought I would have to
disrobe. But as soon as I heard the sound of your arrival, all
that agitation evaporated. So I won't be disrobing now."
I explained to Luang Dtee-a that it
certainly wasn't a case of claiming super-normal attainments,
for he had not acted from a desire for praise or gain or fame.
He had spoken to exchange Dhamma understanding and therefore
there was no offence.
Later, I started to think back to my
meditation teachers, and became concerned about my long — two
year — absence from them. So I took my leave of him and went
off to Nakorn Panom to visit Ven. Ajahn Sao.
14.3 Staying with the Venerable Ajahn Sao
Ven. Ajahn Sao generally did not give
formal Dhamma sermons and when he did, it would be more in the
way of a Dhamma consultation. My going to stay with him that
year meant that there would be another monk available to
assist him. Ven. Ajahn Toom was already resident there, so the
two of us could contribute our energy in assisting Ven. Ajahn
Sao in teaching and instructing the lay community.
It was this year when I begged Ven. Ajahn
Sao to consent to have his photograph taken as a memento. At
first he did not want to, but I pleaded and gave him reasons
so that eventually he did acquiesce. I pointed out how
essential it would be for his disciples and those of future
generations always to have an opportunity to 'focus' on him
and pay their respects. Previously, he would have had nothing
to do with that sort of thing, so this was indeed quite a
unique happening. Even so, I was concerned that he would
change his mind and so I had to act quickly. I therefore
crossed over the River Mekong into Laos to bring back a
photographer to take the picture.
I was delighted at having been able to
photograph Ven. Ajahn Sao and I gave copies to Ven. Chao Khun
Dhammachedi and Phra Khru Siila-samban (who later was given
the title Chao Khun Dhamma-saaramunii). The photograph of Ven.
Ajahn Sao that I arranged at this time appears to have been
the only one ever taken.
Ven. Ajahn Mun was much the same. He always
refused to allow photographs to be taken of him for mementos
or keepsakes. I had frequently beseeched him to do so but he
would reply that the money would be better spent 'buying some
cakes for the dogs'. Yet when I persisted with my pleas and
pointed out my reasons, he finally relented. This was to be
for the benefit of the following generations who would now
have a picture of him to pay reverence and respect to.
After the Rains Retreat, Ven. Ajahn Sao
went wandering, ranging over on the other side of the River
Mekong and going to stay in the Som Poi Cave. This was the
cave where he and Ven. Ajahn Mun had gone off together when
they first went forth in search of solitude. It was a large
cavern with a whole series of chambers and many
interconnecting passages. There was also a special cabinet for
holding the Pali Scriptures, but it was bare of books. I
followed him there but by the time I arrived he had already
left, going on to stay in another cave.
This was the Tiger's Cave, which was quite
far away along torturously winding paths through circuitous,
labyrinthine double ranges of mountains.81
A tigress had come and given birth to her cubs below the cave
where Ven. Ajahn Sao was living. That is why they called it
the Tiger's Cave. About forty metres above there was an
elongated cavern extending right through the mountain to the
far side. The local villagers said that it needed the lighting
of five successive dtai-torches82
before one emerged at the other end.
Ven. Ajahn Sao lived in the mouth of this
cave with a couple of monks and novices. There was also an old
man who had accompanied them so that he could attend on Ven.
Ajahn Sao. This old man used to light a fire at the entrance
to the cave where he slept. In the middle of one night, he
heard a loud wailing sound but couldn't see anything when he
got up to look. This puzzled him, so at dawn he walked around
to inspect the spot from where the sound had come. He came
across paw prints — a tiger had been standing there. It had
probably wanted to enter the cave but on seeing a person lying
there had gone back.
Both side walls of this cave were
completely smooth making it look something like the interior
of a railway carriage. Water dripped down from stalactites
into a pool deeper inside the cave and the monks could collect
this for drinking. There was no need to filter it because it
didn't contain any living creatures.83
One monk took me in to survey the inner reaches of the cave
and our inspection lasted as long as it took half a wax candle
to burn down. It was really pleasant without any feeling of
oppressive stuffiness. The nearest village was about a
kilometer away. I stayed there with the Ven. Ajahn Sao for two
nights before walking back.
I heard news that during World War II, a
company of Japanese soldiers had established a hidden camp
inside these caves. When the Americans received intelligence
reports about this, they went in and bombed the caves. A bomb
landed on the cave entrance, sealing it off and causing the
many Japanese inside to perish. No one has ever gone and
excavated the site. How tragic that is — we have so devalued
and wasted human life.
15. Rains Retreat, 1929, at Nah Sai
Village
As the Rains Retreat was approaching, Ven.
Ajahn Sao sent me to reside for the Rains at the village of
Nah Sai, while Ven. Ajahn Poo-mee went to stay near Nah Kee
Rin Village. This was in response to invitations from the lay
devotees in both these places. During this Rains Retreat my
health was not at all good but I refused to become discouraged
or lax in my meditation exertions. I was so resolved that I
would willingly have sacrificed my life as an offering to the
Triple Gem.
It made me reflect upon the threats and
hazards that might lie ahead for both me and for Buddhism
overall. Would the order of monks I belong to be able to
continue throughout? There might be political disorder, or
perhaps enemy forces would invade the country. I might end up
conscripted into the army and if not that, then the nation
could be enslaved under foreign domination. How could I remain
a monk under such circumstances? Even if I could carry on,
conditions wouldn't be conducive to the practice of Dhamma and
the monk's Rule. So what was I to do? Furthermore, although we
now have many competent meditation teachers, when old age,
sickness and death have taken their toll, who then will be
guide and leader to the group of monks on this path of Dhamma
practice? The radiant light of the Lord Buddha's Dhamma can
only become increasingly dim'.
Such ponderings filled me with sadness and
depression, so that I felt sorry for both myself and the
future state of Buddhism. It seemed as if such a state of
affairs was just around the corner, just a couple of days
away. The more I thought of it, the more lonely and despondent
I felt.
Having arrived at this junction, I turned
my thoughts to my present situation. The current state of
national and political affairs was still good and stable.
Meditation Masters were still present and I had already
received much training and instruction from them. Having such
an opportunity I felt I must hurry and accelerate my
meditation practice. Eventually, I would be able to understand
the Lord Buddha's teachings and come to self-reliance.
Whatever the future might then bring, whatever obstacles might
arise either for me personally or for the general state of
Buddhism, I wouldn't lose out.
As soon as I had come up with this skillful
approach, my heart became resolute and ardent in its
meditation exertion. During the Rains Retreat, although I
could not actually sit in meditation due to my illness and had
to concentrate more on using walking meditation as the main
posture, it didn't affect my earnestness.
After the Rains Retreat came news that Ven.
Ajahn Singh's group together with Venerable Maha Pin had
returned from Ubon and had gone on to Khon Kaen. As I wished
to go and pay my respects to both of them, I took leave of Ven.
Ajahn Sao and set out.
This was the same year that the government
issued a proclamation officially prohibiting spirit worship
and other animist and occult beliefs. It urged people instead
to take refuge in the Triple Gem. The provincial authorities
had accordingly mobilized Ven. Ajahn Singh and his group of
monks to help in taming the demons and spirits. When I
arrived, I found that I too became somewhat involved in this.
16. Eighth Rains Retreat, 1930
with Ajahn Maha Pin at Phra Kreur Village
I had organized the villagers of Phra Kreur
Village in the relocating of their monastery from the bank of
the village stream to a small rise in the fields on the edge
of the Bahn A-ew Mong Lake. Afterwards, Ven. Ajahn Maha Pin
came to join me in spending the Rains Retreat there. The other
senior monks resident there for the Rains included Ven. Ajahn
Poo-mee, Ven. Ajahn Gong Mah, myself and Ven. Ajahn Maha Pin
as the head-monk.
Throughout this Rains Retreat, I regularly
helped Ven. Ajahn Maha Pin by taking on some teaching
responsibilities and sometimes receiving visitors. Every
Observance Day84
all the monks, novices and visiting lay people would apply
themselves to the development of their meditation as best they
could, in line with their individual abilities. One has to say
that they did achieve very satisfactory results. Some lay
people meditated and came to see many different and diverse
things, so that they became absorbed in the meditation and
forgot all about their homes and families.
After the Rains Retreat, Ven. Ajahn Poo-mee
and his party of monks, together with me, took our leave of
Ven. Ajahn Maha Pin. We went off in search of seclusion in the
direction of Jote Nong Bua Bahn Village, in the district of
Kantara-vichai (Koke Phra) of Mahasarakam Province. At first
we were invited to stay next to the school of Nong Waeng
Village. While there we could give some Dhamma talks and
instruction to the populace until the lay devotees from Jote
Nong Bua Bahn Village came and requested us to return to their
village. Eventually the site at Nong Waeng became a permanent
monastery.
This time, when we returned to Jote Nong
Bua Bahn Village, we set ourselves up in some dense jungle by
the side of the Dtork Paen Lake. During this period, numerous
people came for training in meditation, including many white
robed nuns and lay men keeping Eight Precepts. Some of these
people achieved quite astonishing results in their meditation.
They would sit in meditation in the monastery and know that
back in the village their children or grandchildren had been
bickering and abusing each other. Those who could meditate
would succeed marvellously. There were also some who couldn't
meditate and only took the Precepts because that was what
their friends had done.
One day, one monk saw a vision when he was
meditating. It concerned a certain young nun who seemed to
approach, wishing to touch his feet.85
I sent for the nun in question and instructed her about the
need to perceive the harm in all sensuality because it was
what would become a cause for suffering. I pointed out that
physical form is the basis for innumerable attachments. This
eventually enabled the nun to accept and understand the
situation, yet she certainly must have wondered how I knew
about it.
At the approach of the Rains Retreat, Ven.
Ajahn Singh directed that I go and spend the Rains in Phon
District. Ven. Ajahn Poo-mee was to take over from where I was
staying by Dtork Paen Lake.
17. Ninth Rains Retreat, 1931
in the District of Phon
Venerable Gate, my elder brother, came to
stay with me during this Rains Retreat. The teaching and
instruction of lay people continued as normal, while my
personal meditation practice and that of the resident monks
and novices kept up a steady pace. An extraordinary incident
did occur however, concerning a woman sorceress.86
She had ten or more disciples and she traveled around making a
living by attending to the 'sick'. I advised her to forsake
her spirit-worship and to come and firmly establish herself in
the Triple Gem. Her belief in spirits, I pointed out, is based
in wrong view and lacks virtue and merit, whereas going for
refuge to the Triple Gem really is something of merit and
wholesomeness. A person can then also be counted as a devotee
with right view in the Buddhist Teachings.
She replied that 'what she had was good'
and that when some spirit mediumistically possessed her, she
could be directed to find buried treasure or enabled to leap
into a clump of thorny bamboo without being gashed. I
responded that that might be all very well for believers, but
spirits had never taught their devotees to abandon evil and
cultivate good, or to keep the Precepts. The only instructions
they ever gave were for the person to make them an offering of
the head of a pig, or a chicken or duck. After having prompted
this animal sacrifice, they didn't even eat it. One has to
kill the animal oneself and offer it to the spirits and when
they don't come and eat it then one has to eat it oneself. The
spirits will not have to accept the responsibility and the
evil consequences of such killing, it will all come back on
the one who kills.
In what way are these spirits supposed to
help us? After the Lord Buddha had finally passed away, he
wasn't reborn as a spirit. He bequeathed his Teachings that
taught people to relinquish evil and cultivate what is good,
for that is both for their own benefit and for the benefit of
others. The Sangha conveys those Teachings to us all,
according to the path laid down by the Buddha. We have thus
been able to know what is wholesome or unwholesome, what is
virtuous or harmful, right up to these present times. The
teaching of spirits is not like that.
The sorceress made up her mind and agreed
to abandon her spirit worship and dedicate herself to the
Triple Gem. That night, she put the teaching I had given her
into practice and obtained marvellous results. That is, before
going to bed she chanted her devotions to the Triple Gem and
then sat in meditation. She then saw two spirit-children, a
girl and a boy. They were swinging on the hand rail of the
rice mill pounder, at the bottom of the stairs leading up to
her house.87
They didn't say or do anything at all. This vision was as
vivid as if it were happening before her very eyes but they
were actually closed in meditation. She then became convinced
that the spirits could no longer come and take possession of
her, and that the protecting virtue and power of the Triple
Gem was indeed great.
Her husband was also a medicine man88
and was so devoted to his own powers that he refused to
acknowledge and raise his hands in añjali to Buddhist
monks. Before entering a monastery he would raise high his
foot instead.89
(My apologies.) By strictly following his teacher's rules, he
did indeed become invulnerable. One could slash or stab or hit
him without being able to inflict any injury on him. That same
night however, he was unable to get to sleep. Whenever he
started to doze off, he would be startled awake and become
fearful, as if something threatening was near. Consequently in
the morning he asked his wife whether she had received
anything 'special'90
when she had gone to see the Ajahn because he hadn't been able
to sleep all night long. His wife confirmed that the Ajahn had
indeed given her something 'special' and that she would
take her husband to see him too. Finally, both these old folk
gave up their sorcery and took refuge in the Triple Gem.
Such were the events of that Rains Retreat.
18. Tenth Rains Retreat in Korat, 1932
The forest meditation monks who were
disciples of the Ven. Ajahn Mun had never ventured near the
province of Nakorn Rajasima (Korat). They had heard reports
that the people there were fierce and cruel and had therefore
always held back through concern that it wouldn't be safe.
Then Somdet Phra Maha Virawong, when he still had the
ecclesiastical rank of Phra Dhammapamok, requested Ven. Ajahn
Singh and Ven. Ajahn Maha Pin to go there.
Police Major Luang Charn Nikom, commander
of the second company of the Korat town police force, found
inspiration and faith in the monks. He donated a plot of land
on which to establish a forest monastery beside the rail head
at Korat.91
In consequence, Ven. Ajahn Singh called his disciples living
in Khon Kaen to come down. I walked down with this group of
monks and we stayed in Luang Charn's orchard. I organized the
monks in building temporary shelters because Ven. Ajahn Singh
was away in Bangkok and hadn't yet returned. When he arrived,
I went and helped Ven. Ajahn Maha Pin to construct a place for
the monks to stay in a cremation ground. This was the second
site and I ended up spending that year's Rains Retreat there.
This became (Wat Saddha'rahm).
Many senior monks were resident there for
that Rains Retreat: Ven. Ajahn Fan, Ven. Ajahn Poo-mee, Ven.
Ajahn Lou-ei, Ven. Ajahn Gong Mah and myself. Venerable Ajahn
Maha Pin was the head monk. Throughout this Rains Retreat, Ven.
Ajahn Fan and I were responsible for assisting Ven. Ajahn Maha
Pin in receiving visitors and giving sermons and instruction
to the laity.
This was the first time that any forest
monasteries for meditation monks had been established in Korat.
In fact, two were set up in that one year. This was also the
year when historic changes took place in Thailand with the
ending of the Absolute Monarchy and its replacement by
democracy.92
After the Rains Retreat I left with a party
of monks who were out seeking secluded places in the direction
of Gra Tok District and Ging Cheh. We came back through Gra
Tok District again and I supervised the building of a
preliminary monastery at Dorn Dtee Klee with the help of the
District Officer, Khun Amnart. But before it could be
completed, it became necessary for me to return to spend the
Rains Retreat in Tah Bor, in Nongkhai Province. I afterwards
heard that Ven. Ajahn Singh had sent Ven. Ajahn Lee to spend
the Rains Retreat at Gra Tok District in place of me.
18.1 Reflections and Anxieties that are
not Dhamma
The weather had been incredibly hot when I
was organizing the building of shelters and meditation huts at
Wat Pah Salawan in Korat. I don't like hot weather but I had
gritted my teeth and endured, persevering in my meditation
without let up. I had trained my mindfulness so well that
there was stillness and calm throughout day and night.
Sometimes it would converge and enter the bhavanga and
totally disappear for many hours. This, however, is certainly
not the way that allows wisdom to be born.
I had been trying to correct this tendency
for a long time both by my own efforts and by asking others
for help. It had never previously succeeded but this time I
found a way out for myself. This was by being ready to
apprehend the heart when it was right at the point of
convergence into bhavanga. At that moment the condition
of awareness becomes unmindful and there is the inclination
towards indulgence in the pleasure of the tranquillity and
happiness. When mindfulness fades the mind will converge into
bhavanga. The thing to do is to apprehend it right at
the point when it is fading towards indulgence in that refined
tranquillity. Catch it there and swiftly set mindfulness on to
a coarser object and focus and examine it more externally.
The problem will be immediately solved by
not allowing the heart to converge towards that tranquillity
and pleasure. Putting it simply: forestall the heart's
convergence and totally focus one's examination on just one
place, the physical body.
I had been subject to this state of affairs
since I first went off into the forests to meditate and it was
only at this time that I could cure myself. If one reckons it
all up, that is more than ten years of practice to come to
such understanding. Even so, when sense objects impinged on my
mind it could still become agitated. What about those people
who have no experience of the heart's peace and happiness, how
will they make out when sense objects intrude?
I had some doubts about the
Dhamma-Vinaya thinking that:
'The purity of the Path, Fruit and Nibbana
— which form the culmination and ultimate goal of Buddhism —
probably can no longer be attained. All that is presumably
left now is the level of attainment to cessation, which
is still a mundane state.' Nevertheless, I still carried my
meditation forward, despite the mind-bending hot weather.
One day, my mind converged in an
extraordinary way — it totally converged93
into bright radiance, being there alone. There was a clear and
precise clarity of knowing, illuminating brilliantly that one
point. When I turned to examine or focus on any theme or
aspect of Dhamma — all my wavering and doubts about
Dhamma-Vinaya seemed to disappear. It was as if I had
already reached the ultimate point of all dhammas. I
didn't, however, concern myself with that issue but fully
resolved to know how to cleanse the heart to complete purity.
Having already progressed as far as this, what was there to do
now, how was I to proceed?
When I had the opportunity to ask advice
from Ven. Ajahn Singh, he recommended that I concentrate my
contemplation much more on the un-beautiful, loathsome aspects
of the physical body.94
He told me to focus there until I could see its rotting away
and decay and the final disintegration into the four elements.
I broke in with my misgivings: "Surely when the mind has
already let go of form [ruupa] and only name
[naama] remains, isn't going back to bodily form
too coarse an object of contemplation?" Well, at that point,
he really made a loud noise, charging that already I was
boasting of reaching supernormal attainments.
The truth is that I had never — right from
the very beginning of my meditation practice — been skilled in
examining the loathsomeness of the body. That's the truth. In
my meditation practice I had always gone straight to focussing
on the heart. I had deduced that because the defilements arise
in the heart, if the heart doesn't venture outwards into
disturbance but remains well set in a peaceful state, all the
things of the world are left in their purity.
My interrupting by voicing these doubts
brought forth a very loud reaction from Ven. Ajahn Singh, such
a response showing the true expression of his character. So
what was I to do? I stayed quiet and kept my 'self-satisfied'
feelings to myself, pondering the reasons why his views didn't
fit in with my own opinions. In this matter, it became obvious
that only Ven. Ajahn Mun remained for me to consult and depend
on.
After a while, Ven. Ajahn Singh softened
his voice and he turned and asked me what I now thought.
I stood my ground and said that I still
didn't agree. I insisted, respectfully, that he shouldn't take
the idea that I had been bragging of supernormal attainments
seriously. I genuinely submitted my deep veneration for my
teachers with a pure heart. The reason I had come forward to
open up my true feeling and express such an opinion was
because I was totally at a loss about the way to go on. I
explained that this was the first time that I had experienced
such a condition of mind and that I didn't know if it were
right or wrong, or whether it needed rectification, or how to
proceed with it. I said, with due respect, that I didn't
harbor any resentment towards my teacher and that if he had
any further suggestion as to skillful means with which to
resolve my uncertainties, then out of kindness and compassion,
to please throw it all at me.
Ven. Ajahn Singh then soothed and comforted
me, advising me to proceed slowly but surely, as that was the
way if things were to develop. Well, that day my heart
certainly felt as if it had totally lost everything upon which
it could depend. It was as if all ties and attachment to the
group were gone. One of Ven. Ajahn Singh's wishes had been
that the group of monks not split up. He wanted us all to help
each other in spreading Buddhism in that province. However, I
had long desired — ever since I had joined up with the others
while staying in Khon Kaen — to separate myself and go off to
seek some solitude. This was because I was well aware that my
meditation efforts and the necessary skillful techniques were
still weak and ineffective. I had continually tried to detach
myself but always in ways that would not give the impression
to my teacher or companions that I didn't like them. I had not
however, succeeded in this. It was on this occasion, after the
Rains Retreat, that I got my chance.
19. Eleventh Rains Retreat, 1932
at Wat Araññavasee in Tah Bor
It was during this Rains Retreat that I
readied myself to go and seek out Ven. Ajahn Mun in Chiang Mai
Province. Throughout this period I was developing my
meditation with the same techniques and methods that I had
used while staying at Wat Pah Salawan, in Korat. Although I
firmly held Ven. Ajahn Mun in mind as the inspiration for my
meditation efforts, my heart didn't seem as refined as it once
had been. After the end of the Rains Retreat I mentioned to
Ven. Ornsee (Sumedho, later Phra Khru Silakan-sangvorn) my
intention to go to Chiang Mai Province, following Ven. Ajahn
Mun. I asked him if he would like to go with me and that if he
would, then we should lay down certain principles:
1. There should be no grumbling about
hardships encountered along the way, for example, difficulties
with the journey, food, or shelter. If either of us were
eventually to fall ill then we would help each other to the
best of our ability — 'together to the end'.
2. If one of us became homesick for family
or friends — for example, for our parents — there should be no
abetting or helping the other to go back.
3. We must be resolved to face death,
wherever and however it came.
I told Ven. Ornsee that if he accepted and
agreed to abide by these three principles then he could go.
However, if he didn't feel able to follow them he certainly
shouldn't even think of going. Going against this would only
be the cause for his later regret and that might cause me
anguish too.
He said that he was happy with the
arrangement and asked to go along. There was also a white
robed layman (chee pa-kao) who asked to travel with us.
We embarked from Vientiane95
by motorized-boat, going upstream towards Nakorn Luang Phra
Bahng.96
Sometimes we spent the night in riverside villages and
sometimes we camped out on river sand banks.97
It took three nights and four days to reach Nakorn Luang Phra
Bahng. On the trip up, we admired the beautiful natural
scenery on both banks of the Mekong River. That, together with
the refreshing coolness of the local climate, aroused a sense
of solitude and isolation filling us with great happiness.
This was enhanced by so few fellow passengers — and they had
all gone to sleep. Only the skipper and some of his deck hands
were about.
The landscape, though empty of villages,
was encompassed with vast stretches of virgin jungle, with
rocky outcrops jutting out over the river. Occasionally
animals such as monkeys and langurs would make spectacular
leaps as they playfully chased each other through the trees.
Whenever the boat came closer to the bank, they would all
crowd together in troops and gaze down, scrutinizing us.
Nowadays, such scenes are difficult to find but just recalling
them still evokes in me a feeling of solitude.
On arrival at Nakorn Luang Phra Bahng we
sought permission to stay at Wat Mai, the newly built
monastery close to the royal palace of the King. This is where
they enshrine the Phra Bahng98
— so greatly revered and cherished by the citizens of Nakorn
Luang Phra Bahng. This also happened to be the day when the
Queen [of Laos] came to ceremonially dedicate the restored
plinth of the Phra Bahng. We therefore counted ourselves
fortunate witnesses of these customs and merit-making
ceremonies of the citizens of Nakorn Luang Phra Bahng.
However, I won't go into further detail about them here.
After the celebrations were over, we took
leave of the abbot and went across to stay at Wat Nong Sa-gaaw.
This was situated on a high hill on the opposite bank of the
Mekong River,99
directly across from Nakorn Luang Phra Bahng. We stayed there
to await the boat that would take us upriver to the district
of Chiang Saen, in Chiang Rai Province of Thailand. After
waiting there for four nights we embarked again and the
journey took another four nights. The journey upriver to
Chiang Saen was thus of equal length to the previous stretch
up from Vientiane. We rested in Chiang Saen for four or five
nights before setting out overland for Chiang Rai and Lampang.
In Lampang, we stayed in the garden for
visitors to Phra Bart Dtark Phah by the entrance way leading
up to the mountain shrine. The chee pa-kao accompanying
us fell ill while we were there. He had no fever but felt
exhausted and weak, and his urine was thick and reddish like
water that has been used to rinse meat. We were far from any
doctors and so had to resort to the Lord Buddha's medicine100
and depend on ourselves. So we told him to drink his own
urine, even though it appeared so clearly reddish. He drank it
straight after urination, while it was still warm. It worked
wonders! Within less than ten days he was back to normal.
After his recovery, we set out walking for about the first
thirty five kilometres and then continued sometimes on foot
and sometimes catching a vehicle101
until we reached Lampoon and finally Chiang Mai.
When we arrived at Wat Chedi Luang in
Chiang Mai, we enquired about Ven. Ajahn Mun but didn't find
out much. Worse than that, some of the monks there even
referred to him with dismissive contempt.102
19.1 Risky Encounters of the Monk's Life
May I ask here for the indulgence of my
readers for what I am about to relate concerns the risky
encounters of a monk's life. You may be able to find in it
some sort of significance.103
It makes me feel awkward and embarrassed but to leave it out
would make this autobiography incomplete.
Once, when we were stopping over at Wat
Chedi Luang in Chiang Mai, I felt very fit and healthy — never
before had my health been so good. I assume it was because of
the cool climate, which I have always found agreeable. Anyway,
I went and had my photograph taken as a memento. Two days
later I went back to the shop myself to collect the prints.
Just as I was picking up the photographs to examine them, a
woman — I'm not sure what sort of person she was — walked up
behind me. She asked — in a very familiar manner — for one of
the photos and her suggestive behavior seemed flirtatious and
provocative. Hearing her speak in such a way gave me a fright,
for I had only just arrived in town and didn't know anyone. As
soon as I had looked and taken in the situation, I made a
completely negative response and she hid her face, turned away
and fled.
Hearing such remarks and seeing such
behavior came as a very big Dhamma lesson. It made me reflect
in a wider way on my previous experiences with women for I had
already encountered similar behavior from women many times.
Yet I had never shown any interest because I was determined to
live my life as a monk in the Dhamma-Vinaya of the Lord Buddha
— viewing women only as a danger to the brahmacariya
holy life.104
This latest incident then brought up all the previous episodes
that had arisen during my life.
For instance, there was once a woman whom I
respected as a pious person. She wasn't so young anymore,
either. I instructed her about meditation in the same way that
I taught other people. Later, she came and told me that
whenever she came near to me it felt as if her heart were
relieved of its sadness. Sometimes, when a large group of
monks came to see me, she would still come and sit there with
us for lengthy periods. At that point I realized what she was
up to. I tried to teach her to remedy this by meditation, but
without success. I then used more intimidating, forceful
language in an attempt to make her angry with me, but also to
no avail. One day around dusk she dashed up into my hut. She
wouldn't heed anything I said to forbid it and once up in my
hut listlessly sat down and wouldn't speak. I called for her
relatives to come and pull her away and that made her furious.
In the morning, while I was walking
meditation, she strode straight towards me and stopped not far
away. She started screaming at me, saying: "Why do you teach
meditation like this? You teach people to go crazy! It doesn't
matter who the meditation teacher is, none of them will escape
from lust". Then she turned her back and went away. It was a
sight that made me feel very uneasy. Her relatives took her to
a hospital where the doctor examined her and could find
nothing wrong. From there she went to live in a center for
white-robed nuns with whom she already had close connections.
Three months went by and she returned to see me. She had by
then realized for herself the mistake and error she had made,
and came to confess that she had misconstrued the situation,
having thought that I had some magnetic charm105
that had made her fall in love with me. She then asked for my
forgiveness and that was the end of the first affair.
The second incident occurred a long time
later. I was giving guidance and teachings to lay Buddhists in
various places in the rural areas. It all came from a sense of
kindness and good intentions with sincere concern, and I
managed to ignore any hardship that this caused me personally.
I would sometimes still be teaching late into the night — I
could manage to go on until midnight or even as late as three
in the morning.
I particularly felt sympathy for those
young women present who were still without ties or
obligations. I wanted them to see the stress involved with
their gender, to see that if they kept the precept of chastity
purely, after death they would be reborn in a higher realm; or
in a male body, for that would allow them to ordain as a
novice or monk.106
This rather naive and silly opinion of mine was a general one
towards all women, not for any individual in particular.
It was this compassion that became my
charismatic charm without me being aware of it. To explain, I
had become so popular and respected by so many people that a
lot of them — women and men, old and young — came and ordained
with me in the forest. Some of them obtained wonderful results
in their meditation, evident to themselves and the other
members of the group. Those people who couldn't meditate,
however, would instead find opportunity to increase their
defilements.
One day I had to go off on some business
and a nun came up and asked to accompany me on the journey. I
wouldn't allow it and set out. After this, the nun fell into a
state of stupefied confusion and wouldn't utter a word.
Whenever anyone asked her something, her only response would
be a smile. When I returned after many days away and saw her
condition, I tried using forceful language to make her
indignant and thereby shake her out of her brooding fixation,
but she just kept on smiling. I tried using some Buddhist
techniques to help bring her out of it but it was no use, so I
had someone take her back to stay with her relatives. At that
time, it didn't strike me as very significant and I just
thought that these incidents arose solely from sexual desire.
Afterwards, I continued to train the local
Buddhist laity in virtue and Dhamma with my efforts being
founded on kindness and motivated by a sincere wish for their
welfare. I had to pass through many similar minor incidents
that might have endangered my following of the brahmacariya.
However I neither paid them much attention nor thought
anything untoward could happen; and I feel rather abashed
about such incidents so I'll ask not to go on about them.
However, I will say something about an
incident that was the most horrifying close call in my life of
brahmacariya. It happened back when I was newly
ordained.
Sometimes, if I had spare time, I would go
with a boy,107
usually in the evening to visit my lay supporters. On one such
evening, I went up into a house to call on one of the lay
supporters. She came out and closed the door behind us. That
gave me quite a fright. At that time, she was alone with her
young child. Anyway, we began conversing about various things
in the way that people who have regard for each other do. One
thing she always seemed to ask me about was whether I wished
to disrobe.108
Being both a straightforward sort of person and naturally shy,
I would always just say, "No", and quickly go on to talk about
religious topics.
This time was no different. She asked the
usual question but then continued to talk about her past. She
spoke about the time before her marriage when a monk had
fallen in love with her but they hadn't married. The marriage
to her present husband was an arranged affair, both families
having thought it a good match. Their living together wasn't
much more than that and she didn't know how much longer they
would last together. I just sat listening, assuming that she
was confiding in me like this because we were close friends
and that she had no ulterior motive.
Yet her behavior did seem strange in the
way she was gradually drawing herself closer to me, always
edging in closer and closer. Light from the dtai-torch
began to flicker and was about to go out so I told her to trim
it, but she just smiled and did nothing. I began to feel
uneasy and felt the inner-heat from some desire that was
arising, mixed with a strong fear of wrongdoing and of being
discovered. Even to this day, I find that moment difficult to
explain. It was as if I was totally stupefied. As far as I
could make out, she must have been feeling it as strongly if
not more so — her facial expression seemed bereft of all
mindfulness.
She couldn't stand it anymore and went out
to get some water to drink and splash on her face and then
came back into the room. This was repeated many times and on
re-entering she would always sit herself even closer to me.
Meanwhile, my disquiet grew and I felt completely befuddled.
That made me irritable so I told her I was leaving to go back
to the monastery. However, it wasn't that easy for when I
turned to get the boy who had accompanied me he was sound
asleep, slumped up against the wall. She pleaded with me to
stay the night there in the house and return to the monastery
in the morning. That increased my feeling of stupefaction
together with an incredible attack of bashfulness. I told her
to wake up the boy and when I asked her a second time, she
complied.
When the boy was awake, we both climbed
down the house stairs. As I left I still felt befuddled and
extremely ashamed of myself. I was also afraid that my
monastic brothers and teachers would get to know what had
happened. We arrived back at the monastery about midnight but
I lay sleepless right through till dawn, reflecting on what
had happened and why. I had somehow escaped those perilous
circumstances in a miraculous way.
That young woman stimulated all the
remembered incidents from the past that I've been relating
here, a stranger who asked for my photograph that day. She
certainly gave me the equivalent of a powerful sermon to which
to listen. "Ah, so these are the wiles and ways of women
still lost in intoxication with the worldly realm of sensual
desire." Therefore, may I here again offer her my great
thanks for her lesson. The incident involving her was quite
straightforward but the latter two affairs happened because I
overlooked the nature of worldly ways; or some might say it
was because of my naive foolishness. Yet I am willing to be an
innocent simpleton about that sort of thing, for that is why I
was willing to forfeit such a life and go forth as a monk. I
went forth in the radical way of one truly being willing to
offer his life in homage to the Buddha's Teachings. If
however, I hadn't been such a simpleton, and if my merit and
good kamma hadn't been so supportive, and if I had been
reluctant to offer my life for Buddhism — I would probably
have long ago become crows' bait.
Recollecting my escapes from such
frightening situations caused an immense feeling of
exhilaration and satisfaction to arise in my heart, so much so
that my body was quivering for days afterwards. Later,
whenever I was to mention these episodes, those same feelings
would arise in me and such a reaction persisted for almost
twenty years.
I find it very embarrassing and I don't
want bluntly to declare that women pose a threat to the
brahmacariya — after all, my mother was a woman and the
Buddhist Teachings under whose cool shade I take shelter is
still primarily dependent on the dedicated support of women.
In the Buddha's time the lay woman, the Lady Visakha, was
widely renowned as one of the pre-eminent devotees (Mahaa-upaasikaa)
of the Buddha's Teaching. Nevertheless, when the Buddha
cautioned his close disciples to be circumspect about their
life of brahmacariya, for the most part he would warn
them to remain vigilant concerning the opposite sex.
Take for example, one of the final sayings
of the Lord Buddha. He was replying to Venerable Ananda's109
questions about how a monk should conduct himself with a woman
after the Lord Buddha had finally passed away into Nibbana:
"Not to see or hear them is good and safe; while if there is
contact then don't become too close or chat with them; while
if it becomes necessary to speak with them make sure that you
take care and restrain your mind."
For women who would train their hearts to a
purity that transcends all suffering, they should contemplate
the dangers of the opposite sex, the male, which forms their
object of desire.110
By seeing the fault and harm in this they will also come to
dispassion. As with the Elder Upalava.n.na Bhikkhunii111
who once declared something to the effect that: "I have
seen the harm of all sensual desires. Whenever sensual desire
besets someone's heart, it obscures and blinds them — a father
then becomes capable even of sleeping with his own daughter."
To summarize, acute danger to the
brahmacariya holy life comes most seriously from
worldly sensuality. However, this can't exclusively be
about one gender because all humans and animals born into this
realm of sensuality come to birth through both sexes, through
father and mother. Whatever we do therefore, there can be no
escape from contact with the opposite sex.
Any person wishing to go beyond all
sensuality must first pick out that very sensuality as
something fundamental and as an object of deliberation. This
applies especially to the opposite sex who make up the
material form on which one hangs the signs of sexual
desire. Lust and sexual desire are mental qualities that
exist in everyone's heart and when they arise one feels the
need to fix on a physical form as a target and object for
grasping hold of. The physical form fixed upon is inclined in
every way to be able to respond to that lustful desire and
passion. It can do this, for example, through: bodily form,
sexual characteristics, complexion, shape and appearance,
deportment, decorum and speech.
The opposite sex or any object stimulating
sensual pleasure can thus be turned into something that
promotes the conditions necessary for a person to discern the
harm of all sensuality. We will then see them as great
facilitators in liberating ourselves from the sensual realm.112
If that wasn't the case, all the Dhamma-vinaya, the Lord
Buddha's ordinances and the way of practice of forest
meditation monks — including all the various ways and
faculties of wisdom — would be totally worthless and of no
benefit.
All people — whether they are ordained113
or lay — having been born into this sensual realm are obliged
to defy this sort of threat and danger. Even if they don't
possess the latest armaments there is always the weapon that
their parents fashioned for them (their fist),114
their basic constitution, so that they can handle it. The
person who won't stand up and fight has totally wasted the
life to which he was born. However, the strategy and tactics
employed by the recluse and the lay person will differ, in
that the recluse battles for victory while the lay
person battles against defeat. While the person who
does not try at all is already rotting away while still alive.
I have been discussing all this for the
benefit of those who are ordained and who must safeguard their
brahmacariya holy life. It is this that forms the basis
for the future continuity of the Lord Buddha's Teaching. While
women may be the greatest danger to the monk's holy life, they
are also equally of the greatest benefit and good to the
Teaching. Women furnished the form from which the Lord Buddha
and all the Noble Disciples came to be born and they also
offered the object of contemplation through which was born
their Dhamma realization.
When I think about those monks who
transgress the Discipline in the most offensive of ways, by
involving themselves in things that are regarded as worldly
sensuality, namely sexual desire and money.115
What can one say about such monks who are supposed to have
already forsaken all that when they went forth to ordain? Even
a lay person, still completely immersed in the five strands
of worldly pleasure,116
would be considered base and sordid if they exhibited such
behavior among morally principled people.
I have already led my readers away, cutting
through a forest of potent dangers until they must be tired
out. So now I'll return to the account of my search for Ven.
Ajahn Mun.
19.2 Following Ven. Ajahn Mun into Burma,
1933
We stayed at Wat Chedi Luang in Chiang Mai
town for two or three nights and then took leave of the abbot
to continue our journey in search of Ven. Ajahn Mun. After
fruitless enquiries at the various small monasteries where he
had once stayed, we decided to make absolutely sure and go
farther afield beyond Thailand.
We crossed into Burma going via the towns
of Muang Hahng, Muang Dtuan, Mork Mai and Rahng Kruer, heading
on up to the Phah Hang Hoong Cliffs (Rang Roong) that are
close to Muang Pan on the River Salwin. But our hopes were
disappointed as there wasn't the slightest sign that he had
been that way. The cold weather then proved too much for us
and after spending two nights with the Palong hill tribes
people we came down off the mountains. Such cold — right in
the middle of the March and April Hot Season! We were forced
to huddle for warmth around a fire throughout the day and
night. What would it have been like in the actual Cold Season
or during a particularly cold year?
Ven. Ajahn Mun disappeared into the jungle
because of what occurred when the Ven. Chao Khun Phra
Upali-gunuupamahjahn (Siricando Chan) felt that he didn't have
much longer to live. Ven. Chao Khun Phra Upali' saw there was
a need for a suitable senior monk to take charge of Wat Chedi
Luang and because of his already great respect for Ven. Ajahn
Mun he was inclined to hand over responsibility for the
administration of that monastery to him. Ven. Ajahn Mun
preferred peace and quiet. He did not wish to get involved in
such matters but, in order to respond to Ven. Chao Khun Phra
Upali's purpose, he did go and reside there for one Rains
Retreat. After the Retreat he took his leave and disappeared
into the jungle. Ven. Chao Khun Phra Upali' had already passed
away in Bangkok during that same Rains Retreat.
For the next two years there had been no
news of Ven. Ajahn Mun. That left the two of us, Ven. Ornsee
and myself, to seek him out and our wanderings through the
forests and mountains were all aimed at this. As long as we
stayed within Thailand we felt at home with the various
hardships we always had to put up, but as soon as we crossed
over the frontier our frustrations and hardships increased a
thousandfold. For example, there were different cultural
traditions and customs, and the language barrier.
Although we were all supposed to be
Buddhist,117
the customs were sometimes very different from what we were
familiar with and sometimes they didn't seem even in line with
the Dhamma-Vinaya that the Lord Buddha had set down. It
was very trying and bothersome for us as we were their
visitors and guests. This was especially so when we were with
the various hill tribe villages that were particularly poor
and undeveloped.
And the paths and trails! In some places we
were forced to follow the streams up into mountain valleys,
otherwise there were walks along the edge of precipices. On
the descent from one such climb I slipped on some rocks and
fell, badly gashing my knees. I forced myself to hobble on
until we reached the village of Pong Pah Khaem on the
Thai-Burmese Border. We then went to stay in the Plong Cave
where I could nurse my wounds and recuperate for ten days.
While traveling in Burma118
we had seen many admirable features. The people there liked
peace and quiet, and they were generous and open-hearted.
There were no thieves or crooks, and no domestic animals — no
poultry or pigs — because they wouldn't kill animals. Their
diet was basically vegetables, seasoned with chili, salt,
beans and sesame. Once in a long while some dried fish would
be brought up from Cambodia for them to sample. I later heard
that after the Second World War,119
Field Marshall Por120
compelled these people to raise domestic animals that caused
them much distress. I really appreciated their sincere good
will and religious faith, and their peaceful and orderly way
of life. We would hear no disturbing noise at night even
though village houses might adjoin the monastery's fence. It
was just as if there was no village there at all.
When the wound in my knee had healed well
enough for me to walk, the two of us set out across the
mountains of the Morn Ahng Kahng range (where Kahng means
hoo-ang or the 'Demon Possessed Mountain'). We trekked
through them all day without reaching the hill tribe village,
for this mountain was indeed extremely high.121
It had taken us until midday to reach the summit and then the
descent proved so steep that darkness overtook us as we
reached the mountain's foot.
We carried on walking and about half way
along the trail we heard the roar of a tiger not far away from
us. I was almost frightened to death by the idea of a tiger
being so close but I didn't let on to my friend — he had been
born and raised in an agriculturally developed area and so
didn't know the sound of a tiger. If I had told him, I knew I
would instantly draw him into my state of trepidation. Going
beyond the range of the tiger's roar we lost the trail and so
were forced to find a place to spend the night in the jungle.
I was so afraid of the tiger that I lay sleepless throughout
the night. There was a heavy dew and it was extremely cold yet
my friend lay there snoring loudly all night. While I was
terrified with the thought that the tiger might hear him and
we would be killed — he blissfully slept through it all.
At the crack of dawn we packed our things,
still soaking wet from the dew, and set off again. On the way,
I told him that the noise he had heard the previous evening
that sounded like the yelping of a dying dog was, in fact, a
tiger. It was the roar a tiger makes just after having
consumed a full meal, expressing its high spirits.
We carried on walking and by around eight
o'clock in the morning we had reached a village where we could
go on alms round. After eating our meal we set off again and
reached the Dtap Dtow Cave, where we stayed for a time to
recover our strength. Feeling refreshed, we then resumed our
journey, heading in the direction of Phrao District.
19.3 A Bad Omen for the Travelers
Next, something unbelievable occurred — yet
it happened. On that day, after having our meal, we were
leaving the Dtap Dtow Cave when a barking-deer122
darted out from beside two houses and across our path. These
houses had been built in the middle of an open grassy field
close to the gate of the cave-monastery. The barking deer then
strolled leisurely, almost lazily, in front of us but we
didn't take any notice of it thinking that this was its
territory and we were just passing through.
We continued through the rest of the
village and were cutting across the fields to join the start
of the main trail, when more barking-deer appeared. A pair,
male and female, that were among the village herd of water
buffalo, spotted us coming along and darted out in front of us
again, and again we paid them no notice. However, not long
after that we found that although we had started along the
right footpath, we had somehow wandered away from it. How was
it possible that we could have mistaken our way and ended up
on an old neglected trail leading into a side valley?
For about ten hours we were forced to pick
our way along the rocky stream bed for the steep mountain
slopes rising on both sides forced the path down off the bank.
As the climb progressed it became so narrow and the jungle so
thick that no sunlight could penetrate. We didn't stop for
rests, not even to have a drink of water. When exhaustion
began to set in, I proposed to my companion that we retrace
our steps and pick up the main path, but he would not agree.
I thought that the head of the stream we
were following must be the main drainage source for the
surrounding, more lightly forested ridges — just like the
streams back in my home region of the Northeast. It certainly
did not turn out like that for when we finally reached the
source, we found a sheer cliff face confronted us. There were
tracks of large deer and the wallowing holes of wild boar.
As there was no longer any path forward we
had to turn back and almost straightaway I mis-stepped on a
rock and fell so that it deeply gashed the sole of my foot.
Night was approaching so I used my shoulder-cloth123
to bind the wound and we decided to scale the steep side
slopes that were mostly of scree. Well, it was quite a
scramble, for wherever one placed a foot it would slip and
slide.
We reached the summit around seven o'clock
in the evening and saw a rather indistinct footpath winding
its way along the summit ridge line. We were glad of the path
because it probably meant we were near a village. Suddenly
nearby, "peep! peep!" — a stag, startled by the light
of our candle lanterns,124
had cried out and stamped the ground in alarm. This startled
us so much that my heart seemed to miss beats. On recovering
our composure we realized that, " Ah! It's only the sound of a
deer". Looking in the direction of the noise we could make out
its white chest and knew then that it was just a stag.
Afterwards, it let out another cry and jumped down from the
ridge of the mountain and disappeared.
After seeing the flattened sleeping place
of this wild deer so close to the path, it became obvious that
we were still a long way from human habitation. As it was
already late, we decided to spend the night there and so we
each arranged a place to our liking in the thick grassy
undergrowth. Yet all night long we were unable to get any
sleep. The wind was too strong to hang the mosquito nets from
our krots, while on the ground it wasn't just termites
attacking us, for swarms of ants also came, attracted by the
blood from my wound and the sweat of our bodies. We had to
wrap cloths around our eyes to prevent the ants from getting
in to drink from our tears.
As soon as it was light, we rose and looked
back down on the way we had come. Far below we could see the
paddy fields as tiny squares. We oriented ourselves and
estimated that if we continued straight onwards along the
present path, we would probably meet up again with the trail
that we had lost. So we cut across jungle and more open
forest, following our line of march. How my foot was hurting!
Pushing on across the more open, rocky, pebbly ground was
almost unbearable but I gritted my teeth for we had to press
on as we were still a long way from any village. After quite
some time, we did indeed strike the hoped for trail.
Walking along the trail, we eventually
reached a village not much before nine o'clock in the morning.
We arrived with feelings of some relief and could slip our
requisites from our shoulders125
by the side of a landing stage of a stream, beside the houses.
A moment or two later someone came out to
see us and we related the whole course of events. We thought
to ask straight out for something to eat but were afraid this
was something blameworthy. So instead we tried to explain
indirectly by mentioning that we had not yet eaten anything
and that as I had an injured foot going on an alms round
wouldn't be possible. If we were to wait there, would we be
able to obtain anything to eat? She said we would and as she
went back into the house we assumed that she would bring some
food for us to eat. We both therefore went to bathe ourselves
in the stream.
When I had finished washing the pain in my
foot grew so excruciating that I couldn't walk on it at all.
During the previous night it hadn't been at all painful and
even that morning's walk had been bearable, so why should it
now suddenly hurt so much that I couldn't even stand up?
Venerable Ornsee, my companion through all this suffering,
felt faint and dizzy and couldn't stand up himself. All we
could do was to wait for her to bring us something to eat —
but there was no sign of that.
Hunger and fatigue now surged in on us.
Fortunately I had some herbal medicine for dizziness with me
in my shoulder bag and so was able to attend to Venerable
Ornsee, but it was well after ten o'clock in the morning
before he could get up. I suggested then that he go and ask
what was happening. He only managed to find two young boys
minding the house and discovered that all the adults had gone
to work in the jungle. This village had only two houses and
everyone made their living by cutting the young banana leaves
and drying and smoothing them for sale as 'cheroot' or
'cigarette papers'.
When Venerable Ornsee informed me of the
situation, I had him go and bring the two boys to see me and I
asked them if they would exchange cooked rice for some matches
— we had no other possessions. Each of us had a couple of
boxes of matches, and in exchange we got two baskets of sticky
rice, two dishes of chili and fermented soya bean paste with
two small bunches of steamed vegetables.126
We had our meal and how good it tasted!
After the meal was over the pain in my foot
grew much worse, so much so that my whole leg was inflamed and
throbbing. I endured this until just after three o'clock in
the afternoon, when we moved on. I hobbled along for about
three kilometres before we reached another village where we
stayed for eleven nights. We rested and recovered our strength
and I was able to attend to my wound. From there we climbed
over a Karen settled mountain, coming down into the district
of Phrao in Chiang Mai, at Manora Village (Look San).
That evening we received some good news.
Someone came and told us that Ven. Ajahn Mun was staying in
the Pah Mi-ang127
of Maer Pung and that Ven. Ajahn Sahn was at the entrance to
the trail going up to Khork Kham Cave. We were delighted and
thought that this time our aspirations would be fulfilled.
After the meal, we gathered our things and set out, arriving
just as night was falling at the Khork Kham Cave where Ven.
Ajahn Sahn was staying. We spent the night with him,
discussing Dhamma and talking about this and that as was
suitable. The next morning after the meal, he put us on the
right path and Venerable Ornsee and I took our leave and set
off.
We arrived at Ven. Ajahn Mun's place at
about four o'clock in the afternoon. He was engaged in walking
meditation but when he saw us coming he immediately recognized
us and called out our names. He halted his walking meditation
and went over to sit in his hermitage. We began to slip our
things down from our shoulders and place them on the ground
outside, but he wouldn't have it and insisted that we put them
on the veranda of his hermitage. Doing so, we entered and
bowed our respects to him.
Ven. Ajahn Mun opened by enquiring after
our well-being. I then respectfully explained to him: "the
reason it's become necessary for me to seek the Venerable
Ajahn out this time, is that I need your help in sorting out
my meditation. I have already learned a lot from others in our
group, but I'm convinced that the Venerable Ajahn is
the only one who can resolve it all for me."
I then proceeded to detail my meditation
practice and experiences to him, starting from my very first
endeavors right up to those experiences that I had related to
Ven. Ajahn Singh in Korat. This led him to describe how he had
previously instructed his disciples, in effect suggesting how
I should assess the group of disciples whom he had taught:
"Any monk who follows my way of practice
until he becomes skilled and firmly established in it, should
progress well and will at least hold his own and succeed. If a
monk doesn't proceed along this way, he won't last long and
will eventually regress or disrobe. Even for myself, should I
be burdened with many responsibilities and involvements with
the group of monks, then my meditation development can't be
consistently developed. My focussed investigation into the
body wouldn't be refined, nor would the heart become clear and
lucid."
"In your investigating, never allow the
mind to desert the body for anywhere else. Whether or not it
appears to be clearing and becoming more lucid, don't retreat
from fixing your investigation there. You can examine the
body's loathsomeness, or view it as made up from elements, or
examine it to see it as aggregates, or by way of the Three
Characteristics.128
Any of these methods can be used. But you really must fix
your investigations within these, including all the four
bodily postures. Yet this isn't to say that after looking you
can stop with that — regardless of whether it is seen clearly
or not, just continue with the investigation. When any of
these aspects are fully and lucidly seen in one's heart, all
other exterior things will clearly manifest there too."
He also told me not to allow the mind to
enter the bhavanga.
20. Twelfth Rains Retreat, 1934
at Pah Mi-ang Maer Pung
A New Way of Meditation Practice
As soon as Ven. Ajahn Mun had finished
speaking, I made a resolution in my heart: From that moment
I would start again and learn a new way of practice. Right or
wrong, I would follow his instructions and let him be the only
one to guide me and make the final decisions.
One can say that from that day forward, my
mindfulness was solely directed towards investigating the
body. Throughout the day and night, I was now viewing it as
loathsome, as made up of the four elements and as a mass of
suffering. I intensified my practice without let up or
negligence for six months — (I stayed there for the Rains
Retreat) — without wearying of it. As a consequence my heart
received calmness and peace and a new understanding arose:
All things of this world are merely the
four elements. But we make assumptions (sammati) about them
and then go and fall into delusion about our own suppositions.
That is why there has to be so much trouble and distress with
all these things.
This new understanding gave great solidity
and firmness to my heart, which was very different from how it
had been. I became confident that I was now going along the
right path but did not inform Ven. Ajahn Mun about this
because the firm belief in my new understanding convinced me
that I could do that any time.
The weather was so extremely cold that year
that we had to sleep by the side of a fire. Although I got a
splinter of wood in my hand, no blood flowed because it was so
cold. After the Rains Retreat, Ven. Ajahn Mun went down to
stay near the village of Toong Ma-khao. The two of us,
Venerable Ornsee (now Phra Khru Silakan') and myself, stayed
on up there but we swapped places. I went down to stay where
Ven. Ajahn Mun and Ven. Ornsee had spent the Retreat, while
Ven. Ornsee came up to my place on the mountain.
In the middle of one night a tiger
approached and sat watching over Ven. Ornsee, who was lying
asleep beside the fire. When the fire died down and he began
to feel cold he stood up to stoke it up again, at which point
the tiger growled and sprang off into the jungle. Being born
among the fields he wasn't familiar with the sounds of the
jungle tiger and I didn't enlighten him, being concerned that
he would become frightened.
Sometime later Ven. Ajahn Mun sent a letter
telling us to come down to see him. We went to help him with
some task for ten days and — what happened? Ah! All my
meditation schemes that had seemed so lucid and obvious before
were no longer so clear. I was now seeing 'people' as the
'people' that arise from conventional suppositions.
When the task was completed, Ven. Ajahn
Waen and I requested permission from Ven. Ajahn Mun to go off
wandering in search of solitude again. Venerable Ornsee stayed
behind to attend on Ven. Ajahn Mun. We set off on our journey
and after about twelve kilometres129
turned off into the forest for some seclusion.
During the night I heard the roar of a
tiger from a nearby mountain top and this helped to
concentrate my mind in seclusion. I called up the virtues and
qualities of the Lord Buddha as my meditation object130
and from this arose knowledge of a strange and marvellous
nature, in different ways never imagined or experienced
before. We stayed there for two nights before continuing on to
meet with Ven. Ajahn Sahn in the district of Phrao. I didn't
stay long with him however because of my yearning for
solitude. So, taking leave of him, I climbed up the mountain
to where the Moo-ser hill tribes lived and continued with my
meditation exertions there for nine days.
I thought that by going to live with the
Moo-ser and not having a language in common,131
I would be able totally to commit myself to meditation
practice. I knew quite well that they were generous-hearted so
that they would certainly give me enough food to eat.
20.1 A Distorted View Arises
I exerted myself in meditation to the
extreme limit of my ability, until a misguided and distorted
view (Vipallaasa) arose:
'There is no Lord Buddha, no Sangha.
There is only the Dhamma. This is because the Lord Buddha or,
in other words, the 'Prince Siddhatthakumaara' only became the
Lord Buddha through knowing the Dhamma. Even the Lord Buddha
himself was only ruupa-dhamma and naama-dhamma.132
The Sangha is the same, for they all, whether enlightened
noble disciples or unenlightened ordinary disciples, are
sustained by Dhamma. Their physical form is but ruupa-dhamma
and naama-dhamma'.
This was my rock certain opinion. I was
absolutely convinced it was true.
But I did review what the authorized
version had to say about it and found, well, that they didn't
agree with my opinions. I was unable to settle these two
conflicting views and they continually disputed with each
other over many days. It was certainly a good thing that I was
unwilling to throw out the conventional wisdom, for if I had,
the results would have created quite a song and dance.133
As it happened, Ven. Ajahn Sahn sent
someone to invite me to come down to receive some offerings
and gifts from the lay people. I was in two minds whether or
not I should go. However, I then remembered the state of my
lower robe. I had already been using it for three years and it
might not last through the next Rains Retreat, so I decided to
go. Accepting his invitation, I went to renew my robes so that
my requisites would be complete and I could then return. On
going down they offered me all the things I required and that
distorted view seemed completely to disappear of itself.
21. Thirteenth Rains Retreat, 1935
at a Moo-ser Village (Bahn Poo Phayah)
When I had finished cutting, sewing and
dyeing the robe, I again went up the mountain. But this time I
didn't return to my original spot but went on to the Moo-ser
hill tribe village of Poo Phayah. On my arrival, they were
more than glad to see me and kindly came together to make a
hut for my stay. First though — Ah! — my hopes that the
language barrier would probably stop anyone coming to bother
me were soon dashed.
When I first arrived, I stayed in one of
their abandoned houses. These people had never seen forest
tudong monks before and the whole village turned out, from
the youngest to the oldest, to stare at me. They gawked from
far and near, some coming so close as almost to tread on my
toes. As one onlooker went, another one came to replace him
and it went on from midday until around four in the afternoon.
They stood there gawking, and then sat there gawking, then lay
down gawking at me. They were dirty and smelled. It was all
too much for me and made me feel quite dizzy.
The villagers made me a path for walking
meditation. Yet I only had to go out on it for them all to
throng after me, so that I ended with a long line behind me
strung out the length of the path. This was more than I could
handle, so I went inside and sat again. Meanwhile, they
continued parading in groups along the path thinking it all
great fun.
Afterwards, I was able to come to an
understanding with their 'Chief' (Poo Phayah, or district
headman). We agreed that trailing behind me wasn't proper and
that if they wanted to make merit then whenever they saw me
out doing walking meditation they should 'peu' (join
their hands in the gesture of respect). That would certainly
be meritorious. From then on, whenever they saw me going out
to do walking meditation, they would all approach and standing
together in a line 'peu'. Anyone missing would be
called out to come and join the group.
On reflection, one couldn't help feeling
sympathetic towards these forest people, who, though living
far from material civilisation, were so honest and upright. In
those days no one had come up to assist and teach them for
decades, and — unless some serious crime had been committed —
no government officials would ever show their faces up there.
They were self-governing and strictly trusted and relied on
their 'Chief'. Those bad characters who were trouble-makers
and stubbornly ignored their Chief's admonition, were expelled
from the village by the Chief. If the perpetrator refused to
go, the villagers would all move away from him. You can be
assured that nothing like stealing and thievery existed.
Whenever I was walking through these
mountain ranges and saw one or two isolated houses, I could
immediately surmise that I wouldn't be able to stay with so
few people.134
The hill tribes in this region lacked sufficient rice after
two successively bad harvests. There were twelve houses in the
village where I was staying but only three of them had enough
rice to eat. Yet they all had such a lot of faith. When I came
on alms round only three people would come out to put food
into my bowl, but each one gave so much that it was sufficient
for me to eat.
Sometime later the Chief came to see me and
explained that everyone had faith and wished to offer food on
my alms round, but they were embarrassed because they had no
rice to give.135
They had to eat boiled yams and tubers136
instead of rice. I felt sorry for them and since I rather
liked steamed yams myself, I told him so. I said that that was
why I was able to come up to live with them — if I hadn't
liked them, I wouldn't have come. Once they all knew about
this, they dug up wild yams to steam and offer into my bowl,
which was consequently filled everyday. They also were
delighted with the idea, laughing and smiling, their faces lit
up in an endearing way. They did though, remain apprehensive
that I wouldn't be able to eat their yams and so they followed
me back to my hut to see for themselves. Having received their
gifts I was determined to show my appreciation by letting them
see me eat them.
That year the rice crop had been sown but
poor rainfall had caused the seedlings to shrivel and turn a
pale yellow. The villagers built my hut ten days before the
beginning of the Rains Retreat and when it was completed,
astonishingly, the rain started to pour down. They were all
overjoyed, absolutely delighted to think that it was the
result of the merit they had made in building a 'monastery'
for me to stay in. The rice was transformed by the rain into a
lush green, splendid crop. Their rice fields that year
produced so much that they couldn't use it all and some of
them were even able to sell the surplus.
Apparently no monks had previously spent
the Rains Retreat with the Moo-ser hill tribes people, so that
I may possibly have been the first monk in Thailand to have
done so.
When they had completed the construction of
my hut, I recalled that in the 'Life of the Buddha', Venerable
Phra Siddhattha had been thirty five years old when his
strivings had come to fruition in his Awakening. That year, I
too would be thirty five years old, (having gone forth as a
monk when I was entering my twenty-second year). I therefore
resolved that I would offer my strivings in meditation during
that year to pay homage to the Enlightenment of the Lord
Buddha:
'I will wholeheartedly accept whatever
way my meditation practice leads, even if my life should be
lost because of it. May this life of mine be offered, as one
would offer a lotus flower, in worship of him.'
Having made this resolution, I applied
myself to my meditation throughout the Rains Retreat. Yet it
didn't seem to be progressing and remained firmly as it was
before. To bring it up to the level of my resolution, I
decided to put myself through a trial by fasting for five
days.
The Moo-ser had never seen such a thing and
were afraid I would die. They came and pleaded with me to
partake of food as usual, but I refused and continued for the
full five days in accordance with my pledge. They took it in
turns surreptitiously to come and watch over me. If I closed
my door to sit in meditation inside the room they would call
out and ask me to reply, and only when I answered would they
leave.
Actually, fasting is not the pathway to
Enlightenment. The Lord Buddha had already tried this method
and subsequently said that it was more like
self-mortification.137
All my meditation teachers had repeated that. Having already
tried it for myself, I knew that it was merely a technique for
tormenting the body, without leading to the arising of the
wisdom to explore Dhamma and sharpen one's understanding. I
had fasted as a test of my will-power, to see which was
stronger — my attachment to life or my faith in the Dhamma
qualities that I had already seen. When I had come to the
truth within my own heart about this, I returned to eating as
before. Yet I didn't take any rice for the first four or five
days, eating just steamed yams and taro.138
When the Moo-ser saw that I was taking food again, they were
all delighted.
During the Rains Retreat, some visions (nimit')
arose in my meditation pointing to the strength and firmness
of my meditation procedures. This brought me great
satisfaction and contentment.
The Moo-ser would rejoice and boast that:
"Your being with us is very good. Our hill-rice fields have
produced a bumper harvest; some people will even be able to
sell cattle" — (they graze them but don't use them as beasts
of burden) — "which they have never managed to do before."
(Usually raising pigs for sale provided the regular family
income.) "Dried chili-peppers are another income source for
us, but apart from these items we have no other means of
making money. This year we have more than enough money and can
put some aside. You came and taught us not to gamble and play
pai, too-ah and be-er,139
so we have stopped. Previously, groups of townspeople would
come up and dupe us into gambling with them, but now we've
accepted your teachings and don't play any more."
At the end of the Rains Retreat, the Chief
personally came to offer a tort phah pah140
from himself and gave a length of white cloth for robe
material.
I had to bid farewell to the Moo-ser people
so that I could go down to pay my respects to Ven. Ajahn Mun
who was at the village of Toong Ma-khao, in the district of
Maer Pung. They were all much grieved at my departure and
began crying and pleading with me to return. I was still
undecided so I told them I would first see what my Ajahn had
to say. Perhaps I would then come back.
When I reached Ven. Ajahn Mun and related
to him all what had happened while I had been living with the
Moo-ser, he was pleased and suggested that we went back there.
For the return trip all three of us — Ven. Ajahn Mun,
Venerable Ornsee and I — went in a group together. However,
when it came time to start climbing, Venerable Ornsee became
ill so we told him to wait down below to recuperate first.
22. Fourteenth Rains Retreat, 1936
The Same Location with Three Monks
Returning to stay with the Moo-ser people
this time made me feel somewhat uneasy because they were now
more intimately acquainted with me than with Ven. Ajahn Mun.
Moreover, Ven. Ajahn Mun found it difficult to adjust to cold
weather. Coming up into the colder atmosphere had affected his
health so badly that it appeared that he could probably not
stay on. But through his strength of mind and fighting spirit,
he was able to overcome this and spend the whole of the Rains
Retreat there.
This time around, my meditation went very
well because besides being able to use my own techniques, I
now also had those of the Ven. Ajahn and I was able to learn
from him all the time. Close to the start of the Rains Retreat
the Ven. Ajahn sent me down to bring Ven. Ornsee back up to be
with us. I was away for five nights and that left the Ven.
Ajahn by himself. It was during this period of solitude that
he strove in his meditation with absolute and fearless
determination and achieved outstanding results. His illness
also completely disappeared at the same time.
During this Rains Retreat period the three
of us were all resolute in our meditation practice, each of us
striving to the limit of our individual ability. We were all
so attuned to each other that any happenings — whether
concerning external things or connected with the understanding
of Dhamma — that occurred to one of us, would seem to be known
to all. It was during this Rains Retreat that Ven. Ajahn Mun
foretold how long his life would last and this subsequently
proved to be accurate.
Sometimes, he would bring forward the
visions and 'knowledge' that had spontaneously arisen within
his meditation as predictions about various things concerning
certain of his disciples. Yet he would add that one must not
blindly believe all such things, for they could be wrong. As
for me, I maintained a balanced mind concerning the things he
said about me because I understood that such things were very
much an individual affair, each case being different. They
should not be the ultimate aim and purpose of one who truly
practices meditation. That should be rather the total
eradication of the defilements.
This Rains Retreat saw Ven. Ajahn Mun teach
us using 'canny' and shrewd means, as well as his various
subtle and skillful techniques. I had never seen him do
anything like this before. I immediately carried out his
teachings in every respect and so quickly that he once
exclaimed to no one in particular, that: "This Venerable Thate
is hasty and impetuous!".141
Ven. Ajahn Mun frankly opened up his true
character to us and I can only count my great good fortune to
have been under the guidance of a Meditation Master who taught
in such a way. I think it would be difficult to find any other
times when he could train his disciples in this way. The
appropriate conditions of the people involved, the place and
the time could never again be quite so conducive. Although he
might have given his blessing and encouragement for me to
become an heir to his Dhamma, I have never been heedless and
complacently accepted it. I always held that what is true
remains true, whatever one might say. One can't go beyond the
true state of things.
22.1 About the Forest People Entering the
Village
During this Rains Retreat I came across a
tribe of forest people who were known as the Yellow Leaf
Spirits.142
They themselves resented this name and asked that it not be
used for they said that they too were afraid of spirits
and it was better to call them 'forest people'.
The Moo-ser people said that although they
had lived in that place for over fifty years, they had never
seen this tribe come near them. They were considered a tribe
of 'ancient' Thais, and their language and accent sounded very
similar to what I had heard when talking with the people from
the towns of Yong and Ruang, located to the north of Chiang
Dtoong.143
These townspeople had migrated southwards and settled down in
Chiang Mai Province. They had made their living as
wicker-workers, weaving trays144
known as kern trays (because they are the handiwork of
the Kern Tribe). They had told me about these forest
people, relating how originally the tribe had consisted of
about sixty but smallpox had later killed some of them. At
that time, only about thirty men and women remained. I can
offer here some brief, collected notes about their way of
life:
Their existence didn't rely on any
permanent settlement. They cut a few small tree trunks to act
as posts, then covered those with branches, leaves and
whatever they could find. It was enough to sleep in and find
some shelter from rain and dew. Sometimes they would sleep in
caves or under rock overhangs or trees. The base of a tree
sufficed for them even if it offered only a little shelter.
These forest people had no clothing except
a few items that they had solicited for covering their
nakedness when they entered a village.145
They lived together in groups and were afraid of spirits and
tigers. Once they were in their shelters, other people rarely
noticed them. If by chance they were seen, the women folk had
to run away and if they weren't fast enough they would drop to
the ground and roll away. Any men of the tribe would
immediately come out with their spears to fight. (I think this
all happened because of the women's lack of clothes.) They
believed it was so inauspicious for a woman to see a stranger
that it would end with her being eaten by a tiger.
The tribe would stay for a long time
wherever there was a plentiful food supply but once the food
ran out they would migrate elsewhere. That is why they were
known as the Yellow Leaf Spirits, for when the leaves covering
their shelters turned yellow they would move on.
Their food and diet were based on
animal meat, wild forest yams and tubers, and honey from wild
bee hives. They wouldn't eat certain species of animals —
snakes for example — and meat had to be cooked or roasted in
the fire before it could be eaten.146
Rice or wheat did not make up their staple food unlike
ordinary people. If they collected honey, they would first mix
it with rotted wood pulp or earth to give it some solidity
before eating it.
They lit their fires by striking a piece of
iron against a stone — (what we call the 'hunter's flint') —
otherwise, they would rub two sticks together. I gave them a
box of matches but they were afraid to use them because of the
sudden ignition and hissing flare when struck.
Their way of hunting used spears,
the ends of which were poisoned (with toxic sap).147
These forest people would stealthily follow any animal tracks
they had observed until they saw the animal lying down for its
day-rest. Then they would stalk in closer and hurl their
spears directly at it. If the animal they sighted was still
foraging for food, they would stealthily find cover and creep
in as close as possible before sending their spears arching up
through the air to fall on their prey.
They said that within a range of twenty to
thirty metres, they could be sure of their meal. A superficial
penetration of the spear meant they could eat the meat but if
it went in more than one inch all the meat would become
contaminated by the poison and be rendered inedible.
They once came and offered us some of their
meat. It had an offensive, rank smell arising from the smoke
where it had been roasted. They put it in the fork of some
tree branches about ten metres away and its rank and putrid
smell almost kept us awake the whole night. Ven. Ajahn Mun
told the Moo-ser to take it and try boiling it, but nearly
half of it proved to be dirt and so it couldn't be eaten.
Their tradition and customs were
based in the forest and they never really left it. The only
time people ever caught sight of them was when they ventured
out to ask for clothing, rice, salt or iron for their flints.
The ancestors of this tribe, as I understand it, were probably
fugitives148
who had long ago fled from their lords and masters into the
jungle. We may deduce this from their taboo against crossing
any open areas or cultivated fields. No matter how wide the
fields or how difficult the route around, they would avoid and
bypass any signs of habitation or agriculture — even though
nobody had actually forbidden them from crossing. This shows
how the tribal elders had misled them away from going into
open areas, being afraid that someone would spot and take
them.
This also applies to what I've already said
about the women — that if they should catch sight of any
stranger a tiger would eat them. When the men came in to ask
for rice, wheat or yams and taro, they would immediately eat
everything without leaving any. I told them to take some back
to share with their women folk. However, they replied that
they couldn't do such a thing, for if the women ate such foods
they would become addicted to the taste and be spoilt.
Whenever they came among the Moo-ser their
behavior betrayed their inherent fear of strangers, especially
of important people or officials. They walked slowly and
cautiously, always wary and alert in a quite pitiful way.
However, when they entered the jungle they became so swift and
agile that following them was difficult for the eye. All one
would see and hear were the stirring and rustling of the
leaves.
Their marriage customs gave
individual freedom to both the women and the men. For example,
as elsewhere, it was common that when a man had good luck and
was prospering through successfully bringing in meat and food,
any woman attracted to him would go and stay with him and
become his partner. I forgot to ask whether there was any
dowry involved. The raising of children was the sole
responsibility of the woman.
They had come to see me sometimes. I then
had an opportunity to question them about many aspects of
their lifestyle and so was able to develop a good
understanding about them. Whenever I saw these forest people,
I felt sympathy and pity because they were also of the same
Thai tribe. I could understand every word of their
conversation and their physical features were the same as ours
in every way. The thought arose deep down in me to find some
way to help them to become established in some stable
livelihood, or at least to assist them to reach the
subsistence level of the Moo-ser and the other hill tribes up
in the mountains. If they were willing to receive assistance,
I intended to inform the appropriate Government authorities so
that they could bring in aid such as tools and supplies —
including everything all the way to seedlings and seeds.
When they later came to see me, I sounded
them out: "What do you think of the rice, the maize, the taro,
the chili and the salt that you have been given to eat? Was it
delicious?". "Yes," they replied, "it was all very tasty".
"So," I continued, "if that is the case, why don't you come
and make a settlement like these Moo-ser people. You could
then plant rice and taro for your own consumption — wouldn't
that be good?".
That was as far as I got, for they
immediately started to protest that they were a forest people
and that they couldn't do such a thing. If they did 'the
ground would be turned upside down'. (This is an old
fashioned expression indicating absolute opposition and
disagreement. Their meaning being that such an idea was
impossible. If it were to come to pass then the underside of
the earth would be flipped over on to the top.) When I heard
these objections, all my aid plans and projects ceased right
there.
What a shame. Although these people were
endowed with priceless humanity, they were unable to take full
advantage of it because of their birth in an unsuitable
environment. More to be pitied though are some of the people
born in an affluent and pleasant environment. They have
everything, including education opportunities, yet heedlessly
lose themselves through indulgence in pleasures that are
without real substance. Meanwhile time consumes their life so
that it isn't used for anything worthwhile. There are so many
people like this.
In this Rains Retreat, Ven. Ajahn Mun not
only foretold various things but also spoke of the
responsibility he would have to shoulder concerning the group
of Kammatthaana forest monks. He spoke of establishing
a meditation monastery in the Chiang Mai area and asked if I
had any suggestions to offer. I was delighted to hear that he
was thinking of resuming responsibility for our group. So I
remarked that the people of the Northeast of Thailand were
more suited to Dhamma practice than the people of other
regions. This was especially so, I pointed out, in this
Northern region where the results had been minimal.
"Look," I said, "Venerable Ajahn has been
in this region for seven or eight years now but who has left
their home to follow you and the way of practice? Those who do
follow you are all, without exception, your old disciples from
the Northeast. At this very moment the people there, both
monks and lay people — including Ven. Chao Khun Dhammachedi —
are always yearning for you. Everyone pleaded with me to come
and invite Ven. Ajahn to return to the Northeast. They are
happy to make all the necessary travel arrangements and said
that all I had to do was to tell them what was required."
Ven. Ajahn Mun then recalled a mountain
range towards Nah Kaer District of Sakhon Nakorn Province that
would certainly make a good and suitable place to stay. He
favored those sort of mountains and so declared that it would
be the place for us all to go. But he also said that it would
have to be my job to act as 'doorkeeper' for him. If someone
came to visit him whom I considered unsuitable, he told me
that I was not to allow them in to see him.
After the Rains Retreat, Ven. Ajahn Mun
went down to the district of Phrao again. (Where, my friends
later explained to me, he had also mentioned his plans to the
group of monks there.) For our part, Ven. Ornsee and I had
requested permission to remain in that area to continue our
meditation efforts to our heart's content. Not many days later
Ven. Ajahn Mun returned, bringing Ven. Ajahn Sahn, Ven. Ajahn
Waen and Ven. Ajahn Khao up to see us. He mentioned again
about establishing a meditation monastery for the group and I
maintained my previous opinion that I didn't agree with it
being set up in the North. Nevertheless, if Ven. Ajahn did go
ahead and establish something in this region, after three
years I would come and wholeheartedly help. Ven. Ajahn Mun and
his group stayed with us for two nights before departing, with
Ven. Ajahn Sahn, Ven. Ajahn Waen and Ven. Ajahn Khao returning
to Phrao. Meanwhile, Ven. Ajahn Mun and Ven. Manoo went off
towards Maer Sai District of Chiang Rai Province, where they
eventually spent the coming Rains Retreat.
Venerable Ornsee and I remained meditating in that place
until everybody had gone, then we also went our separate ways.
Ven. Ornsee staying on there while I went over to another
mountain.
22.2 The Latent Tendencies and Defilements
of the Heart
What I am about to relate makes me feel
quite embarrassed but it will put even greater shame on the
defilements. What was it? Well, it happened when I left Ven.
Ornsee and went off to stay alone. One day I heard a tiger
roar and became so terrified by its noise that I began to
tremble and shake so much that I couldn't sleep and my
meditation wouldn't settle down at all. Some local people
helped to chase it away by firing threatening shots with their
guns and by hurling firebrands at it. It fled for a moment but
then came back again. In the early morning, when the villagers
were going out to work in the fields, they would sometimes
spot the tiger crouching in the jungle ahead of them. They
would then run away — although I never heard that it had done
any harm to anyone.
No matter how I tried to sit in meditation,
it just didn't seem to come together. At that point I was
still unaware that it was all to do with my fear of the tiger.
My whole body would be soaked in sweat. "Hey!", I thought,
"what's all this about then? I'm cold and yet I'm still
sweating". I tried removing the blanket wrapped around me and
saw that I was still trembling. I felt exhausted with not
being able to progress with my meditation. Then I thought of
lying down to rest a little and refresh myself, ready for
future efforts. At that very moment, I heard the tiger roar
out and my whole body started shivering and shaking, as if I
had a malarial fever. It was then I realized that this was all
due to my fear of the tiger's roar.
I sat up and established mindfulness,
settling the mind in stillness on a single object and ready to
sacrifice my life. Hadn't I already accepted death? Wasn't
that the reason for my coming to live here? Aren't tiger and
human both a fabrication of the same four elements? After
death, won't both end in the same condition? Who eats whom —
who is the one who dies and who is the one that doesn't die?
When I was willing to relinquish and investigate in this
dauntless, single-minded way, I could no longer hear the noise
of the tiger.
Whenever I afterwards heard the tiger's
roar, my mind remained quite unconcerned. I now saw it just as
air reverberating from a material form, causing sound. Ever
since childhood, I had had a natural tendency to be easily
upset, being of a rather nervous disposition. The sound of the
tiger had brought up some past conditioning that had caused my
unconscious fear.
It is these latent defilements149
lying submerged in the depths of the heart that are so
extremely difficult to dispose of. To conquer the defilements
is absolutely impossible without a willingness to relinquish
one's attachment and grasping for these conditioned things.
There has to be an exchange of things wholly devoid of value
for the taste of the deathless — that is only found within the
heart. Although Venerable Sariputta, the right-hand disciple
of the Lord Buddha, could abandon these things when he became
an arahant, his character traits150
remained — unlike the Fully Enlightened Buddha.151
During this period, when I was fearlessly
pressing forward with my practice, something disagreeable came
up as a meditation vision. It's something that should be
revealed to my readers so that some of the shameful tendencies
of the defilements can be exposed. Recognition of the harm of
this type of defilement might then perhaps serve as a caution
for their future restraint.
The image that appeared was that of a
middle-aged woman, someone whom I well remembered from about
five or six years previously. She had then been a lay
supporter of mine, full of faith and sincere intentions. I
considered her a good person, a person of Dhamma, courteous
and refined, someone suitable for me to be associated with and
a fine example of a genuine upaasikaa152
of the Buddhist Teachings. Her physical appearance was rather
ordinary, or so it seemed to me. Apart from that, I had never
given her much thought except recalling her kind support to me
as a monk — for a monk lives dependent on others.
When the image appeared in my meditation,
she seemed to be sitting close to me on my right, in a rather
familiar way. There then arose in my heart a spontaneous
feeling as if the two of us had been living closely together
for what seemed like decades. Yet there was no lust or desire
involved in it. This shocked me. I withdrew from meditation
and examined my heart but I couldn't detect any feelings of
attachment towards her. Furthermore, I hadn't given her a
moment's thought over the previous five or six years. Why then
should I have such a vision?
After a more thorough investigation, I came
to understand the nature of the latent defilement of
sensuality (kaama-kilesaanusaya). This lies deeply
submerged in the 'ocean bed', beyond the reach and
understanding of the negligent person.
— A person possessing wisdom but lacking
faith, energy and dauntless perseverance, will be incapable of
searching out and confronting it.
— A person possessing faith, energy, and
dauntless perseverance but lacking wisdom, will still be
incapable of eliminating it.
— A person possessing faith, energy and
dauntless perseverance together with wisdom; and someone who
develops meditation by steadily cultivating those virtuous
qualities without lapses will be able totally to eliminate the
latent tendencies.
I then proceeded to reflect further about
those meditators who had successfully achieved all the
absorptions153
yet could still be deceived and fall down badly because of the
defilements of sensuality and lust. They take the sort of
vision that I have just mentioned as genuine, as truly
signifying that they had been husband and wife in a previous
life.154
This leads to the arising of tenderness and affection, sexual
excitement and desire that develop as is their wont into the
searching out of that 'vision'. There is then a meeting and a
frank telling of what should not be revealed. The twin live
wires already run side by side and if some metal object comes
too close it has to be attracted and pulled in. They make
contact and that is why it's possible for so many meditators,
particularly monks — sometimes they have even been senior
Teachers — to fall into the abyss. On seeing such a vision,
instead of being alarmed and seeing it as a threat and danger
— and therefore arming themselves for victory over it — they
submit and ally themselves with it. What a waste!
The Lord Buddha recounted how human beings
and animals born into this world, one and all, have been
mothers and fathers, sisters and brothers, husbands and wives.
They have all been relatives to one another — in one or
another birth. Perhaps even the poultry and pork that we eat
might be the flesh of our father or mother from a previous
birth. We still have defilements and so are liable to die and
take birth, to die and be born through countless lives. Yet
what sort of case is it when a seductive vision arises just
once, and one is lured away and goes after it.
Well, now that we have already exposed and
shamed Maara,155
the defilements, I would like to relate another instance. This
concerns an attractive young woman. She and her parents and
relatives held me in deep regard and I tried to help by
advising and instructing her in morality and virtue. I
particularly wanted her to see the hazard inherent in the
feminine condition and to keep to the brahmacariya
precepts all her life. Yet events didn't turn out that way for
instead she went and lost her virginity in a very unfortunate
way. When she came to her senses, she was overwhelmed by
tearful remorse. I happened to hear about this and felt a deep
weariness with all such gullibility and credulousness.
Afterwards, she both respected me and felt ashamed before me.
All I could think of was: 'how could things have come to this
pass?'. Looking at her, I felt that although her form might
appear human, her mind-state was that of an animal. The more I
thought about it, the more it made me feel sick and tired
about her and the whole matter — almost to the point of
nausea. This state of mind persisted for many years afterwards
and that nauseous feeling would arise whenever I recalled the
incident. There was such a strong feeling of weariness — I had
never felt anything quite so deeply before — yet it certainly
was not the correct way of practice. However, that had
all happened in the past.
Afterwards, I came to reflect on the harm
of sensuality, pondering the extent of its fierce severity.
When it arises in the underlying personality of anyone it can
vent its power and devour its victim. This may happen
regardless of whether the person has moral principles or is
delinquent, or whether they are seasoned meditators who have
reached the highest levels of absorption. The only exceptions
being the Lord Buddha and the arahants. Sensuality is
totally lacking kindness or consideration, being like a tiger
pouncing on a defenceless puppy and cold-bloodedly consuming
it.
This made me feel a lot more sensitive and
open towards that young woman. She had always had wholesome
intentions, had hoped to be good yet passion can be so very
destructive. It pounces without caring whom its victim is. It
is this sensual desire that must bear so much of the blame and
is unforgivable. This increased my sympathy and compassion for
her.
Those who are still sunk in the depths of
the flood of sensual desires must come to birth in the sensual
realm. This sensual realm or sphere is a place to develop
spiritual virtues.156
For those who want to progress in the way of the heart it is
the field of battle where one can fight for victory. While for
miscreants, it can become their graveyard.
The sensual realm or plane of existence is
endowed with a full complement of natural resources, and all
the outer and the inner ones are complete. Persons of wisdom
can take advantage of this in whatever way they want. If there
are no trees in the forest, where will one go to find herbal
medicines? If there are no doctors then such medicines remain
useless. If there are medicine and doctor, but the sick
patient refuses treatment or will not take the prescription,
they cannot cure their illness.
Those who see any 'worth'157
in the sphere of sensuality and engross themselves in its
array of sensual delights are called 'worthies of sensuality'.158
Those whom the poison of sensuality has infected and are aware
of its virulence are called 'handicapped by sensuality' (Kaama-tote).
Those who have totally relinquished all sensuality are called
'freed from sensuality'.159
Returning to where I had stayed before, I
exchanged places with Ven. Ornsee. It was then that I really
did have quite an encounter with a tiger. One night a tiger
came and pounced on and began to eat a water buffalo close by
my hut. I tried to drive it away by striking a bamboo160
and shouting loudly but the tiger would have none of it. It
refused to let go of its prey and succeeded in dragging it
away to eat. This time I was not afraid but I didn't dare
leave my hut and go over to aid the water buffalo in case the
tiger decided to gobble up a man too.
As the two of us had spent enough time
meditating in that place, we moved on to other Moo-ser
villages scattered along those mountains. After we had spent
some time introducing them to Dhamma and inspiring them with
faith, we returned down to the district of Phrao. Then we
looked around the region of Chiang Dao before returning to
Maer Dtaeng District.
23. Fifteenth Rains Retreat, 1937
Bahn Pong in Maer Dtaeng District
The small forest monastery at Pong Village
was where Ven. Ajahn Mun had once stayed for the Rains
Retreat. Ven. Chao Khun Phra Upaaliigu.nuupamaacaariya (Chan
Siricando) had also spent some time there. The lay people of
this village were quite clever and had a reasonably good
understanding of Dhamma. That year's Rains saw five of us
staying there: Ven. Ajahn Boon-tham, Venerable Kheung, a monk
from Loei Province (whose name I can't recall), Ven. Ajahn
Chorp and myself. I was the head monk and so had to choose
suitably skillful means to use in my Dhamma talks to the group
so that they would gain a solid basis for their future
individual Dhamma practice.
In this group it was Ven. Ajahn Chorp who
was the most strict in his dhuta.nga161
practices. While including all the monks gathered for that
Rains Retreat it would be difficult to find a better group of
Dhamma companions (Kalyaa.na-mitta). I gave a Dhamma
talk almost every night and throughout the instruction my
companions would willingly listen with calm and attentive
minds. Afterwards, I would give them an opportunity to bring
up any questions or problems and to air whatever views they
had. Besides Ven. Ajahn Chorp, Ven. Kheung was particularly
gifted in the faculty of knowing another person's mind (Parassa
ceto-pariyañaa.na). If something was preoccupying anyone's
mind or if someone had committed any breach of the monastic
Rule, one of these two monks would detect it.
In our group, the monk whom I felt most
sorry for was Ven. Ajahn Boon-tham (from Surin Province). He
had been a monk for many years but still couldn't meditate
very well. Ven. Ajahn Chorp and Venerable Kheung were able to
follow everything he was thinking and doing which concerned
matters in which he certainly shouldn't have been indulging.
Whenever his companions cautioned him about it, he would
readily admit his faults and would even humbly bow to them
even though they were his juniors. His feelings of inadequacy
and shame in front of the group went with his having missed
meeting Ven. Ajahn Mun — although he had once been a disciple
of Ven. Ajahn Singh. He really wanted to hear a sermon by Ven.
Ajahn Mun and believed that he was already knowledgeable
enough instantly to understand and gain insight into Dhamma. I
was continually warning him not to be presumptuous and to be
careful when he did come to meet and listen to Ven. Ajahn
Mun's Dhamma talk. His overconfidence might make him
unreceptive and cause him to feel negative towards the
Venerable Ajahn.
After the Rains Retreat was over, Ven.
Ajahn Mun returned to visit us again and Ven. Ajahn Boon-tham
was able to listen to a Dhamma talk. That was all it took, for
regrettably it had the opposite effect to what he had expected
and he became dissatisfied with the methods of training
offered by Ven. Ajahn Mun. Later, perhaps because he felt so
let down, he deserted the group and went off wandering alone.
However, he met with misfortune and contracted cerebral
malaria. Ven. Ajahn Ree-an found him and helped to bear him
back to Chiang Mai where he died in the hospital, without any
relatives or disciples being around to help nurse him.
After staying to receive teachings from Ven.
Ajahn Mun for a suitable length of time, Venerable Kheung and
I took our leave to go off in search of solitude and secluded
places by following the Maer Dtaeng River upstream. We stayed
in a secluded spot near a mountain area of tea plantations. I
left Venerable Kheung to watch over our belongings in an
abandoned monastery at the foot of the mountain, while I
climbed the ridge to find a suitable place to stay above. It
happened that a young woman came strolling by flirting with
some local young men. Venerable Kheung saw this and he too
became intensely excited. When I came back down from my place
on the mountain and saw the state he was in I tried to counsel
him and recommended various ways he could use to still the
emotion — but without success.
I had had an intimation of such a
possibility ever since he had first come to stay with me. At
that time, he had told me about a vision that he had
experienced while staying with Ven. Ajahn Mun in Maer Suay
District. He said that hearing about me had inspired him so
much that he wished to meet me. He had then had a vision:
'A road appeared that led straight from him
to where I was. He made a trouble-free journey along the road
that ended right at the foot of the stairs leading to my hut.
He then seemed to catch hold of the stairs and started
climbing — they seemed extremely high — up to me. After bowing
to me three times, I offered him a complete set of robes but
he refused to accept them.'
It seemed that circumstances were beginning
to fit in with his vision. I also felt as if our sympathetic
association had reached its limit. That morning during the
meal, he had lost his temper with me over some insignificant
issue. By the evening, he had come to see me and admitted his
fault. He related his experience of the previous evening when
lust had overcome him at seeing the flirtatious young woman.
His meditation throughout the following night had not been
successful and he came to take his leave and go off wandering
alone.
About three months later, we met again and
I encouraged him to make a fresh start with his meditation:
"If you have enough determination, it's still possible for you
to succeed. Please, just have done with it and start afresh".
Nevertheless, he wouldn't accept this
advice and afterwards I learned with great regret that he had
disrobed. He was a strong-willed individual and did nothing in
half measures, but he was also very opinionated and even Ven.
Ajahn Mun's Dhamma talks didn't always convince him. He had
once been a 'tough guy' back in his home village before
ordaining and leaving without any real goal in mind. He
originally came from Nam Gam Village in the district of Taht
Panom.
The Six Higher Psychic Powers162
— one example being 'knowing the minds of other beings' — are
not something common to every person. They will not
necessarily arise in the practice of everyone who meditates.
With some people no matter how refined their mind becomes no
higher powers will arise. While other people meditate
and when the mind converges into momentary or access
concentration (kha.nika- or upacaara-samaadhi)
these powers develop.
Venerable Kheung was adept at training his
mind to enter tranquillity and he could remain in such a calm
state all day and night. While walking around in seemingly
quite an ordinary way, in his mind he would feel as if he were
walking on air. While at other times he might feel as if he
had penetrated into the interior of the earth. Although Ven.
Kheung's mind didn't withdraw from concentration he lacked the
wisdom to investigate the Three Characteristics.163
His powers were therefore only of the mundane sort, arising
out of mundane absorption.164
Let alone Ven. Kheung, just consider Venerable Devadatta165
who had been able to consult with Prince Ajaatasatthu by
flying in through the palace window — that is until his
abilities failed.
24. Sixteenth Rains Retreat, 1938
in Nong Doo Village,
Pah Sahng District, Lampoon Province
Nong Doo was a Mon166
village. The monks of the village seemed quite strict with
their keeping of the monastic Rule. However the villagers also
said that their abbot was supernaturally quite powerful.
Whenever the villagers went to a festival
or fair he would consecrate and empower some sesame seed oil
and give it to them to drink and rub on their bodies. This
would make them invulnerable to stabs and blows. When they
went to neighbouring village fairs, the other village folk
would have to watch out for them very carefully. The villagers
from Nong Doo were confident in their Abbot-teacher's power
and so started to consider themselves superior, without fear
of anyone else. The nearby villages gathered together, laid
out a plan and arming themselves to the teeth came en masse
to invest Nong Doo Village, intent on taking their revenge by
wiping it out. When the resident menfolk there realized what
was happening, they had taken to their heels and hid
themselves in the jungle to save their skins.
The Abbot-teacher was already eighty years
old when he was converted from such practices by the teachings
of a wandering meditation monk who stayed at his monastery.
Remarkably, he was able to gain some insight into the truth of
the Dhamma teachings of the Lord Buddha. He then felt such
faith in the meditation monk that he could give up his
conceited opinions and offer himself as a disciple of the
younger monk.
Later, the whole monastery supported by the
lay people, decided to change over to become part of the
Dhammayut' community. Somdet Phra Maha Virawong (Pim),
when he was still Phra Ñaanadilok and acting abbot of Wat
Chedi Luang in Chiang Mai, requested that I become the first
abbot of the re-established Wat Nong Doo with Ven. Palat Tong-sook
as deputy abbot. It was during this Rains Retreat that Ven.
Mahaa Kan learned to give his first sermon and taught Dhamma
studies.
I instructed the lay community during this
Rains Retreat. This inspired their faith so much that on the
Quarter Moon Days they came to the monastery to observe the
Eight Precepts in unprecedented numbers. Whole households
would lock up the house and come to observe the Eight Precepts
and spend the night in the monastery.
Traditionally, Mon young women were not
expected to observe the Eight Precepts. For the young men it
was the opposite. When the young men disrobed after their
temporary ordination, they would unfailingly continue to go
every week to the monastery and keep the Eight Precepts. These
people were really exemplary, for despite their far from easy
living conditions they were extremely devout. I also taught
them to establish themselves steadfastly in the Three Refuges167
and to abandon their wrong views and beliefs in
spirit-worship. Many agreed to this and willingly renounced
their Mon spirit worship and came to request the Three Refuges
instead. Unfortunately, after the Rains Retreat I had to leave
them and travel back to the Northeast so things had to be
suspended there.
Being a millionaire or a pauper does not
stand in the way of gaining the Noble Treasure of one endowed
with faith and wisdom. This is why this Noble Treasure
surpasses all other wealth.
25. Seventeenth to Twenty-fifth Rains
Retreats, 1939-47
in Wat Araññavaasee, Tah Bor, Nongkhai
Before leaving the North I went to pay my
respects to Ven. Ajahn Mun. He had spent the Rains Retreat at
Wat Chedi Luang in Chiang Mai, at the request of Somdet Phra
Maha Virawong. I again took the opportunity to invite him to
return to the Northeast, having already submitted one
invitation before the Retreat had started. He remarked that he
had also received a letter of invitation from Ven. Chao Khun
Dhammachedi. In fact, I had been the one who had written to
Ven. Chao Khun Dhammachedi suggesting that such an invitation
be sent. I had done this after sounding out Ven. Ajahn Mun and
sensing that there was a chance that he might be willing to
return. When I enquired again about his going back, he said
that he would go at the right time.
I then respectfully informed him of my own
plans to go back and took leave of him. I explained that I had
already been in the Northern region for quite a long time and
felt that however things might turn out, I would be able to
take care of myself. After writing another letter to Ven. Chao
Khun Dhammachedi explaining the situation, I set out.
This time they arranged for a boy to
accompany me on my journey, but Ven. Ornsee stayed behind with
Ven. Ajahn Mun. When I reached Tah Bor, in Nongkhai Province,
I was determined that the group of monks there be trained to
be rigorous and conscientious in their practice. However,
after attempting this for around three or four years the
results were only about 30 or 40 per cent of what they could
have been. Later they seemed even less.
I therefore turned more to integrating the
study aspects into the practice. Together with that, I also
led all the monks in the daily chanting, and afterwards we
would practice the rhythmic styles of both mokot-sangyok
and roy-gaaw chanting. We would regularly finish by
chanting the Patimokkha Rule and by that I was able to produce
many expert chanters. The benefits became so obvious that I
have continued this way of practice right up to the present.
After I had stayed two Rains Retreats in
Wat Araññavaasee — from 1941 to 1942 — I led the lay
supporters to build a small monastery on the western side of
Glahng Yai Village. It is now a permanent monastery and has
continued to have resident monks and novices through each
Rains Retreat. They have now named it Wat Nirodha-rangsee.
It was during this period that Ven. Chao
Khun Dhammachedi began to take a greater interest in
meditation practice and in Venerable Ajahn Mun. In truth, when
Ven. Chao Khun Dhammachedi was still a novice — before he had
gone off to Bangkok to study — he had been a disciple of Ven.
Ajahn Sao and Ven. Ajahn Mun. At that time, however, he had
shown no interest in the way of practice.
I think it was probably at the time of the
boundary-stone laying ceremony at Wat Bodhisomphorn168
that he became more closely acquainted with the two venerable
Ajahns. They so aroused his interest that he was always
questioning me about their way of practice and about their
character and qualities. He would sometimes ask me to give him
a sermon based on what I had heard from the two Ajahns. When I
recounted such teaching, he would silently listen with great
attention and respect.
Afterwards, Ven. Chao Khun Dhammachedi sent
Ven. Ajahn Oon Dhammadharo to Chiang Mai to invite Ven. Ajahn
Mun to return but without success. Ven. Ajahn Oon reported to
Ven. Ajahn Mun about his vegetarian practices and this
eventually led to quarreling and discord in the group. Ven.
Ajahn Mun said that none of the arahants had ever
quarreled over food and excrement, so why were those present
now doing so. Ven. Chao Khun Dhammachedi had to go to Bangkok
on Sangha affairs and when they were completed he carried on
to Chiang Mai and made the invitation himself. Ven. Ajahn Mun
said: "Hey, what's this, you've come with the 'big letter'".
(Meaning that he was making the invitation in person.)
I remained at Wat Araññavaasee in Tah Bor
for a period approaching nine years. This was a record for my
ordained life until then. I had never taken any interest in
building work because I considered it an interference and not
the task of a recluse. Thinking that one ordained should
rather concentrate all his energies on the duties of a
recluse.
When I arrived in Wat Araññavaasee I
realized that all the dwelling places there were an
inheritance from the previous generation of senior monks.
They had constructed them and we all lived in them.
I then reflected on those clauses in the monastic Rule where
permission is given to repair any existing dwelling places.
This led me to feel rather ashamed of myself, for I seemed to
have been so busy making use of these resources and merely
monitoring this heritage from the previous Teachers.
This was when I began to guide the lay
supporters in building projects and I've continued right up to
the present day. However, at no point have I gone out and
solicited donations for this work. I have always been
extremely sensitive about this — if the resources were
available the work went forward, if they weren't then we
simply stopped the work. I never allowed myself to become
bound to any project so that if it couldn't be finished or was
underfunded I could easily abandon it without any feelings of
attachment. While I was at Wat Araññavaasee I directed the lay
supporters in the construction of two new huts, a large study
hall and many other smaller structures.
Before this extended period at Wat
Araññavaasee, I can't remember ever staying anywhere longer
than three Rains Retreats. It may have been due to the long
period of my stay or perhaps for some other reason that my
neurological disorder recurred. However I still forced myself
to endure it so that those who wanted to study and practice
there were given a good opportunity.
In 1946, Venerable Gate (my elder brother)
came to spend the Rains Retreat with us. He died during the
Retreat from appendicitis. He had been ordained for fourteen
years and was forty-eight years old. Since his ordination —
(he was the next eldest to me) — we had never before stayed
together for a Rains Retreat. It now seems that our coming
together was not a good omen.
When he came, I wasn't giving many sermons
to the lay devotees and instead had them meditating quietly on
their own. My neurological disorder had grown so much worse
that after I took the Dhamma seat to give a sermon, I had no
idea what I was talking about — but I could still speak all
right. When I finished my sermon, I would ask the listening
lay people what I had been speaking about and whether it had
made sense. They answered that they could understand it very
well. It was just as it had always been.
One day I had a dream in which Venerable
Gate and I were walking on tudong together through the
jungle. We came to a stream and started following the stream
bed. The water wasn't very deep, only reaching our waists, yet
it didn't appear to wet our robes. I noticed how fresh the
water looked and felt like scooping it up in my hands to rinse
my mouth out. When I did take a mouthful, I gargled with it
and then spat it out — and all my teeth came out with the
water! Waking up, I thought that it had really happened. I had
to feel in my mouth before I knew it was only a dream.
I had never really believed in the absolute
truth of dreams.169
I thought that dreams occurred through our not attending to
the activities of the mind, so that it dithers when we fall
asleep and then trails after its preoccupations. If we were to
take care of the heart then there would be no dreaming. If
however we did dream, we would be aware of the dreaming though
we couldn't get up because the body remained still. When the
body was able to move again and could get up, the mind would
no longer be asleep. Dreaming would occur when the heart
wasn't asleep but was vacillating and dithering.
When I refused to believe in the dream, a
vision appeared to my inner sight (in the heart). As I've
mentioned above, I became ill about four or five days before
the full moon of the tenth lunar month, [around September]. It
was the time of the traditional festival of Khao Boon
Salahk-pat,170
and I was feeling so unwell that I couldn't stand up without
vomiting. I lay down with closed eyes and when I opened them
again I found myself gazing at the sky with clouds passing
across the sun. It hurt my eyes and I vomited.
It happened to be an Observance Day but I
couldn't manage to go and give a sermon so instead they
invited Venerable Gate. He gave a sermon for one and a half
hours. The people listening were quite amazed at this, not
expecting him to be able to do so much. The next morning my
nervous disorder seemed to have cleared up and I was invited
away to a meeting.
At around eleven o'clock in the morning,
someone came to tell me that Venerable Gate had stomach pains
and so I returned to the monastery. When I arrived, all I
could do was look at him, for we had no medicines and I didn't
know what else to do. More than ten years before he had been
ill with similar symptoms. Sometimes, if medicine were
available, he would take it and get better, while at other
times it seemed to clear up even without medicines. He had
once been ill for five days and nights at Nah Seedah Village
(our home village) without being able to lie down or eat. The
illness had then cleared up after he had used his finger to
remove three or four small lumps — I don't know what they were
— from his anus.
In those days modern-style doctoring had
yet to spread widely. If one's stomach was painful, one found
some stomachache pills to swallow. We didn't know anything
about the appendix. If the stomach pains came from food
poisoning or from fermentation and flatulence, they would
clear up. If they came from appendicitis they wouldn't, and
countless people died of it. This time Venerable Gate really
did have appendicitis — and we had no medicine.
The pain was almost beyond bearing so that
he was tossing about but I never heard him cry out. Finally,
he managed to get out a few words. He said that he certainly
wouldn't be able to carry on in that way. He thought that
trying some walking meditation might help so he asked us to
assist him up to the meditation path where he took about four
or five steps before collapsing. The monks and novices who
were attending him saw his condition and brought him back to
lie down where he had been before.
At that time I had begun to feel so weak
after caring for him for such an extended period that I had
asked leave from everyone to go and rest. A novice then came
to call me with news that Venerable Gate had become very weak
and fainted. I rushed to see and found that he was lying there
without speaking. Coming closer I reminded him of Dhamma and
asked if he could hear what I was saying. He replied that he
could and this continued until about eight o'clock that night,
when he died.
Venerable Gate had been a person of great
endurance in times of both sickness and health. It wasn't just
the one illness either, for he had also suffered from
appendicitis, kidney stones and malaria. Even when his
appendix became infected for many days, he neither complained
nor troubled anyone. He would quietly lie there alone. If he
were able to eat, he would eat, and if he couldn't he would
just continue quietly to lie there. He had always eaten only a
small amount and had never been fussy about food. Once he had
managed on plain rice and salt for more than ten days. All the
meditation teachers had praised his great qualities of
endurance.
After I had arranged his funeral and
finished the Rains Retreat of 1947, my mother also passed
away. That year had seen the whole village and town come down
with infected sores and ulcers and this included my mother who
had an ulcer on her shin. Those who were affected had gone for
treatment and were all cured except my mother. I fetched the
particular medicines that should have been effective in
treating her but the problem didn't clear up. The flesh
started festering and was suppurating so much that it fell
away exposing the bone. There was no pain however.
While my mother was ill in Nah Seedah
Village, Glahng Yai Subdistrict of Nongkhai, I had spent the
Rains Retreat in Tah Bor District of Nongkhai Province. The
block that had made me so incredulous about the validity of my
dream abruptly cleared up. The morning after dreaming that all
my teeth had fallen out I felt certain that I would have some
traveling to do that day. I returned from my alms round and
saw someone waiting for me with news that my mother's
condition had seriously deteriorated.
Those who mark dreams down as unbelievable,
useless affairs — well, they can think what they want. But I
accept them with 100 percent certainty. If one dreams that
one's teeth fall out then it definitely means that one's
father or mother or one of one's brothers or sisters is very
ill or has died. It might otherwise relate to a very close
friend or acquaintance.
I nursed my mother as much as I could with
both spiritual medicine171
and with medication but her body was already extremely aged.
She was eighty-two years old. Whatever medicine we brought no
longer seemed to help for she could no longer take it and her
condition continued to deteriorate. This went on until things
could no longer hold together and just as an old brown leaf
falls, she withered away and sank. Nevertheless, I ministered
to her heart and mind, supporting her mindfulness and settling
her in full tranquillity right up to the final moment, when
little breath remained.
I thus fulfilled the obligations necessary
for an ideal son. When her condition had still been stable,
she had always thought of me as an adviser. She would consult
me if she wanted for anything or if she had any problems, and
would adopt any opinion I offered. When she was unwell, I had
supported her mindfulness so that sometimes she wouldn't need
to take any other medicine. She had often recovered through
her trust and faith in my teaching. It was the same when she
was approaching death and perhaps it was due to this that the
wound in her leg was not painful.
26. Twenty-sixth and Twenty-seventh Rains
Retreat, 1948-1949,
Khao Noi, Tah Chalaep, Chantaburi Province
I had experienced a vision of this mountain
while staying in Wat Araññavasee, Tah Bor but it was still
very different from my expectations. For a start it was hardly
credible as a place of solitude, for it was just a small hill
in the middle of fields, with villages clustered all around
its base. However, it was amazing how anyone who went there
for meditation practice — whether monk, novice or villager —
would achieve remarkable results. These would be great or
small depending on the basic ability of the person.
The strangest case was that of one old man,
more than seventy years old, who with his penchant for
drinking liquor all day had been left so destitute that he was
dependent on the villagers. They would hire him at fifty
baht a month to attend on the resident monks, but he
wasn't very willing. When I was there, he found such faith
that it was no longer necessary to hire him to do the job.
Such a wonderful vision had arisen in his meditation that he
gave up all alcohol and was even able to take on the Eight
Precepts on Observance days. The villagers became so impressed
with him that he could go into any house or shop and receive a
free meal. This made him even more aware of the benefits of
his practice and he continued his attendance on the monks.
Even stranger was the case of a mute person
of Tah Chalaep who was also forced to be dependent on the
village. I had taught him by sign language to observe the
Eight Precepts on the Observance Day and to meditate. This
eventually became so wonderfully meaningful to him that he
taught other people by sign language to see the harm of
drinking alcohol. While meditating at home his mind would
become so bright that he was able to view me in the monastery.
I've recently heard that this person is alive and has built a
monastery by himself, invited monks to stay there and attends
on them himself.
For myself, things were also amazing. I was
searching out Dhamma that I never could have conceived of, and
comprehending Dhamma that I had never known before. The ways
and means of the practice were clarified in precise detail, so
that I felt confident enough to compose my first book:
Illuminating the Way of Calm and Insight.
Following my original plans, I continued
practicing there for two Rains Retreats. After the end of the
second Rains Retreat came news of Ven. Ajahn Mun's illness and
I left, full of appreciation for the virtues of this small
hill. I went to attend on Ven. Ajahn Mun through his last
illness until his passing away. After his cremation had been
completed, I never found an opportunity to return to Khao Noi
even though the people there had offered me such outstanding
support. I sent other monks to go in my place because my own
plans were still uncertain.
26.1 Concerns for a Worrier
After the cremation ceremony for Ven. Ajahn
Mun was over, I pondered on the situation of our group of
meditation monks. Until then, we had only been a small group
and among people in general still not well known. We had had
backing and support from some highly placed elders. For
example, Ven. Chao Khun Phra Upaaliigu.nuupamaacaariya (Chan
Siricando) had always come up to assist us. He had taken it
upon himself to deal with any issue involving Sangha affairs
that affected us. When he died, it was Somdet Phra Maha
Virawong (Tisso Oo-an) who looked after this. After he died,
Ven. Ajahn Mun Bhuuridatta Thera was already well known and
widely respected among the ecclesiastical hierarchy. Then, Ven.
Ajahn Mun himself passed away and the group seemed to be left
alone.
The senior ecclesiastical elders neither
knew many monks of our group nor did they seem likely to take
on obligations about us. Later, in fact, monks who were
disciples of Ven. Ajahn Mun did steadily become more widely
known. (However, at that time I didn't anticipate that some of
our remaining senior monks were to become such respected
elders of outstanding ability. Therefore, my concerns were
probably not very well thought out.)
Such concerns caused me to travel to
Bangkok, for should the right occasion present itself, I would
be able to construct some bridges with the elders of the
ecclesiastical hierarchy. I could listen to their rulings and
strategies and get to know their opinions about our group. I
set out and stayed at Wat Bahn Jik in Udorn. Then I came to
stay with Ven. Ajahn Orn Ñaa.nasiri at Wat Tip'rat' in Udorn.
He was obviously under the impression that I was deserting our
group and going off alone. I had to explain all the facts
before he understood my intentions. During the next Rains
Retreat I heard that he had gone off to spend the Retreat in
Khao Yoi Cave in Phetburi Province, so I'm not sure what
interpretation he had put on my words.
When I reached Bangkok I had the chance to
go and pay my respects to many ecclesiastical elders and could
learn the attitude of each towards our group of meditation
monks. This allowed me to feel quite confident towards the
group's position and my own.
I wanted to go and look over some of the
famous places of meditation practice, for example, those of
Rahtburi and Phetburi. I therefore traveled around those
places, requesting permission to stay a while and learn from
each, before eventually reaching Songkla Province.
At that time, Ven. Khun Siri-tejodom (Ampan)
— who had once been a district officer and then had stayed
with me — had gone down to Phuket and Phang-nga where he had
been spreading Dhamma and the way of practice. He had later
been joined in this propagating by Ven. Mahaa Pin Jalito172
(Ven. Phra Khru Virotdhammajahn) who was a native of Nakorn
Patom. However, he did not belong to our group. Their
activities had overexcited the people so much — it was causing
rifts and factional troubles — that the situation was getting
out of control. Ven. Mahaa Pin Jalito could no longer handle
things and had no group support, so when he heard that I was
in Songkla he came and appealed for my group to go and help
clear up the situation there.
26.2 First Visit to Phuket Island and a
Dangerous Encounter
To most people of that time, the island of
Phuket was regarded as an isolated place abundant in valuable
natural resources and full of millionaires. Other than the
business community, most islanders weren't considered to know
very much about the outside world. In fact, this was about 30
percent accurate because communications were indeed still
difficult. One mainly crossed to the island by boat but I
remember that my own first visit was by plane. We took off
from Songkla and landed in Phuket itself. The only passengers
on that trip were we two monks and one lay person; its return
flight had only one solitary passenger.
At that time only a few laborers had come
down from the Northeast of Thailand to stay, although the
locals feared them as if they were somehow monsters or tigers.
This originated in various rumours about Northeasterners, how
'they were brutal and cruel, catching, killing and eating
children'.
I had been on the island for a year before
all the Northeaster laborers started heading there. They
arrived walking in file along the road and became an object of
intense interest to the townspeople. Meanwhile, people out on
the town's outskirts or in the countryside who saw them coming
would flee to the shelter of their homes. Anyone out in the
forest ducked and hid themselves in the trees. I didn't
witness this with my own eyes but they reported it to me
later.
The prosperity of any single region of
Thailand didn't seem to me to diverge by more than 5 per cent
from any of the others.173
As the Thai saying has it: 'If we have a lot we can expend
a lot, if we have little we can expend a little'. The
saddest aspect of the Phuket people was the desire of the poor
to present themselves on the same level as the rich. That
wasn't so good.
When I first went to stay on Phuket Island,
it caused no excitement but it did bring me some painful
encounters. I'm referring to what happened about ten days
before the start of the Rains Retreat. A party of people
together with a group of local monks schemed together to
prevent our residing there. They tried various ways to
frustrate us: setting fire to our huts, poisoning our food,
throwing stones at us and forbidding the people to give us
alms food. When we were out on alms round, they would
sometimes head straight towards us on a collision course.
As we were the visitors in their territory,
we tried to be as conciliatory as possible. We went to see
their head and pleaded to be allowed at least to spend the
coming Rains Retreat there, for it was already so close. But
he wouldn't permit this and further accused us of being
vagrant monks. He adamantly rejected whatever explanations and
reasons I put forward, until finally he let out that it was
really his superiors who would not allow us to stay. (This
referred to his superiors in Bangkok.) I therefore told him
quite frankly that although he might have his superiors, I
also had mine. Afterwards, I learned that he had set down this
serious challenge: if Dhammayut' Nikaya174
monks were able to spend the Rains Retreat in Phuket and
Phang-nga, he would "put on trousers". So you can see how
disturbing it was.
27. Twenty-eighth Rains Retreat, 1950
Koke Kloi, Phang-nga Province
The end result of these events came when
our lay devotees eventually did succeed in arranging places
for us to spend the Rains Retreat. Fifteen monks and novices
had accompanied me that year, which, with those who had been
with me before, made eighteen in all. We divided ourselves
between three locations: Dta-gooa Toong, Tai Muang175
and Koke Kloi, which was where I was staying.
It was during this Rains Retreat that we
were not only subjected to buffeting from 'surface waves' but
were also affected by pressure from undercurrents. I refer
here to other monks of our own Dhammayut' group who
started clamouring against us. They accused us of: 'not
keeping the disciplinary Rule'; 'that our practice was outside
what the scriptural authorities set down'; 'that we didn't
observe the Patimokkha Sangha duties inside an official
Uposatha Hall'.
These monks apparently said that anyone who
wanted to be enlightened should, "go over to Ajahn Thate!".
(This discouraging sarcasm was probably directed at their own
disciples who had come over to follow me. In the South,
outside the Rains Retreat, monks who were willing to stay and
take care of the monastery were difficult to find.) If that
were their true opinion, then it wouldn't be strange for newly
ordained, ignorant monks. However I did also understand and
sympathize with those other monks who were more senior and
learned, because they only knew about study and had no
experience of the way of practice. My circumstances had
allowed me the opportunity to practice regularly from the
first year of my ordination.
The dispute about whether or not we were
going to be allowed to stay for the Rains Retreat in that
area, wasn't yet finished with. I found out that they had sent
a report to the Religious Affairs Department, which accused us
of being 'vagrant monks come to disturb and sow discord among
the populace'. An order was issued that details from our
monk's identification papers176
be noted so that a future investigation into the truth of
these claims could be made.
The Chief Education Officer of the
Province,177
however, didn't dare come himself and instead sent the local
District Education Officer to take the details. I asked to see
his official authorization and when he couldn't produce it, I
refused his inspection. I then gave him a thorough and
detailed explanation of the proper procedures for Sangha
Affairs. When he went away, I still had no idea how they
would react to this but later I found that the Ecclesiastical
Regional Head Monk had afterwards sent a strongly worded
letter of instruction and admonishment to both the Provincial
Head Monk and the Provincial Governor.
I've related here only a part of what I
experienced during my first year's stay in Phang-nga Province.
If I were to go into everything, I fear the reader would get
bored with such trifling matters. On being born into this
world, it becomes inevitable that there will be obstacles to
achieving one's goal. Whoever it is, whatever their task,
whether it is done for good or ill, decline or progress, it
will all depend on their circumspection and perseverance, on
their finding out the causes of the situation and thereby
clearing them up. Otherwise, there can never be success. As
one moves forward this will bring confidence and determination
in dealing with such hurdles, and this, in turn, speeds up
one's realization.
With reference to the Dhammayut' Nikaya
monks. They always seemed to be faced with obstacles wherever
they went and whatever they did. However, they were usually
successful in their objectives. Here I would like to quote the
fable178
about the fox and the lamb:
'The fox accused the lamb: "Hey, you! Why
have you muddied my drinking water by walking through it?"
The lamb: "Please Sir, I didn't muddy your
water, I crossed downstream from you."
The fox: "Huh! You may not have muddied my
water but your father certainly caused me a lot of trouble."
And with that he pounced on the lamb and
ate it up.
"Eva.m" — "The End".
After the Rains Retreat was over, we
started building a wooden hut for the abbot, but it wasn't
completed at that time.
28. Twenty-ninth to Forty-first Rains
Retreat, 1951-63
in Phuket
That Chinese New Year, Madame Loei Woon,
the wife of Luang Anuphat Phuket-gahn who was proprietor of
the Chao Fah Mine, invited us to go to Phuket. There were four
of us, Ven. Mahaa Pin Jalito and myself, with two novices. Any
suitable opportunity that presented itself was used for
searching out and setting up a place for us to stay. Leaving
Ven. Mahaa Pin Jalito to organize and finish the building
work, I returned to Koke Kloi where I had spent the previous
Rains Retreat. We stayed in Phuket for the Rains Retreat.
There were four monks and a novice staying
for that Rains Retreat and the monastery was situated at the
foot of Dtoh Se Mountain, beside the Provincial Town Hall. At
first, our dwellings were made from nipa palm,179
with a tiny room just big enough to set up a krot with
its mosquito net. The exception was the abbot's hut which was
a little bigger. They were situated in a dense area of
lalang grass up on the slopes of Dtoh Se Mountain, below
the Phuket Provincial Courthouse.
Madame Kae had bought those four rai180
of land from Nai Borworn, the ore dealer, for one thousand
baht. Previously it had been a coconut plantation
belonging to one of the rich old families but had long since
fallen into neglect. Nai Borworn had then bought it to mine
for ore but as he hadn't found anything, had sold it to Madame
Kae. As the area that Madame Kae bought was too small, I
arranged for another four rai to be acquired for
another four thousand baht. This was the aforementioned
dense tract of lalang grass and it was home to a
variety of wild animals, including tiger, panther, stag,
barking deer, wild boar and monkeys.
We made little huts in clearings just big
enough to sweep around, with narrow paths connecting them. One
night, when I opened my hut to go and meet with the others, a
tiger noisily jumped away into the forest. Sometimes while we
were sitting together having a hot evening drink, we could
almost see the perpetrator of the roaring and scratching sound
in the nearby trees. In broad daylight the tiger would come
and pounce on dogs and cats and eat them up. It was fortunate
that it didn't go on the rampage — the tiger kept to its own
affairs and we humans did the same. The people of Phuket could
not even identify the typical tiger's sounds, but I had been
much in the jungle and knew all its voices.
We stayed together in Phuket for fifteen
years, never returning to spend the Rains Retreat in Phang-nga.
However, the monks of our group throughout the three provinces
of Phang-nga, Phuket and Krabee came under my leadership.
We all lived as one monastic community,
with the same rules and way of practice. A monk or novice from
any of our monasteries who was in need of something essential
would receive help from those who had things to share and
spare. Work at one monastery found everyone else ready and
willing to lend a hand in a spirit of harmony.
Donations that came to be offered would be
collected and assigned for the maintenance of this or that
monastery, while donations given to individuals would be held
in a central fund. Being a Preceptor,181
I put all the donations offered to me personally into the
central fund — notwithstanding the objections I received from
some quarters.182
We never worried about not having our own money and the lay
supporters conscientiously looked after all our needs.
Whatever we lacked would be carefully supplied — even train
tickets were offered when we had to travel. Since my
ordination I have never come across such excellent care and
attention. I will therefore take this opportunity to thank the
people there, especially of Phang-nga and Phuket, for all
their help and support.
During the time I was resident on Phuket
Island, I was always trying to establish and encourage virtue
in both myself and among people in general. I maintained
contact with all the local administrative head monks and they
always responded with generous support towards our group. Any
work or business that arose would often bring them in for
mutual consultations and we always understood each other very
well.
At the entry to the Rains Retreat, I led my
group of monks to present each senior elder with offerings of
respect. This took place every year without fail and was quite
unlike what had happened when we were in Phang-nga. News even
came from Phang-nga that it was only Ven. Mahaa Pin Jalito
that they disliked, and that they didn't mind our group. I
think this arose because of Ven. Mahaa Pin Jalito's brusque
and outspoken manner of speaking when his listeners provoked
him. One really should not take such people so seriously. A
Northeaster dialect proverb asserts that: 'anyone endorsing
such a person, won't have a spoon to sip his soup'.
We tried our best to train the lay devotees
so that they would know the customs and traditions of
Buddhism, making ourselves a model for them to see. We
instructed them about keeping the Uposatha Eight Precepts —
not just during the Rains Retreat but outside it too. We
supported and strengthened the grounding that they had
received from previous monks and then trained them in
developing meditation every night. The results of this then
became clearly visible to each individual, depending on the
strength of their faith and dedication to the practice.
Another development was the increasing
stream of our group of monks from the Northeast coming down to
stay with me. The local youths were also regularly finding
enough faith to ordain. Those people in the South who admired
and appreciated the way of practice came to be trained in the
Dhammayut' Community in greater numbers. We expanded
into Krabee Province, and with Phang- nga and Phuket there
were eleven monasteries where we could spend the Rains
Retreat. All together, this meant that in an average year
there would be more than one hundred monks resident in these
monasteries. This was more than the total monks and novices of
Muang District in Phuket at that time, and twice the number
that had been there when I had first arrived.
As our numbers increased, I organized the
teaching of a regular General Dhamma Studies Course in each
monastery. We would all come together at examination time and
the first year we went to Wat Maha-that in Nakorn See-dhammaraht
Province. In the following years we asked permission to hold
the examinations in Wat Chareon Samana-kit in Phuket itself.
Each year, those who were examined in all three grades never
numbered less than sixty. They passed with good marks too.
Eventually, Mahamakut Monastic College
upgraded our status to that of a 'level two center'. I saw the
benefit to Buddhism's function in having both study and
practice — pariyatti and pa.tipatti-- going
along together. This has been the approach that I have
followed up to today.
We stayed there struggling against various
obstacles throughout fifteen years. It was accomplished for
the sake of continuing the Buddhist way for the benefit of
both the individual and the community overall. It also
fulfilled the wishes of the lay supporters of Phuket and
Phang-nga who had been so kind and generous to us. At least
they were able to become genuinely acquainted with the monks
of the Dhammayut' Group and the disciples of Ven. Ajahn Mun
Bhuuridatta. In fact, the Dhammayut' Group had gone to Phuket
many times intent on establishing itself there, but it had
never been successful. One doesn't need to ask whether Ven.
Ajahn Mun was well known there, for even his disciples had
never managed to penetrate as far as Phuket. Our group had
been able to build an established monastery there for the
first time in both the history of the Dhammayut' Group and of
Phuket. We felt proud of our accomplishments there in repaying
the debt that we owed to the people of Phuket and Phang-nga —
who had never made any claims on us.
28.1 My Apprehensions Seem to be Coming
True
My apprehensions — those that I expressed
in Section 26.1 about the administration of our group — seemed
to be coming true. It concerned my making contact with the
senior elders in Bangkok before I had gone south, and when, on
moving south, I had become acquainted with all the senior
monks on the way to my stay on the island of Phuket.
Phuket was renowned as a place that brought
great wealth to anyone who went to stay there. They made
accusations even against me, saying that I was incredibly rich
— of course this was completely untrue. Although I had been in
Phuket for fifteen years, I didn't have anything because every
penny offered to me, or to any of the monks, went into a
central fund that was then all used for building. But in any
case, not many dwelling places were built there. In the ten
years since I came to the Northeast a much greater number have
been completed, together with an Uposatha Hall and a
two-storey study hall.
I don't mention this matter out of any
disdain for the people of Phuket and Phang-nga, thinking to
answer their doubts about my supposed wealth. They had taken
such good care of us — as I've already mentioned, they are
unequalled anywhere — but the building of monasteries wasn't
popular with them. In fact, such a view was good in its own
way for if a monastery were to be built in an overly grand and
luxurious style, it would then become a burden and worry when
one was away.
I departed Phuket Island without any
worries, although I did sympathize with the villagers there
who had looked after us so well. On departure, I left more
than one hundred thousand baht for Ven. Phra Khru
Sathidabuññaarakkh' (Boon) who had been building an Uposatha
Hall for four or five years, and this allowed it to be
finished in record time. The site of this Uposatha Hall was on
a mountain slope that had to be levelled first. I don't think
that any of the other monks of Phuket and Phang-nga could have
hoped to have finished such a building within only four or
five years. It is quite a record.
The senior elders in Bangkok and the lay
devotees in general took a much greater interest in us when
they saw how our groups were settling on Phuket Island.
However, I remained unmoved by all this extra attention. I've
already explained how encountering obstacles had become quite
an ordinary event for me because I had to overcome so many
before.
At that time, Wat Mahaa
Dhaatu-yuvaraajarangsarit' in Bangkok had begun to popularize
the Burmese meditation technique of [awareness of the] 'rising
and falling'.183
Although they widely publicized their technique, they never
ventured out into the jungle, remaining in the villages and
monasteries. Many people made their grade in the technique,
some of them so much so that they became unaware of how
inflexible they were.
At the same time, Wat Raajapraditth', Wat
Bovoranives and other monasteries initiated a group. It was
formed from the disciples of Ven. Ajahn Mun Bhuuridatta Thera.
They had been practicing for more than fifty years but had
never publicized themselves. When one group uses publicity and
the other doesn't, it follows that both groups will become
well known. 'Becoming well known without a lot of noise'184
happened in this way:
In 1951, the Ecclesiastical Regional
Governor (Dhammayut' Nikaya) invited Ven. Ajahn Singh
Khantayaagamo to go and teach meditation to the Buddhists of
Phetburi Province. On the fifth of December, 1952, he
requested that Ven. Ajahn Singh' be given the title of Ven.
Phra Khru Ñaa.navisitth'. He also asked that a title be given
to me but this didn't come about because I wasn't head of a
monastery that had been officially recognized by the Sangha
Act.
On the thirtieth of May 1953, they
appointed me a Preceptor (Upajjhaaya) and
simultaneously Ecclesiastical Head Monk (Chao Kana Amphere,
Dhammayut' Nikaya) of the districts of Phang-nga -Phuket -Krabee.
On the fifth of December 1955, I received
the title185
of Phra Khru Nirodharangsee.
On the sixteenth of June 1956, I became the
Acting Ecclesiastical Provincial Governor (Dhammayut' Nikaya)
of Phang-nga -Phuket -Krabee Provinces. I also held the office
of Director of Dhamma Studies for these three provinces.
On the fifth of December 1957, I received
the title of the ordinary level, the insight category,186
of Phra Rajanirodharangsee-kampiira'paññaajarn'. At the same
time, Ven. Ajahn Singh Khantayaagamo received the title Phra
Ñaa.navisitth'samiddhiviiraajaarn' and Ven. Ajahn Lee
Dhammadharo was made Phra Suddhidhammarangsii-kampira'
medhaajarn'.
On the twentieth of August, 1964, I was
made full Ecclesiastical Governor of those three provinces.
On the twenty-eighth of November, 1965, I
asked to resign from both my administrative governing
positions and remained with just an honorary rank.
This may have been the first time — except
for the Chao Khun Vipassanaa Koson Thera of Wat Phasee-chareon
— that meditation monks received such royal ecclesiastical
rank. Before this there had only been the designation without
anybody truly taking it on. This can be seen where important
elder's names are listed and the appellation araññavaasee187
is appended.
From that time onward, a steady stream of
senior meditation Ajahns of the lineage of Ven. Ajahn Mun were
to receive ecclesiastical titles. I would, in fact, prefer
that these titles were not given to our group of meditating
monks because they don't seem appropriate. I once sent a
private letter to the senior elders opposing this practice,
especially when it concerned the disciples of Ven. Ajahn Mun
Bhuuridatta Thera. I had also challenged it when I met them
face to face and I referred to what I considered was the
appropriate way to go. I had compared it to hanging jewellery
around the neck of a monkey — it wouldn't mean anything to the
monkey. Still, this is only my personal opinion — although
some monkeys decorated in such a way might even suggest that
they were humans. However, the final result was that the
elders requested that this practice of giving ecclesiastical
titles should go forward for the benefit of the administration
of the Sangha as a whole.
We have all been born into this vast world
with its privileges and freedoms. Yet whatever our condition
or status, every one of us is liable to be encircled by the
worldly-dhammas.188
It will all depend on whether we are willing to submit to
their dominance in our heart. We might also be able to turn
the worldly-dhammas to some use. Before, when the
monks, or anyone for that matter, saw me coming they thought
that I was a rustic old monk (Luang Dtah) out of the
forest. Actually, I preferred it when people considered me in
such a way. Yet as soon as I had position and rank I could go
anywhere, and anyone seeing me would greet me with my title
and an invitation. Contacting people about assistance for some
project or other was made even easier. The receiving of such
rank and title adds to one's obligations and burden; therefore
I don't think such honors are at all suitable for those monks
who wish for peace and solitude in the forest.
During the first few years on Phuket
Island, things had gone well and my health had been fairly
good, but in later years I had become increasingly sensitive
to the climate. This followed the normal course of my
'wanderlust symptoms', for wherever I stayed, my health
wouldn't remain sound for more than three years. In my heart,
I had never intended to stay permanently in Phuket, and I had
said as much to my fellow monks and the lay people when I had
first gone there. Still, I ended up staying there for all of
fifteen years because of the earnest requests from senior
monks and the lay people.
By 1964, it was time to bid a sympathetic
farewell to the tearful people of Phang-nga -Phuket-Krabee,
bequeathing to the Southern people all the various monasteries
that we had established through our effort of mind and body,
and through their contributions and material resources. I also
left them my ecclesiastical titles and honors.
May all the people of the South who were so
kind and supportive of us, may they all, without exception,
find only happiness and success, and be blessed with ever
growing station, prosperity, long life, health and complete
contentment.
May all the monasteries there develop and
grow for the benefit of all.
29. Forty Second Rains Retreat, 1964
Tam Khahm Cave
Phannah Nikom District, Sakhon Nakorn Province
Leaving Phuket Island and being freed of
all those burdens, I was determined to follow my old
inclinations towards solitude and peace. When visiting Ven.
Ajahn Fan in Phannah Nikom District, I went on farther to see
his monastery in the Khahm Cave. I was delighted with it and
asked his permission to spend one Rains Retreat there.
Although the monastery didn't extend over a great area and the
mountain wasn't so high,189
the climate and atmosphere were excellent.
Ven. Ajahn Fan had been conscientious, and
at the end of each Rains Retreat he had led the villagers in
extending the track up the mountain until it had almost
reached the top. The villagers actually enjoyed helping with
the work, and if called by Ven. Ajahn Fan they would drop
whatever they were engaged with to go and help. All feelings
of exhaustion from the long climb up to his monastery would
disappear with a revitalising rest of five or six minutes. The
atmosphere there was such that it more than compensated for
the energy expended in climbing up.
Some homebound people say that: "There's
no need to go looking for the right place or climate for
everything depends on the conditions within oneself. Making
peace and solitude within oneself is all that has to be done".
Yet this is not true because all four
supporting conditions (sappaaya) give real energy
to the Dhamma practice. Unless we become like the domesticated
pig of the village, changing our abode means varying the
atmosphere and our disposition too. The domesticated pig and
the wild boar are very different animals — even their food and
behavior stand out in stark contrast.190
During that Rains Retreat I could give full
energy to my practice because all the lay devotees and monks
had already been well trained by Ven. Ajahn Fan. I therefore
was not hampered by having to train them again. Such a steady
and uninterrupted development of the practice allows
realizations and strategies, directly applicable to oneself,
to arise in quite wonderful ways. I didn't need to sit and
close my eyes, for meditation was always developing wherever I
happened to be. Whatever I took up for examination, whether it
was myself, other people, or even the landscape and scenery,
it would all bring Dhamma discernment. Past memories and
concerns — whether they were of worldly desires or not (ittarom
or anittarom) — were taken up solely with a view
towards developing disenchantment with them all.
After the Rains Retreat, Ven. Ajahn Khao
led a group of his disciples up to visit us for a time. He was
also pleased with the place, and even asked me to take over
his monastery at Wat Tam Klong Paen so that he could come and
stay there himself. But I had already unloaded myself of such
burdens and didn't want any more.
Shortly after that, I was invited to attend
a funeral in Udorn-thani, and so was able to travel on to
visit Wat Tam Klong Paen for the first time. However, I didn't
like the air there. (It was then situated behind the cave.) I
left Udorn-thani after the ceremony was over and went to stay
at Wat Pah Phra Sathit, in Srii Chiang Mai District with Ven.
Ajahn Boo-a Pha Paññaabhaaso. (At the time of writing he has
the title Phra Khru Paññaavisuddhi.) I then took a boat with
Ven. Kam Pan and we went to seek solitude at Hin Mark Peng.
30. Forty-third to Fiftieth Rains Retreat,
1965-72
at Hin Mark Peng
Hin Mark Peng was well known among the
people of those parts for its extreme cold. They had a saying:
"If you don't have a blanket, don't go and sleep at Hin
Mark Peng". It's the coldest spot in all that region
during the Cool Season. It was a place haunted by fierce
spirits and wild animals such as tigers and bears.
About forty years previously, anyone
passing by boat would remain deadly silent and not even dare
look up.191
Fears like this led it to become a place of isolation and
solitude, without anyone daring to go near. Such isolation
always attracted forest meditation monks so that they could
put the quality of their renunciation to the test. Any forest
monk able to stay there considered it a sign of the
steadfastness and confidence of his practice, while his Dhamma
companions saw him as truly courageous in renunciation.
It also became a place of significance for
the law enforcement officers. As the surrounding population
started to expand, the wild animals were forced out and
gradually disappeared. Smugglers and cattle rustlers then used
it as a place for sending contraband across the river.
Whenever any water buffalo or cattle went missing, or if news
came of smuggling activities, government officers and those
who had lost their things would gather there to wait in ambush
to recover their property and catch the culprits. Eventually,
such a bad reputation also tarnished the neighbouring villages
of Koke Soo-ak, Phra Baht and Hooay Hat.
Whenever the old people who were custodians
of the local history got together, they would always tend to
tell about the future of Hin Mark Peng: "Kings from three
cities would come to develop a flourishing Hin Mark Peng".
This arose because of those three great rocks lined up
together on the bank of the Mekong River. (In fact, they all
merge into one mass but from far away it looks as if there are
three rocks.) The northern rock (that is the one upstream)
would belong to Luang Phra Bahng, the middle rock to Bangkok
and the southern rock to Vientiane.
Listening to this made me laugh, for
whoever would come and build anything worthwhile in such a
place! The jungle there was impenetrable. It was home to wild
animals that were still to be found there more than forty
years later — towards the end of 1964 — when I first came to
check out the place. I both saw and heard the barking deer and
partridges, while to my delight overgrown monkeys appeared
leaping from branch to branch.
This kind of air and landscape were rare so
I was delighted to have discovered such a place. I therefore
resolved to come with Ven. Kum Pan and spend the Rains Retreat
there. I thought that I would be able to cease all building
work and avoid taking on any further commitments. Other people
might equate that with confused thinking, but in my heart I
truly knew my position: I had already accomplished much
building work. I had not inconsiderably ministered to the
group of monks and lay devotees. In the future it was better
that I cease with all that and focus all my efforts on the
practice — readying myself for death. I had reached an age
when one couldn't be sure when death would come.
I therefore spoke with Ven. Kum Pan about
staying with him and taking a restful break. This meant all
construction work and such things would be left totally to
him, although I would be happy to advise on Dhamma practice.
He not only agreed but was happy with this arrangement. He
said that finding the material resources to start building was
beyond his ability, but that if funds became available he
would accept all responsibilities. I told him that something
might possibly turn up; however, I would not go out looking
for anything. We would accept anything offered and if no one
brought things, well, that was all right too.
After the Rains Retreat, Nahng Dtim (of a
car spare parts shop) in Vientiane, Por Lee, Maer Pao (Pha) of
Koke Soo-ak Village with Nai Prasop-phon, Khun Nitisahn and
relatives (from Udorn-thani) resolved to come and build us
each a hut. Each hut cost about five thousand baht.
(All the huts built here have been built in the Thai Style.)192
Nahng Nuay built one kuti in memory of Nahng Boowa-
thaew Malai-kong at a cost of ten thousand baht.193
In 1966 lay people from Bangkok came to
visit by boat. The location and surroundings so impressed them
that they helped to raise funds to renovate and to build a
large wooden Study Sala (Sala Karn Parien). It was
built in the Thai style with two floors, the lower storey
having a veranda on three sides surfaced with concrete. The
area of the top floor was seventeen metres by eleven metres,
while that of the ground floor was nineteen and a half by
sixteen metres. It was all finished on the twentieth of July
1967 at a cost of more than eighty thousand baht. The
actual labor came mostly from the monks and novices
themselves. Ven. Kum Pan was suffering from some eye disease
and left for treatment and never returned.
In the same year, the Bangkok devotees
sponsored the building of two more huts, while Nai Sakchai and
his relatives from Pangkhone market, of Pangkhone District in
Sakhon Nakorn Province offered another. Each cost about seven
thousand baht while monastery funds were used to build
another four toilets.
In 1968, a reinforced concrete rain water
storage tank was built behind the Study Sala.194
It was eleven metres by three metres with a depth of a hundred
and eighty centimetres. It cost fifteen thousand baht.
In 1969, a two-storey kuti was built on the
bank of the Mekong River... another hut was built... In 1970,
a hut was built... and when a storm blew a tree down onto the
western veranda of the large Study Sala the authorities
repaired this at a cost of twenty thousand baht. This
year also saw the building of a reinforced concrete rain water
tank in the nuns' quarters with dimensions of three by six by
two metres... another reinforced concrete rain water tank of
similar dimensions... and the area in front of the large study
hall was paved... After the Rains Retreat, thirty student
monks from Korat came to receive meditation training for five
days.
In 1971, another hut was built... together
with another six toilets for the nuns' quarters and two more
for visitors and a place for visitors to stay... also a
reinforced concrete rain water tank in front of the Uposatha
Hall... costing thirty thousand baht. These projects
were all sponsored through the monastery's funds.
I fell ill around the fifth of July 1971,
just before the entry to the Rains Retreat. At first it was
influenza with a bronchial infection — to which I am
susceptible. They sent for the doctor at the local tobacco
estate, but I did not improve. Dr. Tawinsree Amornkraisarakit
— lady doctor and assistant director of the Nongkhai
Provincial Hospital — with Khun Tawan, the provincial
economics officer, brought a car to take me for treatment in
Nongkhai Provincial Hospital. The doctor treated me for five
days but my condition didn't improve. An x-ray showed lung
congestion, pleurisy and pneumonia, with an area of infection.
Khun Dtoo Khovinta therefore sent a telegram about the
situation to Prof. Udom Posakrisna in Bangkok.
When Prof. Udom learned about this, he
invited me to go to Bangkok where he would await me at Siriraj
Hospital. The lack of specialist care and equipment in
Nongkhai required my traveling to Bangkok. Thao Kae Kim Kai
and Dr. Somsak, the director of Nongkhai Provincial Hospital,
put me on the plane so that they could take me to Siriraj
Hospital. I was a patient there under the specialist care of
Prof. Udom with Dr. Thira Limsila in regular attendance on me.
I received excellent care and attention
from all the doctors. They used suction to bring up a large
amount of fluid from the lungs, and during the first week my
condition steadily improved. By the second week however, I was
beginning to have allergic reactions to the drugs, and then
other complications set in. Perhaps this had something to do
with an idiosyncratic unease when staying in large buildings.
As my hospitalization extended so my
condition deteriorated until my breathing became quite shallow
and my voice was reduced to an almost inaudible whisper. The
doctors would draw a lot of fluid from my lungs and the
condition would ease a little bit, but my general feeling of
weakness did not improve. I therefore asked the doctors to
allow me to leave the hospital, but they requested that I stay
longer. I was not able to do this, and so asked to be
discharged from the hospital on the fifteen of August 1971.
This was the period when I became
disenchanted with and saw the irksomeness of the body:
'This lump of a body that had brought illness and trouble to
me and others. Of what use was the tiny amount of food, all
that I was able to swallow each day? Better not to eat at all
today.'
I told Mrs. Kantharat' Sapying, who brought
me food every day, please not to bring the food in, for I had
decided not to eat anymore. She wept and went to find Dr.
Chavadee Rattapong. Dr. Chavadee sent for Dr. Rote Suwanasutth'
because Prof. Udom's duties had taken him out to the
provinces. I explained to the doctor about my condition, and
how I didn't feel well in such large buildings. Dr. Rote
therefore gave me permission to leave, and arranged a car to
take me to stay at Mrs. Kantharat's house for three days.
Before I left Dr. Banyat Paritnyanon' came to examine me and
gave some advice on my treatment.
Dr. Rote and Dr. Chavadee kept in close
contact, bringing me medicine every day, and my condition
gradually improved. Examining within myself I realized that I
wasn't going to die quite yet — although to other people it
might have appeared otherwise. Some fortune tellers were even
predicting that I would certainly die within five days. When
Prof. Ouay Ketusingh' came to visit me, I asked his opinion
about returning to my monastery. He answered by saying the
quicker I could return the better. This was a pleasant
surprise since I had already resolved that if I were going to
die, it would be better and more fitting for me, as a true
monk, to die in the monastery.
Thao Kae Kim Kai hired a special plane to
take me back, and it filled up with the monks and lay devotees
helping to see me on my way. We arrived at the air field in
Nongkhai at almost midday. The Mekong River had just burst its
banks and because of the flooding we had to request help from
the N.P.K. (The Mekong River Marine Patrol) who were kind
enough to lend us a boat from Kong Nang Village. This took us
to Wat Hin Mark Peng where we arrived at five o'clock in the
evening.
Dr. Chavadee had accompanied me and taken
care of me all the way back to the monastery, and then stayed
on to treat me for another five or six days. When she saw that
I was out of danger and improving she traveled back to
Bangkok.
While I was ill, whether in Nongkhai
Provincial Hospital or in Siriraj Hospital, many monks,
novices and lay people — some known to me and some unknown —
had come together to show me extraordinary care and concern.
This was evident from the throngs that came to visit me every
day while I was in Nongkhai Provincial Hospital. Even more so
in Siriraj Hospital where such great numbers came that the
doctors had to forbid visiting.
Some people who came to visit were not
allowed to see me, so they asked instead to be allowed to bow
their respects from outside my room. This was amazing. So many
people came to visit when I was ill, and yet I hardly knew
anyone in Bangkok! Some people who had never seen me before
would come in and then burst into tears, even before they had
time to bow their respects.
I would therefore like to record here the
good will shown by everyone — my appreciation for everyone's
kindness will always remain with me. This applies especially
to those people who came to visit and help care for me in Wat
Hin Mark Peng. Some came back repeatedly, even though
traveling conditions during that time had become so difficult
because of the flooding. It meant journeying by long-tailed
boat195
because all the road links were cut. This could sometimes take
three or four hours so it really does deserve the utmost
appreciation.
As soon as I was back in the monastery my
general condition began steadily to improve. I had eminent and
respected visitors come to call on me. My Rains Retreat196
however was curtailed because I had not returned in time.
My illness at that time brought great
benefit to my meditation practice. When I arrived at Nongkhai
Provincial Hospital, my condition was deteriorating so much
that I had immediately set about preparing myself for death. I
had resolved to let go, not grasping at anything. I had
instructed myself: "You must leave your body and disease in
the doctor's hands. Ready yourself for death; concentrate your
heart; establish potent mindfulness and investigate your heart
to purify it completely".
After that my mind was calm and peaceful
without any disturbances.
When the doctors had come along and asked
how I felt I would answer that I was just fine. Thao Kae Kim
Kai had come and carried me off by plane to Bangkok, and I
went along with it. I even went as far as Siriraj Hospital,
where the doctors had asked about my condition and I had again
said that I was 'as good as ever'. However, onlookers might
have thought the opposite. My extended stay in the hospital
had its effect when I had started to find it tiresome and the
days and nights seemed to lengthen. I therefore needed to
bring back to mind my original resolution about not holding
back but being willing to let go of everything: "I've
already relinquished all that haven't I? Why then am I
involving myself in that sort of thing. It's all their affair.
It has to follow its own course and schedule. My dying though,
is not involved with all that. We each must do our separate
duties as best we can."
My resolution towards letting go then
settled down in the stillness of the present-moment Dhamma
(paccuppanna-dhamma) until there was no feeling of what
was day and what was night time. There was only the brightness
of the stilled heart, one with itself. When I later came to
examine the state of my body and mind, I realized that it
wasn't yet time for them to disintegrate and pass away.
Nevertheless, if I were to stay in the hospital, there would
be continual encounters with external sense impressions and
their defusing would demand the constant attention of my
concentration and wisdom. No way! Better that I go back and
fight them on my own battle ground — (which was the
monastery). That was why I had returned to the monastery, as I
have described above.
The year 1972 saw the start of the
construction of the Uposatha Hall. I will give a more detailed
account of this in a future section. At the same time we also
built a meeting sala for the nuns. It was a wooden
two-storey structure with concrete posts and an asbestos roof,
four metres by nine, with a four meter wide veranda on the
ground floor going all the way around... It cost a little over
seventy thousand baht...
31. Fifty-first and Fifty-second Rains
Retreat
1973-74
Establishing Wang Nam Mork as a Monks' Dwelling Place
I had helped to relocate the old school of
Koke Soo-ak and Phra Bart villages so that it could be
connected up to the rear of the new building. This new
structure had concrete posts and four class rooms. It cost
eighty thousand baht but hadn't been fully completed
through lack of funds. In 1974 I was able to continue the work
by joining up the old and new buildings and partitioning off
an office for the head teacher. Underneath I made a reinforced
concrete rain water tank of seven by six by two metres.
At the time we were moving the school I
also went to set up another dwelling place for monks in the
Wang Nam Mork Forest. This was about six kilometres to the
west of Wat Hin Mark Peng and still had jungle with mountains,
caves and streams. It was therefore ideal for anyone intent on
developing their meditation in solitude, and its natural
environment was also well worth preserving.
32. Fifty-third Rains Retreat, 1975
Building Wat Lumpini
A lay person gave about three rai of
land in Lumpini District. When other donations increased the
area to eleven or twelve rai, another place for
solitude and practice could be set up. Wat Lumpini was the
equal of Wang Nam Mork — that I had just established — because
streams skirted it on all four sides. It was aimed at those
who wished for more solitude, as Wat Hin Mark Peng was
becoming less peaceful.
From about 1974 there seems to have been a
steadily growing interest among the people of Bangkok and
Central Thailand in making contact with the various
monasteries in the Northeast. Wat Hin Mark Peng also became
more involved in receiving visitors from Bangkok.
In 1975, Somdet Phra Ñaa.nasangworn, the
present Supreme Patriarch of Thailand, was supporting the
scheme of sending the foreign monks who had been ordained at
Wat Bovoranives to study Dhamma in many different parts of
Thailand, and many came here to stay for the Rains Retreat.
They were all well committed to the practice.
33. Fifty-fourth Rains Retreat, 1976-77
Spreading the Dhamma Abroad
My trip to foreign lands this time received
support and assistance from many parties who were concerned
with teaching Dhamma abroad. Besides, I wanted to go and visit
both the Thai and foreign monks living over there. They had
gone to spread the Dhamma, and I wanted to hearten and
encourage them.
It struck me as amusing that, although I
was old and had recently been readying myself for death, I
found myself preparing to go abroad. Moreover, I didn't even
know their language. In fact this trip wasn't completely
satisfactory for me as I always bear three things in mind:
If one wants to go to any particular place
or region —
1. One should know their language.
2. One should know their customs and
traditions.
3. One should know about their livelihood.
This is all concerned with proper social
discourse and communication with people. However, the lack of
language alone makes the other two points almost moot.
Notwithstanding this, I still received ample help with
interpretation and liaison from those who were knowledgeable
about such things. This gave me such good understanding that
the language barriers fell away and almost ceased to be a
problem.
I well knew that I was already very old,
already advanced in years. Going here and there no longer held
any appeal for me — I had already traveled around quite widely
— and finding a place to die like Wat Hin Mark Peng seemed
ideal indeed. Then Maer Chee Chuang — (from Singapore, who
through her faith in Buddhism became a nun, coming to spend
the Rains Retreat at Wat Hin Mark Peng) — invited me to visit
Singapore, Australia and Indonesia.
She felt with my old age, and the constant
stream of visitors coming to see me in the monastery, that I
didn't have enough time to rest. Furthermore, most of my
visitors only seemed interested in asking for lottery numbers.197
If I were to go away, it might give me some time to rest. I
gave this some consideration and came to the conclusion that,
besides the problems with my language deficiency, my 'strange
face' might provoke the curiosity of the crowds over there.
What sort of rest would that be!
Of more important was that I should clearly
consider all possible contingencies. I was elderly and had
come to be considered quite a popular figure so that any
mishap, or my illness or death, might cause difficulties for
other people. This would especially bring criticism down on
the one who had made the original invitation, that, "they had
taken me away but not looked after me". Even so, she kept up
with her efforts aimed at inviting me. These were bolstered
when her elder brother — who helped lead the Buddhist Society
in Perth, Western Australia — sent a letter inviting me to go
and visit the Buddhists there.
After due consideration, I came to the
conclusion that this time there were three good reasons to
accept the invitation:
The first reason concerned the lack of
senior monks in Indonesia, which, with a population of more
than a hundred and thirty million, had ten million Buddhists
living among Muslims and Hindus. When someone mentioned this
to me, it made me feel really compassionate towards them all.
I was also delighted to learn that they liked to meditate.
(Every religion in which there is worship of a deity, requires
the devotee to sit in peace of heart and focus on the divine
being.)
The second reason arose because of the many
monks from Indonesia and Australia who had come to ordain with
Somdet Phra Ñaa.nasangworn — the present Supreme Patriarch of
Thailand — in Wat Bovoranives. Before the beginning of that
year's Rains Retreat, the English-born Ven. Dorn (Donald
Riches) had taken tapes of my Dhamma talks and photographs to
show in Australia. Once he knew that I was going with a party
to Australia, his preparations to receive us caused some
people to become quite excited at the prospect. There was also
a senior Thai monk, Ven. Phra Bunyarit' Pa.n.dito, already
living and teaching there. This monk had done much to
propagate Buddhism in Australia and had inspired many to come
and ordain in Thailand.
The third reason came from my reflection
that, in the future, Buddhism would be spreading to many other
countries. It might come to be disseminated following the
Christian missionizing198
model, where Thai monks might go out and only spread the
superficialities of Buddhism. Whereas if individuals from the
country concerned came to be ordained, they could be trained
truly to penetrate to the inner core of Buddhism. They could
then spread the genuine Teaching themselves for that's the
only way to penetrate to the essential.
One Indonesian monk, Ven. Sudhammo, who had
been ordained at Wat Bovoranives under Somdet Phra
Ñaa.nasangworn, had then come to spend the preceding Rains
Retreat (of 1976) at Wat Hin Mark Peng. He was exactly the
sort of monk who would be able to spread Buddhism — and he was
in Indonesia, awaiting my visit there.
After considering all three reasons for
going, I made up my mind: 'In whatever way I can, may the
remainder of this life be dedicated to the advancement of
Buddhism'. This decision allowed me increasingly to see
the possible value of my life, and caused me to give up
personal comfort for Buddhism.
I had, in fact, previously received
invitations from various individuals and groups in Bangkok to
make a pilgrimage to the Buddhist holy places in India. They
offered to look after me and take care of my needs in every
way, but I had never accepted. To find the inspiration to go,
I had often tried to imagine what such a trip would be like,
but my heart always remained indifferent to the idea.
I reflected that India had been the birth
place of Buddhism, and that although I may have missed the
chance to be born in time to meet the Lord Buddha, and the age
when Buddhism was flourishing, the Holy Places were still
there. I should therefore go and pay my respects so that I
could gain inspiration, understanding and empathy — yet my
heart remained indifferent to the idea. Perhaps this apathy
arose from a previous birth as I might have been born as a
Buddhist monk in India when the Hindus were suppressing the
monks and the holy places.199
Perhaps this had been so traumatic an experience that it was
deterring me from going to India in this life.
Whoever has the faith and opportunity to go
on pilgrimage to the Four Holy Places200
will gain great merit. The Lord Buddha spoke about this to
Venerable Ananda: "These four holy places will be a great
source of merit for people after I have finally passed away".
I lack the merit to go there, so I can only
esteem and commend them. Anyhow, I would like to take this
opportunity to remark how indebted I feel towards the people
of India because their soil was the birth place of Buddhism.
Before setting out for foreign lands I went
to stay at Air Force Lt. General Payom Yensootjai's garden
abode for monks in Dorn Muang. Every night, more and more
people were attracted to come and listen to Dhamma and sit in
meditation. I feel that the present day citizens of Bangkok,201
City of Angels, are more aware of their situation: 'Though
born in a heavenly city, as the worldly description has it, we
remain very much human beings struggling and stuck in the 'rat
race' — the common lot of human beings everywhere'. So
perhaps we will want to transform ourselves into true
spiritual beings knowing that angels born in heaven don't have
the same opportunity for skillful and generous actions as we
do in this human realm. When such angels have exhausted their
store of merit made in their previous human life times, they
return to birth in the human realm. Sometimes even this is not
certain and they may be born in the lower realms (Apaaya).
It is different for the Noble Disciple — for instance, the
stream-enterer202
— who after death is assured of not being born into any woeful
existence.
I am just an old monk and I was born in a
place with inadequate educational opportunities. On occasion,
they have invited me to give Dhamma instruction to highly
educated people, and at first I felt quite reticent and
embarrassed about it. This does however fit in with the
Buddhist principles of not discriminating because of caste or
class.
Assessment should be based on right
knowledge and good conduct. When a knowledgeable person turns
to evil ways, he or she is liable to cause more strife and
trouble to the country than the uninformed person who does the
same thing. An ignoramus who doesn't do evil is better than a
learned man who uses his knowledge for evil means. People may
have only limited knowledge, but if they employ it in trying
to develop goodness, it will bring advancement to all — from
the immediate group right through to the national level.
Such considerations gave me more
self-confidence about teaching, knowing that the more educated
my listeners the easier they should be able to understand. The
Lord Buddha's Dhamma Teaching points towards knowing the
nature of things, and this can fit in with the latest ideas of
science.
Good scholars should only explore and
enquire for knowledge that is concerned with weighty,
significant issues that may lead to the enrichment of peoples'
lives. They shouldn't be aiming for knowledge to increase
their social position or status. For instance, teachers
nowadays can educate their pupils to high levels so that they
in turn may take that knowledge and teach other teachers. On
the other hand, there are bad pupils who, spotting the
teacher's trifling mistake or having a difference of opinions
with them, work to have their teacher dismissed. They use
their teacher's services, and then plot together to force him
or her out, and even think it an honorable and admirable thing
to have done. This then becomes an era for the development of
corruption and wickedness and that can only lead to decline.
33.1 Singapore — The First Stop
Our party included Ven. Steven, Ven. Chai
Charn, Dr. Chavadee and Maer Chee Chuang. We set out from
Bangkok on the seventh of November 1976, reaching Singapore
the same day where a welcoming party of devotees received us
and showed us all of the city.
Singapore is a small island. It is only
thirty kilometres long by twenty-five kilometres wide and with
slightly more than three million people on the main and
smaller surrounding islands it is densely populated. They have
therefore built blocks of flats of ten, twenty or more floors
to utilize all available space. Seeing all these high-rise
apartment buildings we might imagine all Singaporeans to be
rich but in truth they are just the same as in any other
country of the world. There are quite ordinary houses with tin
roofs or even thatch, just as there are in our villages.
As long as all human beings have
defilements of greed, aversion and delusion, every sort of
contrast and variety will continue to exist. Although each
country's government aims and strives to attain equality,
achieving it must remain impossible. I don't know of a single
country that has been successful. Regimes that employ
communist ideology give out propaganda that all their citizens
are prosperous, trouble free and equal. Why then should their
people try to sneak away and escape from such a so called
'promised land'? Why? Because our human defilements are
too deeply entrenched!203
The Lord Buddha continually taught about
this, saying that one should have sympathy and pity for one's
fellow creatures, always wishing them well through mutual
harmony. Everyone wishes this. Yet when one comes to act on
the principle, the defilements insidiously veil and cover it
up so that one forgets and falls once again for the old
delusions...
Singapore204
had wide roads sufficient for its traffic needs, and their
drivers kept to the highway code — they didn't drive in a
selfish way. There were no traffic policemen at the crossroad
and intersections, with traffic lights standing in their
place. The roads were swept clean, few people were milling
about and the shops had plate glass frontages to keep out the
dust.
Besides the tall blocks of flats, the
ordinary houses were also all set out in a very orderly,
pleasing fashion. Between the houses and along the roadsides
were shady trees — all very pleasant and worth seeing. When
there was sufficient space between houses — whether it was in
the central or outer suburbs — they planted it as a public
park, sometimes big and sometimes small, where people could go
to sit and relax. The beaches were planted with trees and
provided with proper car parking. They liked to plant
beautiful varieties of flowers all over the place. Their soil
was good, and their climate was blessed with frequent rain
that kept their flowers and bushes always green and
flourishing.
Although Singapore might be a small,
heavily populated island, don't imagine that it lacks jungle.
There were conservation areas even in the midst of the city,
for an awareness of their scarce resources made them take
especially good care of such things. Singapore seemed higher
above sea level than Bangkok, and therefore didn't flood so
easily and could be more easily kept clean. The inhabitants
also conscientiously upheld the laws and regulations.
Whatever the outer circumstances, we
shouldn't lose sight of our condition. Our birth was messy and
then we continually associate with both external and internal
impurities. We bathe and shower and in no time are dirty
again. This only concludes with the corruption and
putrefaction of death. If these are the underlying conditions,
where can we find a place that is clean? It is only possible
when all the individuals of a group come together in mutual
understanding about the truth. They can then help each other —
according to their various responsibilities — to uphold the
cleanliness. How can we each safeguard this inner cleanliness?
Well, we can start by watching over and securing the
cleanliness in what is around us.
For any society to prosper and flourish it
requires these four conditions:
1. The land and terrain are favorable to
the people living there.
2. The leaders and government who lay down
the laws are just, being neither too slack nor too oppressive
towards the populace.
3. All the populace helps in keeping and
respecting the laws of the land.
4. The bureaucrats and officials are just
and honest.
A society enjoying all four conditions will
have full prosperity. A deficiency in one of them means that
any prosperity will remain incomplete.
It's out of the question that Bangkok can
be made as clean as Singapore because its location is not
favorable. It is sinking below sea level — so don't let anyone
pretend they can fix Bangkok's problems, as is vacuously
claimed in the newspapers. The best way is that we uphold
purity in our own lives and responsibilities. Please don't be
so negligent and selfish about your affairs. Hurling abuse at
each other over trivial mistakes tarnishes one's behavior and
manners, forfeiting all culture and refinement as if one were
a completely ignorant person.
I taught Dhamma and meditation every night
of the ten nights that our party remained in Singapore. The
meetings would not last more than three hours, with each night
between twenty and thirty Singaporeans coming for training.
This teaching of Dhamma was really nothing
more than a pointing out of the afflictions and flaws of the
worldly life. Anyone capable of seeing the harmful nature of
the world can also see Dhamma, because the world and Dhamma
are interrelated and interconnected. Whenever I explained
Dhamma, the problems of the world always became highlighted on
every side. These problems are the same the world over and can
be summarized into three issues:
1. Problems concerning family and
livelihood.
2. Problems about looking for inspiration.
3. Problems about overcoming and
transcending suffering.
It's not surprising that problems of this
first category should arise. When there is a world there must
also be world-shattering problems. If we fasten something
ourselves, we must also be able to untie it! Who else can do
it? Unless that is, someone could help by explaining the means
of disentanglement.
The fish hooks itself because it mis-takes
the angler's camouflaged bait. It hungrily snaps it up but
when the hook catches there is no more eating, only pain and
suffering. This is how desire leads to suffering. I offer you
this consideration: Make do without. Once the hook
catches, the more we struggle, the more we intensify the pain.
We then become full of remorse and feel sorry for ourselves
because of what we are suffering. Yet it all originated in our
own fatal error. All we can do is wait for the lucky fisherman
to take us away for his evening meal.
With the second issue, as long as we still
have hopes and dreams we will have to struggle all the way,
until every exit has been tried and failed. The manner of the
untrained heart is like that of a newly caught wild animal.
However much it might stamp and paw the ground, provided that
its bindings remain firm and unbroken, it will eventually tire
and become still, knowing when it is beaten. We human beings
are much the same. When our wishes don't find fulfillment in
the object of affection, our heart's contentment is stilled.
That is how one knows where one's heart is going for refuge.
It is going out to find pleasure in external objects that are
only able to provide a superficial, false sort of happiness.
True happiness is that of the quiet and
serene mind, without struggle. This will be the experience of
anyone who discovers the point of true happiness. Their heart
will continue to abide in happiness irrespective of their
posture or activity. Although anyone lacking such realization
won't be able to appreciate such a possibility — it will be
totally beyond their comprehension.205
Concerning the third issue, I taught them
to review and go over the first two points until they
perceived, that apart from the stilled heart, every other kind
of happiness was temporary and false. I then instructed them
to be diligent in cultivating and developing that happiness,
and to continue their analysis until they became skilled. When
adept, they would be able to abide as their heart wished,
whatever conditions they were subjected to, for with this
accomplishment one may abide in freedom either in happiness or
pain.
From what I heard from the Singaporeans, it
seems that they are blessed with virtuous views and opinions.
They realized the peril of birth in this world, seeing that
this existence is unauthentic and full of deception. I had no
idea that the people of Singapore would be so knowledgeable
about the basic principles of the Lord Buddha's Teaching...
When they received the genuine Buddhist Teaching, all their
previous beliefs seemed to disappear, so that only the
essential Dhamma Truth prevailed.
It was admirable how they showed their joy
and firm conviction in their understanding of Dhamma.
Amazingly, some people seemed instinctively to be keeping the
Five Precepts, and practicing samadhi meditation so that
insight-knowledge could arise about themselves and others.
33.2 To Australia
We flew out of Singapore for Australia on
the seventeenth of November. Our point of entry was Perth and
after stopping over there, we carried on to Melbourne, Sydney
and Canberra. These were all big cities where there was much
interest in Buddhism. If there was a local Buddhist society,
they would invite me to teach Dhamma. Whether they were Thai,
Lao, Burmese, Sri Lankan or Caucasian, they all gave me an
outstanding welcome. All in our party wish to express our
great appreciation for this help.
Conversation with a Hindu Leader
While I was in Perth, a swami came
to visit. By a swami I mean one ordained in Hinduism who wears
robes in color and shape similar to a 'Tibetan monk'. He
described himself as a Hindu Lama. Hinduism has many sects,
with many deities — it allows one to worship any of them,
provided it's remembered that they all originate from one
deity. (That is the deity that was supposed to have created
the world and who has no material body.)
This swami had already been ordained for
forty-five years and was seventy-six years old. He was already
waiting for me in the reception room and when he saw me he
immediately raised his palms together in añjali and
gave a friendly welcome. I reciprocated, with words of
greeting, and we established a friendly rapport, so that I
could ask about his religion and its particular way of
practice. He said that he was a head swami-lama who taught
Hinduism and that his family was Hindu. He was a devout and
dedicated Hindu who had ordained while still a youngster, and
had once gone to find the Mahayana monks in Tibet.
Another swami came but he was an ordinary
lay person, and unlike the first one wasn't ordained. He was
eighty-one years old but his whole appearance was delightful —
his complexion and constant smile made him look more like a
sixty-one-year-old. He was already waiting for me, and when I
came in, he lifted his hands in añjali as the first
swami had done. He told me that as soon as he saw me he felt
great loving-kindness for me. (Our way of putting it
would be that he had a 'feeling of great respect'.)
After words of welcome I first asked about
his religion, just as I had done with the first swami. I
begged his pardon206
before making my enquiries, but he said there was no need
because our dhammas were equivalent. (What he meant by this
will now be explained.)
He said that he didn't adhere to any
religion because: "This world only has one deity". The
Teachings of every religion derive from the one deity —
(namely Brahma) — and when one's action was right and
good, then one touched the original deity. He told me that he
had studied yoga in India with six different teachers, and
that they had taught him many techniques. Some examples he
gave were the yoga postures, fasting and controlling the
breathing. (This shows that these techniques, which had been
in existence before the Lord Buddha's time, are still extant
today.) He possessed great knowledge and ability concerning
Hinduism, and had given up everything — he had no family).
This was why the Hindu devotees referred to him as swami.
Our discussions together were harmonious
and well-received by all — Ven. Steven acted as interpreter —
and as they were about to depart, they asked permission to bow
at my feet for their blessing and good fortune. (It seemed
like they had elevated me like some deity!) This caused me
some embarrassment because they themselves were so aged,
worthy and virtuous. I therefore told them there was no need
to bow for our dhammas 'being equal' was already blessing
enough. As they left, they kept turning around to face me and
making añjali repeatedly, clearly showing their
respect.
Although one swami was ordained and the
other wasn't, they explained their path to the deity in the
same way for they were both Hindus. I had asked them about
their techniques for reaching the deity and their response had
been the same.
The first swami told me about slowly
repeating the mantra word 'Om' two or three times and
evoking the deity in the heart. He said: "By the heart
recollecting the deity, it would manifest as different images
in the heart. The deity would then teach knowledge about right
and wrong207...
doing good and spurning evil... sometimes there would be only
a voice rather than an image".
(According to Buddhist principles this
would be ruupa-jhaana.208
"One who sees Dhamma, sees me"209...
Dhamma is the Great Teacher continually pointing out the right
way to proceed, and how to avoid going wrong.)
"The deity would then disappear leaving a
state of emptiness, and this is reaching the Lord Nirandorn."210
(This is the aruupa-jhaana211
that was the state cultivated by the hermits A.laara
and Uddaka, when Prince Siddhattha left the palace to
study with them. He eventually saw that because they were
still attached to those meditation states their way could not
lead to the ending of suffering.212
"Puññapaapaani pahiyati"... Only after abandoning both
good and evil can one go beyond suffering, he then left them
to try the way of harsh asceticism [before finding the Middle
Way].)
The second, unordained swami explained in
much the same way, but he didn't refer to a mantra. Perhaps
this was a secret of his sect that he didn't want to reveal.
However, I do think he used a mantra in the same way as the
first because they were of the same sect. He simply said that
when one reached the deity, it might manifest as various
images, or as a voice that would teach one. He did not speak
about the emptiness that remained after such visions and
voices had disappeared, about having reached the Lord
Nirandorn.
The Essentials
Those of you who are engaged with all the
religions, are you finding this absorbing and enjoyable? What
do I mean? Well, I will try to explain and ask your indulgence
for my ideas because I have never had opportunity to research
the scriptures of any religion other than Buddhism.
They say that one needs a firm faith that
the deity exists, although they cannot see the deity's body.
After putting faith in the deity, one opens up to, or one
inclines the heart to rest in the deity, at which point the
deity manifests for one to see. It is similar to this in
Mahayana Buddhism.
In Theravaada or Hinayaana Buddhism, the
Lord Buddha does have a body, which is that of Prince
Siddhattha of the Sakyans. He went forth into the homeless
life and with great exertion comprehensively cleansed all
impurities and defilements from the heart. He realized
Buddhahood through perfecting all the Dhamma virtues.
However it was not merely the body of Phra
Siddhattha that became the Lord Buddha. When one has faith and
trust in the virtuous qualities of the Lord Buddha, one can
receive them into the heart, or incline one's heart out to
rest in those wholesome qualities until it becomes fully and
firmly established in one-pointedness (ekaggataarama.na).
Various images or sounds can arise in such a state and
according to the creed of the formless deity, this state would
be 'one with the deity', and it would manifest to teach one.
The Buddhist Teaching would maintain that
such manifestations were images or visions — nimitta —
arising out of meditation, and the sounds would be the
clarifying voice of Dhamma. Dhamma — being itself without form
— would need to manifest in this way to accommodate to people
with bodies.
In summary, every religion or sect teaches
its adherents to abandon evil and do good, to receive the
virtuous qualities of its deity into their heart, or to give
their heart to the deity. The way to reach the deity is the
same for each religion. However, when a particular religion's
devotees don't understand the truth, mistaken assumptions can
arise. They may think that because another religion practices
in a different way it is wrong and that only their way is
correct. They propagandize and criticize and stir things up so
that they can become pre-eminent with an increasing number of
adherents. This is not what a Good Teacher with Dhamma would
have taught, and sages would view such ideas with a dubious
eye. Those who practice should find this relationship —
between meditative visions and coming in touch with the deity
— as something worth investigating.
Some Suggestions for Ven. Mahaa Samai
During my trip to Australia I was not only
able to teach Dhamma to anyone interested but could also
exchange views with other monks. This was especially so with
Ven. Mahaa Samai who had been sent out by Mahamakut Monastic
College to take up residence at Wat Buddharangsee in Sydney.
Although Ven. Mahaa Samai was originally
from Champahsak in Laos, he had gone to stay at Wat Sapatoom
in Bangkok while still a boy. He had received novice and
bhikkhu ordination and passed his grade five Pali examinations
from Mahamakut Monastic College, Wat Bovoranives. In 1959 he
went to teach general studies for a year in Wat Bodhisomphorn,
Udorn-thani and then volunteered to go and spread Dhamma in
Australia. He had been there for two years — being part of the
second party that followed after Ven. Chao Khun Pariyat' — and
was the first monk to stay at the new Wat Buddharangsee. At
the time of writing [1976] he has been a monk for thirteen
years and is a courteous, model monk worthy of respect.
Ven. Mahaa Samai could be considered a
representative of the Thai Sangha who wished to spread
Buddhism to Australasia, for no Theravada monks had ever been
resident there before. The local people were basically
Christian and this was to be the first Theravada monastery
with monks.
People today all over the world are better
educated, especially about a science that is based on
investigating the actual truth of things. Christianity teaches
reliance on faith and disallows critical analysis of the
teachings of one's faith. This conflicts with modern
scientific principles, and a pope once even punished someone
whose calculations pointed to a spherical world system.
Finally however, everyone — including the later popes — has
accepted and used that theory right up to today.
Buddhist Teaching gives complete freedom to
investigate anything — even the Buddhist Teachings themselves.
This is because the principles on which Buddhism is based are
far higher than those of science. It doesn't just examine and
analyze material things, but is able to detect the underlying
truth of mental phenomena. After penetrating through with
insight, the realized truth is used solely for the peace and
benefit of oneself and others, without causing harm to anyone.
Some people can apply it so that they are able to go beyond
the world — for example the Lord Buddha and the arahants.
It's such a pity that although modern
people receive a superior education, most of them consider
just finishing their course work and securing a degree to be
enough. It may not have even crossed the minds of some people
that the text books that formed the basis of their course had
originated in someone else's understanding — which contained
more than they were able to read in their books. Their
learning is not something original to their own understanding
because true knowledge can only come through individual
experience.
The Buddhist Teaching calls this 'paccatta.m'
— clearly seeing or knowing for oneself — and it arises
from the strength of the cultivated mind that has attained to
stillness and calm, bringing insight and self-transformation.
This is a genuine change from one's old nature to the true
condition that is in line with the Buddhist Noble Truths.
Anyone aiming for clear insight into the
truth of Buddhism needs to combine learning with practice. One
or another alone is not enough. In this time of advanced
education, it becomes necessary for anyone propagating
Buddhism to have trained themselves in both ways. Any
deficiency in this, and the results will not be as good as
might have been expected.
My further advice to Ven. Mahaa Samai was
that he should propagate the whole package. By this, I mean
that besides fully keeping the Patimokkha Rule — the small
size of the group precluded study classes — the other duties
and practices should be maintained. For instance, the
dhutanga practices — these include the going out on alms
round which should also help reduce kitchen expenditures.
The spreading of Buddhism needs study
together with practice so that it can put down roots that will
endure. Ven. Mahaa Samai and all the monks agreed with all my
advice, and decided to carry out such a plan in the future.
I suggested to Ven. Mahaa Samai that there
are three criticisms that are most common concerning the
spreading of Buddhism in other countries:
1. The monks taking advantage of the lay
community by not working but only begging for things.
2. Theravada Sect monks, unlike the other
religions and sects, being 'selfish' and only concerned
about themselves without helping others in need or distress.
3. Theravada monks who, though they
forbid the killing of animals, still eat meat.
Anyone going out to spread Buddhism will be
certain to encounter these criticisms so I advised Ven. Mahaa
Samai to prepare suitable replies and explanations. He could
then answer instantly any of these criticisms.
An even more dangerous hazard is that those
who go to spread Buddhism are unfamiliar with the local ways
and customs. This may cause offence during interactions with
the local residents and can lead to discouragement and
disillusionment, or it may cause one to forget oneself and be
lured away to join in the fun of 'going native'.
Reflections Arising from Australia
As we all know, the history of Australia
describes how it had been a wild place with its peoples
undeveloped... and how Britain had got rid of its convicts and
gangsters by transporting them there... eventually the new
people organized themselves and energetically developed
agriculture and then supplied raw materials to the expanding
industries of the world... until its present prosperity was
established... Australia is endowed with many natural mineral
resources and an enormous land area, although its population
is only thirteen million... They don't just sit back enjoying
their prosperity but try to develop it even further.
Let's turn to have a close look at this
Thai City of Angels of ours. If we go into town, we
cannot see a single 'angel' for its streets are crowded with
loafers and layabouts. People haven't 'developed', nor do they
know what that means. They mistakenly think that when
something is finished there will be no need for any more work
in the future. Children are delighted when they become
teenagers. It's only when they become old that they realize it
was just a stage on the way to old age.
Materials have to be removed and lost from
somewhere in order for them to be brought to construct the
well-planned and attractive city with its traffic system. It
just shows how they take things from here to improve things
over there. We come to growth because of food, and yet that
involves destroying the lives of other animals and crops.
Going along our way, we are only concerned with getting to our
destination and have no thought that the base and origin from
which we set forth is being left far behind, step following
step. Don't just look ahead with your 'front-facing eyes' but
also use wisdom to check behind. The truth that will free us
from careless delusions and bring us to the Noble Truths of
the Lord Buddha's Teachings can then be seen.
33.3 Visiting Indonesia
From Australia we went back to Singapore
and on the twenty-fourth of December 1976, continued on to
Indonesia. All the people I knew seemed to be there — Ven.
Chao Khun Suviirañaa.n', Ven. Phra Khru Dhammadhornsombat',
Ven. Sudhammo, Ven. Aggapaalo and Ven. Khemiyo. They all had
gathered to await me at Jakarta airport with members of the
local Buddhist Society. I had the opportunity to visit other
places besides Jakarta, for example Bandung, Jogjakarta,
Mendut, Samarang, Surabaya and Bali.
I visited Buddhist Societies and the
Buddhist monasteries that our Dhammaduuta monks coming
from Thailand to spread Buddhism had established. Ven. Chao
Khun Vidhoondhammaaporn' was the head of the organization that
had built monasteries that included Wat Majjhimasaasanawong'
that adjoined the Mendut Chedi, Wat Dhammapadiipaaraam' in
Badoo, Malang and Surabaya. I viewed each site with delight
and noted that the local Buddhists, women and men, young and
old, would without fail come every evening to chant their
devotions. Afterwards there would be a sermon from a monk who
would then lead them in meditation.
Some Views of Mine
Going around Indonesia I saw venerable
sites and objects that had the features of a syncretic
religion. I couldn't help but feel saddened by this and
reflect on the situation in Thailand. Who can deny the great
value of memorials and venerable sites — one only has to look
at Indonesia. All the monks and scriptures have disappeared,
we cannot even say when it happened, but anyhow their sacred
sites remain for the minority Buddhists.
My thoughts went back to Thailand with its
immense wealth of religious objects and sacred Buddhist sites,
more numerous even than in Indonesia. However many immense and
amazing monuments Indonesia may have, they can't compare with
the beauty of our Shrines and Uposatha Halls. Nowhere else in
the world are there such inspiring and worthy sites. I am
absolutely convinced that if only the Thai people were to
study and come to a true understanding of Buddhism, their
correct practice would make it impossible for other sects and
ideologies to overwhelm and obliterate Buddhism from Thailand.
Ven. Chao Khun Suviirañaa.n', Ven. Phra
Khru Dhammadhornsombat' and Ven. Sudhammo were our guides
throughout our tour of Indonesia and they looked after us very
well. Although Ven. Chao Khun Vidhoondhammaaporn' was away in
Bangkok, it became obvious to me how greatly they respected
him there, for even small children knew of him when his name
was mentioned. This gives me trust in his devotion the
sacrifices he's made for the Buddhist Teachings which make him
an important asset for Somdet Phra Ñaa.nasangworn, the present
Supreme Patriarch of Thailand.
Many centuries have passed since the first
Thai delegation of monks went to spread Buddhism overseas.
This present endeavor in Indonesia seems to me to be the most
effective and fruitful since Ven. Chao Khun Phra Upali of the
Ayutthaya213
period led a group of fifteen monks to help re-establish
Buddhism in Sri Lanka... It is a shame that there are so few
capable monks for they are a great boon to Buddhism and to the
international community, for nowadays they are much in demand.
"When the giver has something in demand, shouldn't he give
it to those in need?" Or is it that the Thai Sangha that
numbers tens of thousands of monks is so impoverished that it
doesn't have anything to offer them!
At this time, some of the people of
Indonesia are finding inspiration again in Buddhism and...
totally dedicating themselves to it... even when the monks had
been unable to visit, they had formed themselves into Buddhist
Societies, and they were all certain that the Buddhist revival
would continue into the future... in accordance with a
five-hundred-year-old legend.
May all revered and worthy monks spread
their loving-kindness towards Indonesia, to reverence the
Buddhist religion and recollect the great compassion of the
Lord Buddha.
33.4 Feelings about Going Overseas
After traveling around these various
countries — Australia, Indonesia and going through Singapore
three times — we arrived back in Bangkok on the 24th of
January 1977. We had been away for a little over two months.
Although this may seem a short period, I certainly found it to
be much more valuable than I had expected.
Quite a few people in Singapore and
Australia had shown a genuine interest in studying Dhamma.
This was most evident in Indonesia where their enthusiasm and
earnestness had grown even more following the teaching I had
been able to give. After going and witnessing this for myself,
I had to feel sympathetic towards them. Though they have few
teachers, they manage for the most part to continue with the
practice.
I have written about these teachings in
Dhamma Questions and Answers from Abroad, while a more
detailed description of our journey is found in An Account
of Traveling Abroad. Anyone interested can read about it
in these publications.214
The durian fruit215
is thick skinned and has sharp prickles to protect its inner
flesh. Whoever wants to eat it must carefully turn it around
to find the seam between the segments and split it open along
that line. You have probably partaken of this choice fruit and
know its delicious flavor. What is there in this world that is
impeccably good and right in its every aspect? The art of
knowing how to get at the good part of the durian fruit is
similar to wise people who know how to train themselves and
practice so as to develop flawless virtue.
Among human beings of every gender, age
group, race or tongue — and this extends to the animal kingdom
— you probably won't find even one who doesn't admit to
desiring their own happiness while abhorring suffering. It is
because of these two conditions that all the sentient beings
of the world struggle to find a way out of their loathed
suffering and attain to the state of happiness that they
desire.
This struggle sometimes becomes apparent in
the striving for development and progress. Although this
development may seem to be a logical advance, with proper
inspection, one will find that it is a very one-sided
progress. The other side being a fall into degeneration and
retrogression. The experience of suffering is of enormous
value on the road to progress and development — (it gives the
impetus to increasing cleverness so that one can survive). Yet
at the same time, and in manifold ways, one brings more
turmoil and distress into the world.
I had never gone abroad before, except when
I had gone for morning alms round by boat, paddling across the
River Mekong to the Laotian city of Vientiane, and then
returning to my monastery. Yet here I was, with one foot in
the grave, going away with people on an overseas's trip. I
can't say that I saw anything worth getting excited about,
other than seeing how the people and animals live in each
country. Conditions were basically identical to what I already
knew in Thailand and Laos, except the minor differences
arising from local preferences.
All countries are in agreement on the one
essential issue — an abhorrence of suffering and the struggle
to overcome it. Thus the situation is that neither we nor any
other creature wish to suffer, yet we are born encircled by
these two conditions. We therefore need to reflect on how we
should proceed with our lives regarding the three things that
I will explain below. Each of us must live in a right, moral,
Dhamma way. The results of misunderstanding this and going
astray will not just entail failure to achieve happiness for
oneself and others, but will also multiply the suffering and
turmoil for both oneself and others.
Whether they are influential, intelligent
and knowledgeable, whether they are wealthy or poor, they all
come up with the same excuses when talking about the virtues
of Dhamma and its moral restraint. "I did it because of
social pressure. It was what they expected of me."
Recognize the fact that society is corrupt, and start to
question your own role in it — why shouldn't each of us be
able to help in correcting things? Why shouldn't we be able to
counter the bad influences and develop a good and beneficial
society?
Family. Society. Livelihood. These three
things will advance smoothly in an orderly peaceful way if
their development accords with the Dhamma principles for lay
people (the Gihipa.tipatti),216
as set down by the Lord Buddha. A lack of harmonization will
cause one's way of life to become worthless and it will only
bring conflict. It is Dhamma with virtue that guides the world
to happiness. The development of any nation, ideology or
system — whether it is of material or administrative progress
— that is deficient in such Dhamma virtue won't bring complete
happiness to the heart. Dhamma requires that each person
withdraws from bad conduct and becomes fearful about
initiating corrupt behavior together. This is the true and
supreme progress for the family, for society, for the
advancement of the standard of living and for the nation as a
whole.
My journey was facilitated in every way by
the management — especially Air Force Lt. General Choo and
Khun Supharp Sutthichot' — and staff of Thai International
Airways... They helped arrange my passport and visas, and all
along the way gave me exceptional assistance... I must give a
special mention to Khun Sutthiphon Kansut and his wife (Khun
Dtik) who arranged so much for us in Jakarta, with air tickets
and accompanying me safely to Singapore and later Indonesia.
So my special thanks to everyone who helped our party...
Approximately two months after our return,
the lay people in Singapore invited me to go back to see
whether there was a suitable site to build a monastery, as a
center for teaching meditation. I went, but although we looked
at about ten different sites, none of them seemed suitable. In
one way this was a good thing, for if we had indeed built a
monastery, the taking care of it would have become an extra
burden for me.
34. Fifty-fifth and Fifty-sixth Rains
Retreat, 1977-1978
This Conditioned Body is the Va.tacakra
The bodily aggregate is the endlessly
turning wheel of birth and death.217
The heart of one without training must also spin with it,
while anyone who has practiced will grow tired and weary of
the whole affair. My body had been like this when, in 1964, I
had left our group in Phuket. Even when I was sitting quietly,
my voice had become so dried out and hoarse that I could no
longer speak.
It happened again when some newly ordained
monks — (medical students218
from Siriraj Hospital) — came to train under me. Straight
after they had left, my old symptoms returned and I came down
with various minor complaints. My voice was left hoarse and
weak, and it has never been the same since. Dr. Rote invited
me to go to Siriraj Hospital in Bangkok for a general medical
examination. The tests there found no particular disease
except the illness of old age — this is the nature of the
cycle of birth and death. This is what befalls all bodily and
mental phenomena and only the circumstances will differ.
35. Fifty-seventh Rains Retreat up to the
Present, 1979-1991
Twenty-seven Years at Wat Hin Mark Peng
Thinking back over those twenty-seven years
that I have been in Wat Hin Mark Peng — what a long time it
seems! If one were a lay person that would be more than enough
time to establish a comfortable position and standard of
living. Being an elderly monk, I take care of the monastery,
which is the normal role for old monks everywhere. I can no
longer get around as I once could, and even if I were able to
go, there is no forest left for tudong wandering like
in the old days. They have cut it all down.
The number of devotees219
also seems to be multiplying daily and wherever I go, more
'children' appear — born from the word rather than the womb.
They have trailed after me ever since 1978, when Air Force
General Harin Hongsakun invited me to go into the solitude of
Orb Luang, Jormtong District of Chiang Mai Province. A crowd
of people trailed after me, and instead of being able to cut
down on food and bodily comforts, and get down to meditation —
the opposite occurred. They provided a banquet, with cushions
and a luxurious bed on which to sleep.
When the Four Requisites of clothing, food,
shelter and medicine become extravagant and overabundant, they
can become an obstacle to the development of the beginner's
meditation. A very wealthy and affluent monastery will tend
towards dissension and disharmony, and its Dhamma study will
not progress as it should. It is the same with the everyday
world where an excess of wealth and affluence can become a
threat to the whole community. The leaders and officials
become corrupt and swindle the public and government,
plundering the country and dividing the spoils. Contention
arises among them when their vested interests don't agree. Any
influential merchant or citizen who gets in their way is
killed and so countless deaths occur. This is why the Lord
Buddha said:
"Sakkaaro kaapurisa.m hanti" —
"Power and influence destroy men of inferior wisdom."
The longer one stays in the same place, the
more roots are put down. Lay devotees come to the monastery
and notice features that aren't quite perfect or beautiful
enough, which inspires them to build more permanent
replacement structures that are more attractively designed.
These beautiful buildings then need looking
after, for not to do so would be an offence against the monks'
Discipline. Need one ask who the caretaker is? It's this old
monk of course. Teaching and training all the monks and
novices who come here how to sit, to lie down, to eat, to go
on alms round and all the various duties and obligations,
including study requirements — this all falls on the shoulders
of this old monk. They give one the title of senior
incumbent and that seems quite fitting as one is truly
encumbered. This though is unavoidable and one has to do
one's best with the situation until the end of one's life.
The Virtue and Merit of Buddhism
I called to mind my teachers and the great
masters of the past, the Lord Buddha being the prime example
and how they led and guided the Teaching. The thought arose
that I too had managed, step by step, to help guide this
development along. My birth as a human being had not been
wasted. Furthermore, I had ordained as a Buddhist monk and had
fulfilled my obligations.
Whenever people paid respect or made
offerings to me, I always thought: 'What are they
venerating? They and I are identical — in that we are all
conglomerations of the elements of earth, water, fire and air.
They must at least be honoring the saffron robe which is the
emblem and banner of the arahants. Such faith sustains the
religion, and although conviction from within may be
half-hearted, they have trust in what has been passed down to
them'.
I am fully aware of the immense virtue and
value of Buddhism. Since my going forth and ordination, it has
supported and nurtured me towards becoming a good and virtuous
person. The Teaching has never led me to commit the slightest
immoral deed.
Yet even so, we are always resisting and
being recalcitrant towards it and continuing our evil ways.
Our dwelling and sleeping places, our sleeping mat, pillow,
and mosquito net, the food we eat — everything we daily pick
up and use here, the whole lot belongs to the Buddha's
Teaching. The medicines to treat any illness we might develop,
belong to the faithful Buddhist devotees who selflessly donate
them.
When we first ordain as monks we are
completely dependent on the saffron robe, the emblem of the
Noble Ones, which our Preceptor and Teachers bestow on us.
(One's Preceptor and Teachers are simply the representatives
of the Buddhist Teachings because they have all, without
exception, taken refuge in the Triple Gem.) When one has
received this matchless apparel, the people bow their respects
and support one with floods of offerings. I have been able to
survive to the present day because of this Teaching. Buddhism
has brought infinite and untold virtue and blessings to me
personally, and to all of us in the world.
Coming to live here, wherever I have been
before, I have always done whatever I could, provided my
health was up to it, to build a basis of solid durable
constructions for Buddhism. Now that I am old and don't have
enough strength for building projects, lay devotees become
inspired to sponsor the constructions that will stand in for
me in the future. We have shared any resources that are left
over out among other monasteries.
Yet I will never become a slave to bricks,
concrete and wood because I know that such materials are just
external things. Despite their beauty and stylish design, no
matter how many millions they cost, if we behave immorally
they all become hollow and completely meaningless.
The true core or heart of Buddhism does not
lie in material things, but in individual actions. This has
been my guiding principle. The going forth in ordination has
been termed nekkhamma or renunciation because it is the
giving up of all forms of sensuality. Having resolved to train
oneself — following the Noble Truth of the Lord Buddha's
Teaching — to escape from all suffering, one should not then
bury oneself under a pile of bricks and mortar.
... These sorts of building projects220
tend to be the source of great complications and difficulties
and they mainly fail through lack of adequate resources —
especially lack of moral virtue. Success makes one feel happy
and warm inside, whereas failure brings the tearing of hair
and agitation. I never allowed such feelings about my
projects, and remained quite impartial and unconcerned about
whether or not they would succeed.
I think of every project as just a part of
the duties of the religion. The resources all come from the
devotees for I myself have no wealth. When the work is
completed, it benefits Buddhism and brings much merit to the
lay devotees. There should be no need to solicit contributions
for that only brings annoyance so that people become fatigued
with the whole business. I was able to complete all the
projects because of donations that came in from all
directions, including overseas contributions. Any offerings —
such as Ka.thina and Sangha-daana — towards Wat Hin
Mark Peng were kept specifically for that purpose,... while
any contributions given to me and intended for my personal use
— from one baht to ten, a hundred... to even millions —
I have channelled all into the various community projects that
I have already mentioned. Funds for this never seem to have
dried up, and there remains a strong interest in aiding my
projects... I myself don't seem to have retrogressed because
of this and everything has gone smoothly. Saadhu! Saadhu!
Saadhu! [It is well!] Past merit seems to have
enabled me to be successful in this.
I have never gone out looking for even a
penny, but funds have rolled in from all directions. I've
become something like a 'central reserve bank' for
those Buddhists who want their funds directed to what will be
most beneficial for Buddhism... Administrating these funds can
be difficult because of the lack of records... But somehow I
have smoothly managed them... by allowing sufficient to
accumulate in a project-fund — for Sala, Uposatha Hall etc. —
to complete the work then totally clearing its account.
Any monk engaging in such management needs
to be absolutely sure of his ability and his incorruptibility,
otherwise he should not involve himself. If one goes against
this principle, it will damage the Buddhism that one respects
so much, and will also lead to one's own downfall. There are
examples of this everywhere. This 'Capital M'[-oney]
can be quite deadly and has already destroyed many people.
Aiming solely for the benefit of Buddhism
and the common good, without taking selfish advantage will be
of great fruit, whereas undertaking anything for selfish
motives will bring unfortunate results. It will be very
damaging if one tries to get something for oneself while
pursuing Buddhist projects. This is even more so for some
'monks'. After involving themselves in building works, such
projects seem to take them over, and their inner spiritual
work and discipline are all abandoned. They build outwardly
but fail to build their inner selves, and this leads to great
decline.
36. Summary
It is now about sixty years since I first
saw the forest here and it was 1964 when I actually came to
live here. I have steadily developed it since that time and
you can see the results with your own eyes. The important
point being that this all arose through the faith and energy
of my disciples, both monks and lay people, who contributed
whatever they could — whether labor or money. There are more
of them than I can ever hope to mention.
The Supreme Patriarch of Thailand (the late
Somdet Phra Vaasana Mahaathera) graciously came to officiate
at the ceremonial opening of the Mondop.221
He was very pleased and officially declared Wat Hin Mark Peng
to be a 'Model Monastery' in the development field, and gave
me official recognition of this on the twenty-sixth of May
1982. This marks quite an honor for the monastery.
I really hope that Wat Hin Mark Peng may
continue to be a place for monks to practice for the
long-lasting benefit of Buddhism. Therefore may all of you who
have helped in the support of Wat Hin Mark Peng be happy, long
prosper and be firmly established in the noble Buddhist
Teaching.
I have been a monk now for sixty-eight
years and I have tried to practice only for the benefit of
myself and others, starting with myself and then carrying this
further for the good of others. By this I mean that I could go
on tudong with great meditation teachers, starting with
my very first year as a monk. I was determined to practice
following the instruction of my Teachers, and as I had no
other responsibilities to occupy me I could apply myself fully
to the task.
In later years, I was able to be away from
them and therefore had to accept many responsibilities. A
group of monks started following me and I had regularly to
instruct the lay people. In those days because there were so
few forest meditation monks, when lay people saw anyone with a
following of monks they would immediately consider him an 'Ajahn'
or Teacher and would trail after him. Even when it was like
that I never slackened with my meditation efforts, and even
saw it as a stimulus to practice even harder. This then became
of benefit, both to myself and others.
To be truly of benefit to others requires
that one first be of benefit to oneself. One is then able to
share what one has with other people. If no one shows interest
in receiving it, one hasn't lost anything. This has been part
of my practice ever since I was ordained.
On HM the King's birthday on the fifth of
December 1990, I received by his order the ecclesiastical
title of Ven. Phra Rajanirodharangsee Gambhiirapaññaavisit'
Yatiga.nsasorn Bowornsanghaaraam Araññavaasee. I have already
described my feelings about such ecclesiastical titles,222...
and I haven't changed my mind,... but they explained to me
that this was the way the king of Thailand always showed his
appreciation for the work and responsibilities of senior
monks,... and when they increased their good works so their
title would be elevated. I am just a forest monk and I can
only reflect on the gracious favor and offer my blessing —
Anumodanaa! — to HM the King.
36.1 The Blessings and Beneficence of
Parents
We believe that having been born together
in this world we all owe each other mutual benefit and
welfare. Children are indebted to their parents and parents
have new obligations towards their children. Each remembers
their debt to the other without any thought of calling it in.
The recalling to oneself of one's parental debt will, however,
enable one to repay it, according to one's perception of it —
for some this will be great, for others small. One got into
this form of debt by one's own actions without coercion from
anyone else, and so no one else can take it over.
People acknowledge their parental debt in
innumerable ways. They recall that from their first until
their last day, they had been and always would be cared for
with love and devotion in every way. For instance, they had to
rely on mother and father in learning how to sit up, to lie
down, to stand up, to walk and to talk — for everything. When
their parents became angry with them and smacked or caned
them, the parents had also held back somewhat, remembering
that "this is my child". Sometimes they couldn't bring
themselves to do it.
There is a natural instinct in all beings
for parents to love their offspring, and this includes even
the animals. They love without thinking or knowing why, or
what they can gain from it, and the children respond in the
same way. The bonding between animals however is short-lived
and only occurs while the offspring are still small, for with
maturity it is all lost. Human love and affection knows no
end. It endures until death and even beyond. The person who
doesn't acknowledge the goodness and beneficence of his
parents, and who doesn't repay their kindness is base and
worse than an animal.
I'm going to boast a bit here: I was born
their son, but my ordination while still young prevented me
from providing my parents with the material support that
everyone usually gives. However my life as a monk allowed me
to sustain and nourish their heart's aspirations and good
will, and that was what they appreciated beyond all else. They
could constantly call to mind that: "our own son is a monk!".
No matter how near or far away — even a thousand kilometres
distant — they could still be happy and content because their
aspirations had been fulfilled.
When both my parents became older, I
returned to teach and fortify their faith until both decided
to ordain and wear white robes. (Of course they already had
faith. I was able to encourage and reinforce it so that they
felt confident enough to ordain.) Their meditation brought
them many remarkable experiences that strengthened their faith
even more. I taught them about the path to happiness (Sugati)
and both would attentively listen to me as pupils listen to
their teacher. They received all the teaching with open
hearts, not worrying that a 'child should be teaching his
parents'.
My father was a white robed chee pa-kao
for eleven years before his passing away, at the age of
seventy-seven. My mother was a white-robed nun for seventeen
years, and died after my father when she was eighty-two. I
taught them right up to their final moments, offering all the
advice I possible could, and I really feel that I was able
completely to repay my debt to them. I had no other
outstanding debts. I organized funeral ceremonies suitable to
their position and in accordance with my being a monk.
Being ordained as a Buddhist monk for so
long has allowed me to see the changing condition of this
aging body with the transformations in the external world.
I've seen so many things, both good and bad, and it has
greatly expanded my wisdom and knowledge. I don't feel that I
have wasted being born into the world with them. I consider
that I have been indebted to this world for I have taken its
elements of earth, water, fire and air to form a body. In
maintaining it I have had to absorb and use the things of the
world, for absolutely nothing of it belongs to me. After death
everything must be left behind in this world.
Some people never consider such issues and
by that fall into unyieldingly grasping hold of things —
'everything is mine!'. Husband, wife, children and
grandchildren, household possessions — 'they are all mine'.
To the end, even when those things disappear or are broken,
they still retain their hold on them as 'mine'.
36.2 Activity that should not to be
Performed
Kamma that should not to be Made
There is activity that we should not
perform, yet having been born it has to be undertaken. We
have been born with this self that is called 'conditioned'223
and so, as a matter of course, we must grow old, become ill
and die. Not a single person wants it to be like that —
becoming old and decrepit until one can no longer go anywhere.
No one wants to die, not to see their children and
grandchildren's faces again. After death those that remain,
even if they are the children of the deceased, will not keep
the corpse at home for more than fifteen days, and most people
will take it away for cremation. There it is, the 'activity
that we should not undertake'. One respects them so highly
and then throws them on the fire — yet this has become a
necessary action. No one is going to keep the corpse at home.
The kamma224
that should not be made occurs after someone's death.
It doesn't matter who it is, one's father, mother, brothers,
sisters or other relatives including one's respected Teachers,
there have to be funeral rites. This requires a lot more labor
and material things than at the time of birth, which succeeded
with just the two — mother and father.
Funeral rites entail the feeding and
receiving of guests, lay people and monks, and the finding of
offerings for the monks. For those left behind who are not so
well off this is no small burden. When they don't have enough,
they have to borrow from relatives and friends, and so go
further into debt. This sort of debt has absolutely no
advantage and brings only loss. Still, anyone who is
practicing generosity will treat it as a meritorious deed,
which is a sort of profit for oneself. However one
takes it, it is still 'something that we should not
undertake' and yet, when those still living are confronted
with this situation they feel obligated.
36.3 Coming to Birth — Dying
Coming to birth and dying are not the same
for human beings of this world. In being born there is a
sequence dependent on the parents. Whoever is born before is
called 'elder', and whoever comes after is 'younger'. Dying is
not like that. Whether one dies first or later depends on the
results of one's kamma, each according to his or her
own. Sometimes the younger dies before the elder or vice
versa. After death one doesn't necessarily have to go on
to be reborn as siblings, for again this depends on the
results of kamma. One who has committed evil may be
born as a preta or fall into deepest hell, into
avicii.225
Those who have purified their heart and transcended the mass
of suffering will attain even to Nibbana. It all depends.
I think that I have completely repaid my
debt to my parents who have passed away... I was their
youngest son and I've accomplished whatever duties were
appropriate for a monk towards them both. Both probably
thought the same about this, and wouldn't have wanted to call
in any debt of mine, because it had all worked out as they
wished.
Ajahn Kumdee Ree-o rahng, my eldest
brother, loved me very dearly, and I was sorry that he died
when I was away spending the Rains Retreat in Chantaburi
Province. I was unable to arrange his funeral in a way
commensurate with his love for me. When my other elder
brothers and sisters were still alive, I was able to teach
them about virtue and Dhamma, each according to their
temperament and potential, so that when they were about to
die, they had some refuge in the heart. They hadn't wasted
their life, for on meeting the Lord Buddha's Teachings they
had practiced as much as they could, according to their
ability.
Mrs. Ahn Prahp-phahn, my eldest sister and
the second child, passed away in 1974 at the age of
eighty-eight.
Mrs. Naen Chiang-tong, my elder sister and
the third child, passed away in 1978 at the age of ninety.
Mr. Plian Ree-o rahng, my elder brother and
the fourth child, passed away in 1972 at the age of eighty.
Mrs. Noo-an Glah Kaeng, my elder sister and
the fifth child, passed away in 1973 at the age of
seventy-nine.
Ven. Phra Gate, my elder brother and the
sixth child, passed away in 1946 at the age of forty-eight
with fourteen years as a monk.
Mrs. Thoop Dee-man, my younger sister,
passed away on the sixteenth of May 1990 at the age of
eight-six.
I made sure that all my brothers and
sisters received the complete and proper funeral that they
would have expected.226
This was especially so with the youngest, Mrs. Thoop Dee-man,
who in the last part of her life came to receive training with
me as a white-robed nun at Wat Hin Mark Peng.
She seems to have secured good results from
her meditation practice that stood her in good stead when she
became very ill, in the final part of her life. Her children
came and took her away for hospital treatment in Sakhon Nakorn
Province. They told me that her mindfulness was good and she
was aware right up to the final moments. She had described
what she was feeling to her children and grandchildren who
were caring for her: that her feet were becoming cold, that
the coldness had reached her calves, her knees and her chest.
She mindfully concentrated on her chest and her breathing
became fainter and fainter and finally everything became
still.
Now I have to depend on myself, for all my
relatives and Meditation Masters are no longer available. I
will continue to do good until no life remains because after
death no one else can do either good or evil for us.
This autobiography has now reached my
eighty-ninth year and I think I will finish with this much.
Translator's Epilogue227
In November 1992, Venerable Ajahn Thate
again fell ill with a lung infection. Complications set in
with symptoms of heart disease and prostrate problems, and
while treatment helped his health was never as strong as
before.
As described previously,228
Venerable Ajahn Thate had always found Wat Tam Khahm to be an
especially good place for both his Dhamma practice and his
health. So in March 1993, he moved from Wat Hin Mark Peng to
take up residence at Wat Tam Khahm, in the mountains of Sakhon
Nakorn Province. Ven. Ajahn Kiem Sorayo was the abbot there
and was very happy to welcome his venerable guest.
Venerable Ajahn Thate's health then
gradually improved and he amazed everyone with his renewed
vigour and appetite. At his ninety-second birthday
celebrations, he praised the local people of Sakhon Nakorn as
the most supportive and caring of all. He told them that he
was sorry not to have come to stay there when he was younger,
when he could have taught them more.
However, during May of 1994, Venerable
Ajahn Thate's condition again changed for the worse with a
deterioration in his strength and appetite. A medical
professor and his team came and discovered a gall bladder
obstruction — from gall bladder stones or perhaps from a
growth. Despite Venerable Ajahn Thate's advanced age of
ninety-two, they tried their utmost to nurse him back to
health so that he could continue his teaching for another
couple of years.
A few days before the start of the Rains
Retreat, Venerable Ajahn Thate spoke privately about his
personal affairs. He charged that if he should die his body
should first be kept at Wat Tam Khahm but that the cremation
should take place at Wat Hin Mark Peng.229
When his disciple took this opportunity to ask how long his
body should be kept, Venerable Ajahn Thate replied that that
should come from the general agreement of everyone involved.
Although Venerable Ajahn Thate was
obviously frail and in pain during most of the Rains Retreat
of 1994, he never complained or displayed any upset. He was a
shining example of the good Dhamma practitioner to those monks
who were taking care of him.
On the morning of Saturday, 17 December
1994, after some liquidized food and his medicine, Ven. Ajahn
Thate was, as usual, taken around in his wheelchair for some
'mobile meditation'. (With his infirmity, this had come to
replace his normal walking meditation). After thirty minutes
he said he was tired and went back to bed. His body seemed
somewhat restless so his disciples played a tape of one of his
own Dhamma talks on meditation. He confirmed to the monks
that, 'it was certainly necessary to set (the mind) in
neutrality'. Later in the day, after another 'wheel-around' he
agreed that he was tired and so was helped into bed. This was
at nine o'clock in the evening.
The attendant monk respectfully suggested
to the Venerable Ajahn that he should fix his attention on
going to sleep so that he could wake up rested and strong. He
nodded in agreement and almost immediately became still. His
attendant noticed how easily he had gone to sleep and knowing
that he usually slept on his right side230
the attendant called on another monk to help turn him to that
side, thinking that he could rest longer in that position.
The monks massaged Venerable Ajahn Thate's
hands as he slept and noticed that he was very still without
any movement at all — abnormally so. (Some saliva was
dribbling from his mouth but the monks thought that was
because he had drunk so much herbal medicine.) The peaceful
look on his face meant that the monks attending did not have
an inkling that the Venerable Ajahn Thate had in fact already
passed away.
Venerable Ajahn Thate's Funeral
An ending of such great dignity and peace
perfectly completes a life lived that way. His life had
touched many, many, people and this became manifest in the
funeral and cremation rites. When news spread about his
passing, local monks and villagers immediately started coming
to pay their last respects. It was announced that HM the King
of Thailand would officially sponsor the funeral rites.
As Venerable Ajahn Thate had previously
ordered, his body was first kept at Wat Tam Khahm and then
moved to Wat Hin Mark Peng. This is a bigger monastery and so
much more appropriate for dealing with the funeral
arrangements for the cremation was obviously to be a national
event.
The cremation of Venerable Ajahn Thate took
place on 8 January, 1996. People from all over Thailand — led
by HM the King and the royal family — came to pay their final
respects. Each region where the Venerable Ajahn had stayed
seemed to be represented — even from overseas — so it was as
if even in death he was still able to bring people together.
It is estimated that there were ten thousand monks present and
many hundreds of thousands of lay people. (The temporary car
park was filled with up to thirty thousand vehicles, including
many small and large buses from all parts of Thailand.) Yet
even with such numbers, it was arranged in a fitting and
appropriate way and all accomplished through volunteer help
and finance. (There were free food stalls and refreshments,
showing the spirit of generosity that is so vital a part of
the Lord Buddha's Teaching. Also half a million memorial books
of Venerable Ajahn Thate's teachings were distributed to those
present.)
The good weather allowed the arrangements
to proceed smoothly. HM the King honored Venerable Ajahn Thate
with royal sponsored funeral rites and the full panoply of
ancient custom and ritual. When all was ready, HM the King
flew in by helicopter officially to lead the making of
offerings and light the cremation fire. The monks followed
this, filing past the coffin, then the dignitaries with all
the ordinary people who had supported Venerable Ajahn Thate
for more than seventy years as a monk.
The actual cremation took place later that
night with a full moon shining down on the crematorium, lake
and fountain, specially built for the occasion. (The
crematorium is an imposing structure with traditional Thai
tiered-roofs.) These remain as a landmark and memorial to
Venerable Ajahn Thate when devotees come to practice Dhamma
and remember his example.
The next morning, when the fire was cooled,
the bones and ashes of Venerable Ajahn Thate were reverently
removed and safeguarded as relics.
Thus ends the biography of Venerable Ajahn
Thate. It started in a remote village at the beginning of the
century and closed more than ninety years later surrounded by
hundreds of thousands of disciples, including the King of
Thailand. Along the Way, Venerable Ajahn Thate had continually
taught and that continues in the practice he inspired and the
books and taped talks he left behind — including this book.
Appendix A
Siila: Precepts231
Anyone — of any religion or none — can
appreciate the basic Buddhist guidelines for action and
speech. There is no dogma hidden among these precepts for it
is a plain and simple way of living without harming or hurting
any creature. The other feature to bear in mind is that it is
something that the individual accepts voluntarily. No one
commands one to receive them. It is the individual's volition
that changes a list of precepts into a way of living. The
appreciation and mindfulness of one's actions and speech then
become more subtle, which automatically leads on to
meditation.
There are the basic Five Precepts and these
become more refined with the Eight Precepts.
These Precepts can be received by simply
saying:
"I undertake the training rule/precept... "
-
1) "to abstain from taking life.
-
2) to abstain from taking what is not
given.
-
3) to abstain from sexual misconduct.
-
4) to abstain from false speech.
-
5) to abstain from intoxicants causing
heedlessness."
or:
-
1) "to abstain from taking life.
-
2) to abstain from taking what is not
given.
-
3) to abstain from unchastity.
-
4) to abstain from false speech.
-
5) to abstain from intoxicants causing
heedlessness.
-
6) to abstain from untimely eating.
-
7) to abstain from dancing, singing,
music and unseemly shows, from wearing garlands, smartening
with scents, and embellishment with unguents.
-
8) to abstain from the use of high and
large luxurious couches."
Appendix B
The Dhamm' Characters as Written by Venerable Ajahn Fan
Aacaaro232
"... In 1982 the compiler brought a copy of
her book, Aajaaraa-phiwaht, (???) to show Venerable
Ajahn Thate. It was the commemorative book for the royal
opening of the chedi and museum of the late Ven. Ajahn Fan
Aacaaro. On leafing through the book, he came across a sample
of Ven. Ajahn Fan's handwriting using the dhamm'
characters and asked whether the compiler of the book could
understand them. When she admitted her ignorance, Venerable
Ajahn Thate smiled and remarked that it was a shame that such
knowledge was disappearing so fast, and that future
generations would be completely ignorant of it... Just a few
days later, Venerable Ajahn Thate kindly gave her the
translation beautifully typed out. The original dhamm'
characters and his translation appear below, together with his
explanation:..."
{image omitted from this edition — JB}
'Wise people are those that are able to
prevent the arising of evil in their personality. There is a
simile about a person planting a tree, a mango tree for
example. The person steadily tends and cares for it, stopping
any growth of parasitical creepers or pests because he is
afraid that otherwise the tree will not flourish, and won't be
fruitful. This is similar to the body of the wise person. It
is natural for such a person to guard against wrong actions of
body, speech and mind, so that they don't become the source
for sadness and depression. Thus the Sakavati-Ajahn Teacher
inquires into the first part of the Maatikaa which is "kusala
dhamma...". He translates correctly and adds more similes so
that I come to understand.'
"I wrote down the Thai translation of this
text so that my readers can compare and understand its
meaning. This Dhamm' alphabet is fast becoming extinct because
nobody studies it anymore. Except, that is, for those who were
ordained sixty years ago and learned it then. The Thai
alphabet was then not so widespread and the monks had to learn
the Dhamm' characters. We learned from actually reading the
palm leaf manuscripts rather than just learning the vowels and
consonants.
The subject matter was always about the
Buddha's Teachings. For instance, about generosity, morality
and meditation; about the heavenly fruits of good deeds and
the dreadful results in hell of bad deeds. After studying one
or two manuscripts one could read them all.
In former days, in the time of Wiang-jan
(Vientiane), the people still flourished and prospered with
the Lord Buddha's Teachings. They studied using three
alphabets: Dhamm', Korm, and 'Small Thai' (???).
They called them Dhamm' characters because
they were only used for Dhamma, the Teachings of the Lord
Buddha. An exception being those monks who disrobed after many
years and used their knowledge to gain a living in astrology
or herbal medicine. Otherwise, these characters were used to
write down magic formula and spells. People then really held
the Dhamm' characters to be sacred and supernaturally
powerful. They considered them the very teaching of the Lord
Buddha and it's true as they thought...
We only studied the Korm characters enough
to know what they were about but did not write in them. If
they were used in writing, again it was only for the Buddha's
Teachings, the same as the Dhamm'. The Lesser ??? Thai script
could be used for anything and is still used to this day in
Vientiane, for that's where it originated but it has evolved a
great deal since then..."
Appendix C
The Buddhist Order of Monks in Thailand
The Buddhist Order of monks (bhikkhus) has
an unbroken lineage of twenty-five centuries. In this world of
growth and decay there is often need for reform as standards
decline. Such reform historically has happened either through
the king inviting knowledgeable monks to come and teach the
ignorant monks, or by an internal process.
In the chaos that followed the destruction
of the old Thai capital of Ayutthaya, the general standard of
the monk's understanding and conduct declined. When Crown
Prince Monkut (later to become King Rama IV) became a monk and
learned the Pali language, he found that there were great
differences between what the texts described and what was
actually practiced. A group of monks gathered around him
intent on trying to follow more strictly the vinaya
Discipline. When his son, King Chulalongkorn (Rama V),
ascended to the throne, he formally acknowledged this reform
group as the Dhammayut' (or Dhammayuttika) Nikaya. As this
reform movement spread in influence, it acted as a catalyst
for general reform. So that the majority grouping — the
Mahaa-Nikaya — reformed itself and the whole Community of
monks became revitalized.
This book spans the time when this reform
movement was spreading, and shows how it also affected the
tudong monks out in the forests.
Appendix D
More Building Projects
Details of building projects abbreviated in
the main text (Section 30) are detailed here:
35.1 The Uposatha Hall of Wat Hin
Mark Peng
Around 1966, Mr. Gong Pewsiri from Koke
Soo-ak Village... made a large Buddha-ruupa on the rocks
facing the River Mekong... using the local rock... and
organized it all himself for about one thousand baht.
It was more than five metres high... but wasn't particularly
beautiful because the workers were just ordinary local
artisans rather than expert craftsmen... several attempts at
remodelling transformed that into what we have today... After
it was finished we built a pavilion around it...
On the twenty-sixth of March, 1970, the
monastery received a royal proclamation establishing its
boundaries (visu.mgaama-siimaa). Seeing that Wat Hin
Mark Peng had now been properly established according to the
law,233
I decided it was the right time to build an Uposatha Hall.
Formal meetings of the monks could then convene according to
the Discipline and that would be for the future growth of the
Buddhist Teaching. The site of the large Buddha-ruupa seemed
ideal, for if we were to build the Uposatha Hall around it we
would have both a main Shrine Hall, and the main presiding
Buddha-ruupa.
The foundation stone-laying ceremony took
place on the twelfth of April 1972, with Somdet Phra Maha
Virawong (Pim Dhammdharo) of Wat Sri Mahaa Dhaatu in Bangkaen,
Bangkok heading the monks and Air force Lt. General Choo
Suddhichot' leading the lay devotees.
They constructed this Uposatha Hall with
tiered double roofs,234
which are seven metres wide and twenty-one metres long, while
the ceiling is nine metres above the floor... in all it cost
about seven hundred thousand baht. The consecration
ceremony... took place between the fifth and seventh of April
1973.
In 1986 the baked clay tile roof was
replaced and it was redecorated inside and out... which cost
more than four hundred and fifty thousand baht.
35.2 Wat Hin Mark Peng's Mondop
In 1972 I thought that this spot on the
bank of the River Mekong would be an ideal site for building a
mondop. It would be an artistic landmark for the Mekong
River basin and have a Buddha-ruupa and Buddha relics. I also
thought to myself that it could be a place to keep my bones...
and then other people would not have to trouble themselves
about finding a place.
... In 1977 things started to happen with
plans being drawn and the Fine Arts Department inspecting and
improving the artistic design... it has three stories and is
thirty-six metres high, with each floor being thirteen metres
square... and the total cost was finally about five million
baht.
35.3 The Desarangsee Hall
... The original sala at Wat Hin
Mark Peng was all wooden with some woven split bamboo sides
and a tin roof... this was replaced by the Sala Desapradit'
that was also made of wood... because of the number of
visitors this gradually became too dilapidated and overcrowded
so... a new two-storied concrete sala was built, twenty-three
metres wide by forty-four metres long... and cost more than
seven and a half million baht. They named it the Sala
Desarangsee B.E. 2529...
35.4 Mural Wall Painting
... Paintings were commissioned in
September 1987... On the central wall they portray scenes from
the Lord Buddha's life... the right-hand wall depicts aspects
of Wat Hin Mark Peng... the left-hand wall portrays Northeast
regional customs and traditions... They took twelve months to
paint at a cost of six hundred and fifty thousand baht....
35.5 The Bell Tower
... A bell that cost sixty thousand baht
was cast and hung in a tower which cost three hundred and
fifty thousand baht....
35.6 Wat Hin Mark Peng's Library
...
35.7 The Drum Tower
...
35.8 Dwelling Places for the Monks
... Huts have been repaired and completely
rebuilt... large or small according to the circumstances...
usually in the Thai Style... until there are now fifty-six
huts or kutis for the monks and novices... with
thirty-seven in the nuns' quarters. The nuns' sala, the
kitchens, toilets, washing facilities, a largish waterworks
and electricity generators... these are valued at not less
than ten million baht....
35.9 The Monastery Perimeter Wall
... Since 1965, the monastery became ever
more solidly established... with its area also expanding
through donations. In 1985 the local District Officer helped
arrange official acknowledgement of this with land deeds from
the Department of Land for two hundred and sixty-one rai...
It was the first place in that region to have legal claim to
the land.
... seeing the expansion of the local
villages and the already established nature of the
monastery... I thought it would be good to mark the boundaries
clearly with a perimeter wall... the provincial Accelerated
Rural Development prepared the site and it was built in 1986
at a cost of more than one and a half million baht.
Celebrating HM The King's Fifth Cycle
Anniversary
After finishing all these building
projects... according to plan... I thought it would be
appropriate that everyone who had helped could come together
and see the results... and also take the opportunity to
celebrate HM the King's Fifth Cycle Anniversary.235...
So on the twenty-fifth and twenty-sixth of April 1987 many
senior monks and lay people came together to honor HM the
King, to admire the completed monastery and to celebrate my
own eighty-fifth birthday...
I was able not only to establish Wat Hin
Mark Peng on a solid foundation but the remaining resources
were shared out... among other deserving monasteries, schools
and hospitals etc... To give some idea of this I will mention
those projects that I can remember and have not yet described:
1. Wat Araññavaasee received an Uposatha
Hall, a Dhamma Study Hall, two kutis, a perimeter wall and a
concrete road. This cost more than nine million baht.
2. Wat Phra Buddhabaht-korkaeng (Wen Koom)...
Srii Chiang Mai District received buildings costing more than
three and a half million baht.
3. Wat Pah Kut Ngiew... Bahn Peur
District... more than two million baht.
4. Wat Phra Buddhabaht-Bua-bok... Bahn Peur
District... more than three and a half million baht.
5. Wat Pah Desarangsee (Wang Nam Mork)...
Srii Chiang Mai District... two and a half million baht.
6. Wat Bodhisomphorn... in Udorn-thani
where one million baht was donated.
7. The Phra Buddhabaht-Desarangsee-Vitayah
School... of Srii Chiang Mai District and the Glahng Yai
Nirodharangsee School... in Bahn Peur District received school
buildings worth four million seven hundred thousand baht.
The Ministry of Education acknowledged this aid to their
school's programme by honoring me in 1987 and 1988 with their
special award... and likewise in 1989 from the National
Committee for Primary Education...
8. The Nirodharangsee-kampeepaññajahn Trust
which is a scholarship fund for poor but well behaved, hard
working and clever students in the province of Nongkhai. At
present, it contains almost one million two-hundred thousand
baht. There is also Nongkhai's Midday Meal Programme
fund for pupils that stands at almost two and a half million
baht. We are helping to provide a lunch time meal for
pupils in six schools in the Bahn Mor - Phra Buddhabaht area
and aim to give help province-wide.
9. The Thate Desarangsee Fund for caring
for the monks and novices and the maintenance of the buildings
of Wat Hin Mark Peng, which stands at five million seven
hundred thousand baht.
Besides this, there are the following
projects still being implemented:
1. A hospital ward for monks and novices at
Khon Kaen University Medical School that has four million two
hundred thousand baht allocated to it at present.
2. A hospital ward in the district hospital
of Pa Tew in Chumporn Province that my devotees have named the
Luang Poo Thate Desarangsee Eighty-eighth Year Memorial
Building and to which they have contributed three million
baht.
3. An Uposatha Hall at Wat Pah Nah Seedah...
4. A crematorium for Wat Hin Mark...
5. A water treatment plant for Wat Hin
Mark...
6. A Shrine Hall and guest kuti at Wat Hin
Mark...
Plans to build a Chedi-Museum are now
nearing completion.
Glossary
The words defined in this concise Glossary236
are mostly either Pali, the language of the Theravada Buddhist
scriptures, or Thai.
For Thai measurements, place names, titles
etc., also see under that heading.
Aacariya-vat' (Thai-Pali):
Acts of service by a junior monk or novice for his teacher (Ajahn),
e.g., supplying drinking and washing water, cleaning his hut
or kuti, washing his robes, etc. This is part of the
monastic training laid down by the Buddha.
Ajahn (Thai): Teacher. A
respectful title used for senior monks and one's meditation
teacher. (Also more generally for university teachers, etc.)
See Thai Titles.
Anattaa: 'Not-self',
egolessness, one of the three characteristics of all
existence. See Ti- lakkha.na.
Aniccaa: Impermanent,
transient, one of the three characteristics of all existence.
See Ti- lakkha.na.
Añjali: Raising the hands,
palms together, as a gesture of respect. Grahp:
(Thai) bowing from the kneeling position to show high respect.
Arahant: Worthy one; one who
has attained Nibbana.
Asubha: Meditation on the
unbeautiful, 'loathsome', usually ignored, side of the body.
Used together with the three characteristics of existence as
an antidote for infatuation. Also see Kamma.t.thana
— kaayagataasati.
Bhavanga: In Thai used to
describe a trance-like meditative state; the mind's underlying
resting place. Also see reference in separate glossary to
'Steps Along the Path'.
Bhikkhu: A Buddhist monk; an
alms mendicant.
Brahmacariya: The Holy life;
religious life; strict chastity.
Buddha: The Awakened One;
Enlightened One; usually referring to Siddhattha Gotama after
his Enlightenment.
Chedi (Thai); Cetiya
(Pali): Stupa, pagoda, usually a cone shaped monument
containing relics.
Chee-pah kao: One who wears
white robes (rather than the yellow robes of monk or novice)
and who lives the homeless life under the Eight Precepts. Also
see Maer Chee.
Citta (Pali); jhit,
jhit-jai (Thai): Mind; heart.
Dhamma: The Teachings (of the
Buddha); the Truth; the Supramundane; virtue.
dhamma: Thing; phenomenon;
nature; condition.
Dhammayut'( Nikaaya): One of
the two Theravada 'sects' in Thailand. See Appendix C.
Dhaatu: An element; natural
condition; earth, water, fire and wind or air.
Dhaatu-khandha (Thai): the body. Taht
(Thai): the elemental 'winds', 'humors', physiological
processes, from a Thai traditional view point.
Dhutanga: See Tudong.
Dukkha: Suffering. See Noble
Truths.
Ittarom (??? Thai);
i.t.thaarama.na (Pali): Those four arom or
objects that (as far as the world is concerned) are worth
wishing for: material gains, rank, praise and pleasure.
Jhaana: Meditative
absorption in a single object. Full concentration. Also see
Nirodha- samaapatti.
Kamma (Pali); Karma
(Sanskrit): Intention, volitional speech and action, which can
be wholesome, unwholesome or neutral.
Kamma.t.thaana: (1) 'Working
ground' or subject of meditation; the act of meditation. The
subjects mentioned in this book are: AAnaapaana-sati:
mindfulness of breathing. (Also see A. I. 30,41;
Vism. 197); Buddhaanus-sati: recollection of
the virtues and qualities of the Lord Buddha. (Also see A.
VI, 10, 25; D.33; Vis. VII.) The Thai daily chanting also
includes such a recollection; Kaayagataa-sati:
mindfulness occupied with the body; contemplation on the 32
impure parts of the body.
Kamma.t.thaana: (2) This is
also used as a general term describing the way of practice of
meditation monks originating in the forests of N.E. Thailand.
Ka.thina: The annual
robes-giving ceremony, offered sometime during the month
following the Rains Retreat.
Khandha: Aggregate; category.
Refers to each of the five components of human psycho-physical
existence: body, feeling, perception, mental-formation,
consciousness. For the unenlightened, these form the five
groups of clinging for the identification of 'self'.
Kilesa: Defilements;
impurities; impairments. These include: greed, hatred,
delusion, conceit, wrong view, doubt or uncertainty, sloth,
restlessness, shamelessness, lack of moral concern.
Krot (Thai): A large
umbrella, usually hand-made from bamboo and cloth, used as a
forest shelter by hanging a mosquito net from it.
Kuti (Thai-Pali): A monk's
hut or simple shelter. (Often translated here as 'hut'.)
However, it can also mean any dwelling place for monks or nuns
so in the more established monasteries it might be quite a big
structure.
Maer Chee (Thai): A nun in
white robes who keeps either Eight or Ten Precepts. Also see:
Chee- pah kao.
Mahamakut Monastic College: A
monk's university based at Wat Bovoranives in Bangkok, which
is the central organizing authority for many official Dhamma
courses and their examination.
Mahaa-nikaaya: The older and
numerically larger of the two 'sects' of Thai Theravada
Buddhism. See Appendix C.
Mondop: A large, usually
square-sectioned monument or building.
Naama (-dhamma): Mind; name;
mental factors; mentality. Also Ruupa-dhamma.
Ñaa.na: Knowledge; wisdom;
insight.
Nekkhamma: Renunciation;
letting go; giving up the world; self-denial. This term is
always used in the Pali texts as an antonym to kaama,
sensuality.
Nibbaana (Pali); Nirvana
(Sanskrit): The extinction of the fires of greed, hatred and
ignorance; the extinction of all defilements and suffering;
Liberation; the Unconditioned.
Nikaya: A grouping or 'sect',
which has developed in the Bhikkhu Sangha.
Nimit' (Thai); Nimitta
(Pali): Mark, sign. An image or vision, which sometimes arises
in meditation.
Nirodha-samaapatti: Highest
state of concentration possible, where there is a temporary
suspension of all consciousness and mental activity. (See the
Po.t.thapaada Sutta (D.i.178); Vis. XXIII.) Also
Saññaa-vedayita-nirodha.
Noble Truths (The Four):
The briefest synthesis of the entire teachings of Buddhism:
The Truth of: (1) Suffering (Dukkha); (2) the Cause,
Origin or Source of Suffering (Samudaya); (3) the
Cessation or Extinction of Suffering (Nirodha); (4) the
Path, the Way, the Noble Eightfold Path (Magga).
Ordination; Upasampadaa
(Pali), Boo-at (Thai): Going Forth; this is the
assembled monk's formal acceptance of a candidate-monk into
the Community. There is no taking of life- vows. This is
therefore different from the Christian 'ordination'.
Pali: The language of the
ancient texts of the Theravaada Canon.
Paaraajika: The four most
serious offenses against the Monk's Discipline (the
Vinaya Rule), which automatically causes the offender
to fall from being a monk. They are: sexual intercourse,
theft, murder and falsely claiming supernormal attainments.
Paaramii (Paaramitaa):
'Perfection'. Ten qualities leading to Buddha-hood:
generosity, morality, renunciation, wisdom, energy, patience,
honesty, determination, loving-kindness, and equanimity.
Paa.timokkha: The fundamental
227 rules observed by monks (bhikkhus). A single monk
recites it with the whole Community (of monks) present, every
lunar fortnight.
Pavaara.na: The annual formal
assembly for bhikkhus that marks the end of the Rains Retreat;
when each monk offers the others the opportunity to admonish
him for any transgressions he may have committed.
Rains Retreat; Pansah
(Thai); Vassa (Pali): The annual three month
period during the monsoon season, — from the full moon
(usually) of July to the full moon (usually) of October — when
monks are restricted from traveling. It also is the measure of
years for a monk or nun.
Ruupa(-dhamma): Matter; form;
material; body; corporeality. See Naama-dhamma.
Sala (Thai): The usually
quite large, open-sided hall used for general meetings or more
specific functions.
Samaadhi: Concentration; one-pointedness
of mind; the condition of mind when focussed, centered and
still.
Sama.na: Recluse; holy one; a
Buddhist monk; one following the Brahmacariya.
Sa"ngha: (lit: congregation)
(1) Those Noble Ones forming the third of the Three Jewels;
(2) the Order of monks.
Sa.nkhaara: Compounded
things, conditioned things, formative factors, determinations.
Sappaaya: Favorable
conditions (for meditation, etc.): suitable abode; suitable
location; suitable speech; suitable person (as spiritual
companion and teacher); suitable food; suitable climate;
suitable posture.
Sati: Mindfulness; awareness;
attentiveness.
Siila: Virtue; morality;
moral conduct; a precept; training rule. See Appendix A.
Siima: The formally agreed
and designated assembly place required for any formal meeting
of the Community of monks. In Thailand they mark this area by
boundary stones which usually encircle the Uposatha Hall.
Thai: The author's home
language is the Northeastern dialect, which is very close to
Laotian. As in English, where many root words come from Greek
and Latin, Thai has many that come from Pali and Sanskrit —
especially in Buddhist terminology. Some of the following
names and titles are therefore Thai-Pali.
— Thai Measurements:
Baht: The Thai currency. (25 baht are (1992) worth one
US$); Sen: The old Thai unit of distance, equal
to 40 metres; Rai: The old Thai unit of area,
equal to 1600 sq. metres. (2.53 rai = one acre.)
— Thai Place Names: villages
are often named after a local feature of the landscape so:
Bahn = Village; Dong = Rain Forest;
Nakorn = City; Nah = Field;
Nong = Swampy Lake; Phra Bart =
Buddha-footprint; Poo = Mountain; Tam
= Cave. (Over the years, with the increase in population some
villages have become towns and then Districts and then even
Provinces.)
— Thai Titles: In Thailand,
not using an honorific before the person's name is rude —
unless speaking to intimates or children. Hence the large
number of 'titles'.
Ajahn (Thai); Acariya
(Pali): Ven. Teacher; Meditation Master. (Also sometimes used
as an honorific for school teachers, etc.); Khun
(Thai): the equivalent of Mr., Mrs., or Ms.; Phra
or Tahn: Venerable, generally used in addressing
younger monks; Phra Thera: a senior monk of at
least 10 years standing but usually much more; Luang Por
(Ven. Father), Luang Poo (Ven. Grandfather):
These are both general forms of address to highly venerated
Elder monks; Luang Dtah is less respectful. It
is often applied to a monk ordained late in life, perhaps
after having a family.
Somdet; Chao Khun;
Phra Khru: Officially awarded ecclesiastical
titles. As one moves up the hierarchy, so one's title changes
and another monk may then receive that same title. This can be
confusing, therefore their Thai name is often appended in
brackets to differentiate between holders of the same title.
Ti-lakkha.na: The
'three characteristics of existence' are Impermanency (aniccaa),
Suffering (dukkha), and Not-self (anattaa).
Tudong (Thai); dhutanga
(Pali): Often refers to the forest monk's way of life, his
wandering through forests and living at the foot of trees. It
more literally refers to the 'austere practices' that are
'means of shaking off or removing defilements'. Traditionally
(Vism. 59- 83) there are thirteen of these: wearing
refuse-rag robes; possessing only the three robes; eating only
alms food; on alms round going from house to house; eating
only one meal a day; eating only from one's alms bowl;
refusing food that comes late; forest dweller's practice;
living at the roots of trees; open-air dweller's practice;
charnel-ground dweller's practice; any-bed user's practice;
sitter's practice (of not lying down).
Uposatha: Observance Day.
Also see Wan Phra.
Uposatha (Pali); Bot
(Thai): In established monasteries there is usually a special
Shrine Hall, often with the main Buddha-statue, where all
formal Sangha observances are carried out. In forest
monasteries more informal arrangements are allowed by the
Discipline.
Vinaya: Monastic Discipline
or Rule, which includes the core 227 Paatimokkha rules
together with many other ordinances for the right living and
harmony of the Community of monks.
Wan Phra: (Thai): The
Observance Day (Quarter-moon Day) or 'Buddhist Sabbath'
follows a lunar calender. The villagers of that time would
also measure their year in lunar months and days. So, for
example, rather than Monday, Tuesday, etc., they would refer
to 'the second or third day of the waxing moon'. Also
Uposatha.
Wat (Thai): A monastery or
'temple'.
The Meaning of Anattaa 237
Anything fashioned by conditions, whether
physical or mental, is called a sa.nkhaara. All
sa.nkhaaras are unsteady and inconstant (anicca.m)
because they are continually moving and changing about. All
sa.nkhaaras are incapable of maintaining a lasting
oneness: This is why they are said to be stressful (dukkha.m).
No sa.nkhaaras lie under anyone's control. They keep
changing continually, and no one can prevent them from doing
so, which is why they are said to be not-self (anattaa).
All things, whether mental or physical, if they have
these characteristics by nature, are said to be not-self. Even
the quality of deathlessness — which is a quality or
phenomenon free from fashioning conditions, and which is the
only thing in a state of lasting oneness — is also said to be
not-self, because it lies above and beyond everything else. No
one can think it or pull it under his or her control. Only
those of right view, whose conduct lies within the factors of
the path, can enter in to see this natural quality and remove
their attachments to all things — including their attachment
to the agent that goes about knowing those things. In the end,
there is no agent attaining or getting anything. However
natural phenomena behave, that is how they simply keep on
behaving at all times.
When meditators practice correctly and have
the discernment to see that quality (of deathlessness) as it
really is, the result is that they can withdraw their
attachments from all things — including their attachment to
the discernment that enters in to see the quality as it really
is.
The practice of all things good and noble
is to reach this very point.
Ven. Phra Ajahn Thate Desarangsee
Notes
1.
7 # 5 4 [In the traditional Thai calendar: 7 = the seventh
day (Saturday); 5 = the fifth lunar month; 4 = the fourth
day of the waning moon — JTB]
2.
He finally received the ecclesiastical title of Phra
Raja-nirodharangsee
3.
The Buddhist texts were traditionally inscribed in these
characters which are of Indo-Cambodian root. See Appendix
B.
4.
As opposed to the local Esan or Northeast regional
dialect.
5.
A forest fruit abundant in the North-east of Thailand that
could be eaten when there was no rice.
7.
See Glossary. Thai Measurements.
8.
There are no obligatory life vows for Buddhist monks.
9.
Kamma.t.thaana monks. See Glossary.
10.
The nursery-rice fields are sown by 'broadcast-sowing' and
the young seedlings therefore need to be separated and
individually replanted in larger, prepared fields. This
must all be done by hand with bent back, as each seedling
is pushed into the half-flooded paddy fields.
11. I.e., the basic diet.
12. Rice planted on upland fields, which is a
different strain from that planted in the flooded paddy
fields.
13. The skilled splitting of bamboo and whittling
the strips to raffia thinness. Reaping would usually start
at dawn, when the dampness keeps the bamboo strips pliable
enough to be pulled tightly around the rice sheaf.
14. The typical cart would have been two-wheeled,
with a yoke for a pair of water buffalo. During plowing,
one water buffalo at a time would be used to pull the plow
through the semi-flooded paddy-fields.
15. Dukkha Sacca. The term dukkha
(suffering) is not limited to painful experience but
refers to the ultimate unsatisfactory nature and the
general insecurity of all conditioned phenomena which, on
account of their impermanence, are all liable to be
unfulfilling. This needs great wisdom to see in its true
profundity. See Glossary: Noble Truths.
16. Folk belief spoke of charms, herbs, and
magical tattoos that would 'armour' the skin against any
weapon.
17. Occult and magical things.
18. Ordering others to kill any living creature is
a breach of the monastic discipline and of basic Buddhist
morality.
19. Thailand even sent troops, late in 1918, to
help the Allies.
20. Venerable Ajahn Mun (1870-1949), through his
impeccable example and skill in teaching others, was
mainly responsible for revitalizing the forest tradition
in modern Thailand. He taught and trained many disciples
who became meditation masters in their own right. Through
the purity of their practice and by pointing to the
essence of the Buddha's Teachings, they were able to
inspire people to cultivate the Buddhist Path throughout
Thailand and later overseas. Nowadays, he is considered
the 'Father' of the present N.E. Thailand meditation
tradition.
21. Wandering for seclusion through the forest.
See Glossary.
22. pra-kane (Thai): formally offering
certain articles, mainly food or medicines, into the hands
of the monk.
23. Concentration. See Glossary.
24. Walking along the paddy dyke paths.
25. Huts used by the villagers when out working in
their fields, usually just a very simple thatch and bamboo
structure raised on posts.
26. Wat is a monastery or 'temple'.
27. Lit: the 'going forth', Pabbajaa (Pali);
going-forth or 'novice-ordination'. Full 'bhikkhu
ordination' requires a minimum age of 20 years.
28. The Traibhum or Three Worlds, a
cosmogony and commentary.
29. Nak Dhamm'. It has three grades: Grade
Three (Nak Dhamm' Dtree), Grade Two (Nak Dhamm'
Toh), and the top Grade One (Nak Dhamm' Aek).
33. Upajjhaaya: The head monk who presides
over the ordination ceremony.
34. Kammavaacaariya: Another senior monk
who recommends the ordination candidate's acceptance into
the community of monks.
35. The month of offering and sewing of robes
immediately following the Rains Retreat.
36. Pali is examined in nine grades. On passing
grade three one is given the title Mahaa before
one's name.
37. In those days tudong was uncommon, and
some saw it akin to undisciplined vagrancy. A monk's
parents might be shocked and ashamed to discover that
their son had left on tudong.
38. Young boys would lodge with a monk, helping
him with chores while receiving support and education.
This enabled poor boys from villages without schools to
come and live in the towns and it formed a route for them
to go on to higher education.
39. Lit: the twelfth [lunar] month.
40. Probably meaning the making and repair of
robes, krot, bowl-stand, etc.
41. Daily Chanting and Recollection of the Buddha,
Dhamma and Sangha.
42. The jungle at night is very dark and
even darker during a storm.
43. Kuti: (Normally) a very simple hut or
dwelling for a monk or nun.
45. Venerable Ajahn Sao Kantasiilo (1860-1942)
(pronounced 'Sow') was Venerable Ajahn Mun's original
teacher, and together they were the 'Fathers' of the Thai
forest meditation lineage.
46. Sappaaya: See Glossary.
47. Aegle marmelos: a medicinal, hard
shelled fruit, about the size of an orange.
48. Acariya-vat': these duties form part of
the young monk's training. See Glossary.
49. A title of respect for an elderly lady.
50. On transferring to the other Nikaya,
(Group or 'sect') the counting of seniority starts again.
See Glossary and Appendix C.
51. Saññaa-vipallaasa: delusional
derangement.
52. Paaraajika: meaning he would have to
disrobe. See Glossary.
53. I.e., he claimed enlightenment.
54. Conditions can be exacerbated by the local
jungle's heat and humidity.
55. He had actually stopped breathing for quite a
period, before recovering.
56. An area of jungle outside the town, set aside
for the cremating of dead bodies. Somewhere feared by the
residents but favored as a place of solitude by tudong
monks.
57. Dhaatu (Pali) — Taht (Thai): See
Glossary.
58. Pee (Thai) means a ghost or spirit, of
which there are many varieties. The pee-um
manifests as a suffocating feeling or a kind of nightmare,
as if a ghost is sitting astride one's chest.
59. Country folk inevitably hunted in the jungles
and fished in the floods.
60. Pogostemon patchouli: from which
camphor-like crystal smelling salts are made.
61. 'Subconsciousness'. See Glossary.
62. Nirodha-samaapatti. See Glossary.
63. Ayatana: the eyes, ears, nose, tongue,
touch and mind 'doors'.
64. [Iddhi-]patiharn (Thai): psychic powers
and such like.
65. Before entering, the determination is made to
withdraw after a certain length of time.
66. Jhaana: full concentration on a single
object. See Glossary.
67. Saññaa-vedayita-nirodha (also called
nirodha-samaapatti); magga, phala, nibbana; jhaana-
samaapatti
68. Lit: ghost or demon realms; i.e., those of
blame and doubt. The previous paragraphs and hypothetical
questions are phrased this way to forestall any criticism
that the author, by even bringing up such profound
subjects, might be seen as hinting about his own
attainments.
69. This lacuna appears in the original, probably
meaning that it is better to go no further into the
matter.
70. Chee-pah kao: A layman who lives the
homeless life under Eight Precepts, wearing white robes
rather than the saffron robes of a monk or novice. See
Appendix A.
71. A folk belief that any sudden or extraordinary
abundance was an omen of approaching death.
72. Lit: dhaatu-khandha and aayatana.
73. Luang Dtah: See Thai Titles in
Glossary. Mun is a given name and this is not the
same person as the famous meditation master.
74. [sic] Master or Mister,
not Venerable.
75. In those days, monks who were able to live
unharmed in remote, 'demon-infested' caves and jungles
were held in superstitious awe.
76. The traditional Pali phrases start with: "Araha.m
sammaa sambuddho... ".
77. Monks who have committed a paaraajika
offence are barred.
78. There are no life vows for Buddhist monks.
Badly practicing monks, especially those who have broken
the paaraajika offenses, can tarnish the whole
Community. A monk guilty of such an offence — in this
case, falsely claiming to be an arahant — is
automatically no longer considered a monk even though he
may still be wearing robes.
79. To Thai ears, the cock normally crows: "aek-ee-aek-aekkk".
But Luang Dtee-a now heard: "jhit-jao- pen-aek,"
where aek means one.
80. 'Dtook-gaer' is the Thai name for the
gecko-lizard, and for its cry; 'dtoo-a -jow-gaer-laew'
is its new message, where gaer means old.
81. Described following a famous Thai literary
mountain-maze.
82. Dtai (Thai): the old style torch made
from crumbly, rotten wood particles, compressed in an
inflammable resin and bound in leaves in a long cylinder.
83. According to the monk's discipline, water has
to be filtered of all living creatures before use.
84. Wan Phra: The Buddhist 'Sabbath', which
falls on the full, new and quarter moons.
85. This would break the monk's and nun's
Precepts.
86. Often employed in exorcising
'demon-possession'. The villagers still had many animist
beliefs.
87. In the days before motorized rice mills, each
house would have a stamp mill. The 'mortar' would usually
be a partially hollowed out tree trunk into which the
unhusked rice would be fed by one person, while another
person worked the pestle. This was pivoted on a long pole
so that stepping with all one's weight on one end would
lift the heavy pestle up at the other end. Stepping off,
the pestle would fall on and pound the husks from the
rice. Collecting water from the village well and pounding
the rice were daily chores.
88. An 'adept' initiated into some occult power.
It could be concerned with medicines, black magic, hunting
powers, or, in this case, invulnerability. It was believed
that certain ritualistic rules secretly received from the
teacher had to be strictly observed in order for the
spells and 'gifts' to keep on working.
89. I.e., reversing or inverting the normal act of
respect. Feet are considered unmentionably low and
contemptible in polite Thai society. The author adds his
apologies in parentheses for even mentioning the matter!
90. A power object, an amulet or charm.
91. Wat Pah Salawan. The rail line had not then
been extended to Udorn-thani and Nongkhai.
92. A constitutional monarchal style of democracy.
93. Lit: great convergence.
94. Asubha. See Glossary.
95. Nakorn Wiang-jan (Thai-Lao): then the French
colonial capital of Laos.
96. The ancient northern Lao capital, Nakorn Luang
= Capital City.
97. The River Mekong is a great river, but the
volume of water rapidly declines after the Monsoon so that
massive 'island' sand banks are exposed.
98. A famous statue of the Buddha, after which the
city is named.
99. The river usually forms the border between
Laos and Thailand except for this stretch, where both
banks belong to Laos.
100. The traditional medicines from the Buddha's
time were often pickled in (cow's) urine.
101. Buses
or trains were rarely available.
102.
Probably the scholastic monks.
103. As the
author explains at the end of this section, this is aimed
mainly at monks (and celibates) and should be understood
in that context. The special Thai vocabulary for monks is
sometimes used and this makes close translation difficult.
104.
Celibate life. See Glossary.
105.
Mahaa-niyom was originally the verse (gaathaa),
'mettaa-mahaa-niyom'. This then became an idiom,
meaning that someone is attractive or charming, having
charisma, perhaps by using an occult spell to make one
desirable to others.
106.
Unfortunately, it is still very much the case that
ordination for men is much more widely supported and
therefore more easily accomplished.
107.
According to the monastic discipline, a monk or nun cannot
be alone with the opposite sex and always needs a
chaperon.
108. There
is a tradition in Thailand that every young man should
ordain for a certain period — here are no life vows for a
mon — which shows his 'maturity', after that he may marry.
Therefore monks, in some quarters, may be considered
desirable future partners.
109. Cousin
of the Buddha and personal attendant, renowned for his
memory of the Buddha's discourses.
110.
Ittarom. See Glossary.
111.
Fully-ordained Buddhist nun. This eminent disciple of the
Buddha, Ayya Upalava.n.na, was an arahant and
foremost in psychic powers amongst women.
112. I.e.,
by not indulging in sensual pleasures but turning to
examine their effect on the mind, one can transcend them.
Thus there is neither indulgence, nor repression but the
middle path of restraint and insight.
113. Lit: of
the samana (recluse, lit: 'the peaceful one' )
gender. (In Thai there are three genders: male, female and
samana.)
114. A Thai
pun: to mould or fashion = pan; fist = kam-pan.
115.
According to the monastic Rule, monks are strictly
prohibited from accepting money, gold and silver.
116. Craving
for and indulgence in pleasurable experience arising from
the five senses.
117. The
Shan States and Burma are mainly Buddhist; many of the
hill tribes are Buddhist(-animist).
118. This
area of Burma was home to many ethnic groups: Shan, Mon,
Karen etc., and it was still under British colonial rule.
119. Lit:
the Japanese War.
120. The
familiar name of Piboon Songkram, who headed the Thai
government at that time.
121. One of
the highest in Thailand, over 2,000 metres.
122.
Muntiacus muntjak are quite small in size, have a
barking cry when alarmed, and are normally very shy.
123.
Ang-sa: (Thai) the long, narrow rectangular piece of
yellow cloth, worn across the left shoulder beneath the
monk's robe.
124. An
ordinary candle protected from the wind by a cylinder of
cloth. Normally used by forest monks.
125. Monks
on tudong would carry a bag with bowl and spare
robes over one shoulder while the other shoulder was
balanced with a small bag and krot.
126.
Acacia insuavis (Leguminosae).
127. Mi-ang
is the fermented tea leaf, so this would be an area of tea
bush plantation, quite high up in the mountains.
128. Ti-lakkha.na:
impermanence; suffering; not-self. See Glossary.
130.
Buddhaanussati: See Kamma.t.thaana: in
Glossary.
131. The
different hilltribe groups have their own distinct
languages, mostly quite different from Thai. In those days
with no schools, most people would not be able to speak
Thai.
132. See
Glossary. ('Body and mind-concomitants'.)
133. Lit:
"would have made for a lot of fun." A euphemistic way of
saying that he might have become unbalanced.
134. A monk
depends on the generosity and goodwill of the lay people
for his alms food. If there are many villagers, however
poor, each will only be required to contribute a small
portion. If there are too few families, unless
specifically invited, a monk may feel reluctant to stay
there so as not to impose on them.
135. For
Thais, rice is the staple at every meal. In Thai, 'to eat'
literally is 'to eat rice'.
136. Wild
yams, taros and other potato-type tubers were widely found
and eaten throughout Northern Thailand. In the North-east
of Thailand, they were considered more a famine food,
glutinous rice being very much the staple.
137.
Attakilamathaanuyoga. See (Sam. LVI. 11).
138.
Colocasia antiquorum Aroideae, the coco-yam or taro.
139. Pai
is a playing or gambling card; too-ah and be-er
are gambling games using cowrie shells.
140. Lit:
'to lay down forest cloth.' In the Lord Buddha's time, the
monks would collect discarded cloth to wash and sew
together into 'rag-robes'. Tort phah pah continues
this tradition, sometimes by offering the cloth with a
leafy branch resting on it, sometimes by actually laying
out the cloth in the bushes where the monk would pass.
141. Lit:
'hot-hearted', i.e., impatient for quick results.
142. Pee
dtong leeung: where pee is spirit or ghost;
dtong is a large (banana) leaf; leeung is
yellow. This tribe is also called the Marabi, an ethnic
group of North Thailand.
143. In the
Shan States of Burma.
144. Kan-dtok
and kan-pahn: types of large raised trays on
pedestals.
145.
Generally, Thais are very modest about such things.
146. Unlike
other parts of Thailand where snakes are sometimes eaten,
and meat and fish may be only half-cooked or raw
147. Of the
sack- or upas-tree, Antiaris toxicaria
(Urticaceae).
148. Slaves
were commonplace up until the late nineteenth century.
149.
Anusaya-kilesa: seven unwholesome latent defiling
tendencies or inclinations of the mind: sensuality;
grudge; speculative opinions; doubts; conceit; craving for
continued existence; ignorance. Fear falls in the realm of
the last three.
150.
Vaasanaa-nisai. He was praised by the Buddha as being
foremost in wisdom and ability to expound on the Dhamma.
(Although some other individual traits were also remarked
upon.)
151. Phra
Sammaa Sambuddha Chao who has fulfilled all the
Perfections (paaramii: See Glossary) and thereby
perfected his whole character and transcended all
personality traits.
153.
Jhaana: there are eight levels of absorption
concentration depending on the refinement of the
meditation.
154.
Pubbe-senha-sannivaasa: a Pali-Thai word pointing to
the power of remembering former births, specifically one's
former partner.
155. The
leader and personification of evil forces.
156.
paaramii. See Glossary.
157. khun
(Thai). There are plays on words here difficult to convey
in English.
158.
Kaama-khun (Thai); in Pali (kaama-gu.na) means
'the cords (or strands) of sensuality'. (See D.33;
M.13, 26, 59, 66).
159.
Nekkhamma (Pali): renunciation. This term is always
used in the Pali texts as antonym to kaama.
160. A
hollow section of large bamboo gives a deep resonant
sound, often used in the villages for signalling, almost
like a drum.
161. Austere
practices. See Tudong in Glossary.
162.
Abhiññaa: psychic powers; divine ear; reading the
minds of others; remembering past lives; divine eye;
knowledge of liberation of the mind.
163. Ti-lakkha.na.
See Glossary.
164.
Lokiiya-abhiññaa; lokiiya-jhaana: mundane psychic
powers and absorption-concentration of the unenlightened
being.
165. A
cousin of the Lord Buddha, who originally had mundane
psychic powers but through jealousy and ambition
eventually tried to kill the Buddha and subsequently lost
them.
166. An
ancient, devoutly Buddhist people, once powerful in
present day Burma and Thailand, now an ethnic minority
group in both countries.
167. Ti-sara.nagamana:
Taking refuge in the Buddha, Dhamma and Sangha.
168. Now the
main Dhammayut' monastery in the town of
Udorn-thani.
169. In
Thailand, this is traditionally considered a very
inauspicious dream.
170. An
annual ceremony where the villagers present offerings to
the monks to make merit for the dead, while the
distribution of the gifts is done by drawing lots.
171.
Dhamma-osot (Thai): To cure sickness through the
practice of Dhamma, using the healing power of virtue and
meditation.
172. Not to
be confused with the more famous Ajahn Mahaa Pin
Paññaabalo mentioned earlier.
173. The
Northeast region is generally regarded as the poorest part
of Thailand. It is also the driest and most infertile so
that many people had to go off and work as laborers in the
other regions of Thailand when there was no work in the
fields.
174. See
Appendix C for background to this tension.
175. This
whole area was rich in tin deposits. Dta-gooa Toong
means Field of Tin while Tai Muang means
Behind the Mine.
176. A
monk's 'ordination' is registered and details entered in a
small identification book. This is the equivalent of the
ordinary Thai citizen's I.D. card.
177.
Historically, education had started in the local
monastery. As the bureaucracy developed, so monastic
affairs were subsumed under the Education Ministry.
178. Aesop's
Fables are taught in Thai elementary schools.
180. About
two acres. See Glossary: Thai measurements.
181.
Upajjhaaya: is a senior monk who is certified to conduct
ordinations, etc.
182. I.e.,
some donors wanted it to be used specifically for Ven.
Ajahn Thate's personal use, rather than for general use.
183. Lit:
"falling? — rising?". This refers to concentrating on
the abdominal movements from breathing.
184. Thai
idiom, meaning 'without advertising'. This development is
significant because it shows the gradual acceptance by the
central authorities of the Kammatthana Forest tradition.
185. 'Phra
Raja-tahn Samanasak', which is conferred by the king.
See Thai Titles in Glossary.
186. 'Phra
Raja-tahn Samanasak Phra Raja-kana-sahman Fai Vipassanaa.
Addressed as 'Chao Khun'.
187. Where
Arañña means 'forest'.
188.
Loka-dhamma: gain and loss; honor/prominence and
dishonor/obscurity; happiness and misery; praise and
blame. (Vis. XXII); cp. (A.VIII, 5).
189. It is
in the Poo Pahn range, with heights of over 300 metres.
190. Wild
boar were common in jungle monasteries until quite recent
times. They have a reputation for dauntlessness, agility,
toughness and the ability to eat virtually anything.
191. Hin
Mark Peng is the name for some huge rocks on the bank of
the River Mekong.
192. This
refers to the traditional design, being raised off the
ground on posts, with a high peaked, steeply angled roof
(for better rain run-off during the monsoon season). 'Hut'
is here the normal translation of kuti however this
can be any-sized dwelling for monks or nuns.
193. This
exemplifies the author's wish to show appreciation for
such good works. As specific names and costs are not as
meaningful for non-Thai readers, the author has given
permission for future passages to be simplified which is
indicated by ellipses...
194.
Collecting water from the roof, mainly for drinking during
the long, hot dry season.
195. A long,
low boat with an extended propeller shaft.
196. I.e.,
the full specified three months were not completed.
197.
Thinking that he might have seen the future winning
numbers in his meditation.
198.
Thailand has always been open to missionaries. The Thai
king is Buddhist but protects all religions.
199.
Buddhism declined from being a major religion in India for
many reasons: The Muslim invasions from the North-west,
the Hindu resurgence and a probable decline in Dhamma
practice. The famous Buddhist 'temple' in Bodh' Gaya
became a Hindu temple until this century, when a 'Buddhist
revival' has led to its restoration.
200. Place
of the Buddha's Birth, Enlightenment, First Dhamma
Teaching and Final Passing Away.
201. Bangkok
is the western name, in Thai it is 'Krung Thep' or City of
Angels.
202. People
who have realized the first of the four stages of
enlightenment.
203. I.e.,
rather than the underlying problems being class and
capital, they are greed, aversion and
delusion.
204. Compare
with Bangkok!
205. Lit:
like playing the flute to a water buffalo. Like 'pearls
before swine', perhaps.
206. In
accordance with Thai good manners.
207. The
ellipses in this paragraph are in the original.
208.
Meditative absorption on an object.
209. Quoting
some teachings of the Buddha.
210.
Nirandorn means 'eternity'.
211.
Meditative absorption on a non-material object
212. When
Prince Siddhattha Gotama went forth from his palace into
the homeless life, these were his first teachers whom he
then surpassed. See the Ariyapariyesena Sutta
[M.I.163-166].
213. The
former capital of Siam between 1569-1767, when it was
destroyed by invading Burmese forces.
214. 'Pucchavipassana
Dhamma Nai Dtang Pratate'; 'Prawat Cheewit Karn Pai Dtang
Pratate'. No English translation is available. ???
include Thai titles ???
215.
Durio zibethinus (Malvaceae). The durian is generally
highly prized and one of the most expensive fruits. There
is a skill to splitting it open without spoiling the
succulent fruit inside.
216. This
includes generosity, morality, right livelihood and
meditation.
217.
Vatacakra (Thai); va.t.tacakka (Pali).
218.
Becoming monks for a short period.
219. Lit:
children and grandchildren.
220. For
more details see Appendix D.
223.
Sankhaara. See Glossary.
224.
Volitional action. See Glossary.
225. The
preta or realm of hungry ghosts; avicii is one
of the most painful hells. But note that no realm is
eternal for all are conditioned by one's deeds or kamma.
226. See the
following section for the venerable author's own passing
and funeral.
227. Based
on "A Disciple's Notes" in a Thai language memorial
publication: ???
228. See
Section 29 above.
229. In
Thailand, the bodies of important people will be preserved
for a certain time to allow suitable arrangements to be
prepared and for people to come and pay their last
respects. Two of Venerable Ajahn Thate's prominent
supporters had also already built a crematorium and chedi
at Wat Hin Mark Peng.
230.
Recommended by the Buddha himself.
231. This
had been added by the translator for those unfamiliar with
the Buddhist Precepts. They are mentioned throughout the
text.
232.
Included as an addition at the back of the original Thai
edition of the Autobiography.
233. Thai
Law has special regulations about such things.
234. In the
traditional Thai architectural style.
235. In
Thailand, one's birth-year accords with the name of an
animal and a number. There are twelve animals in the cycle
and ten numbers, which means both cycles come full circle
at age 60. It is considered an especially significant
birthday.
236. Another
Glossary specifically for Steps along the Path
follows that work.
237.
Translated from the Thai by Thanissaro Bhikkhu.
|